2013 Chevrolet Sonic Owners

Chevrolet Sonic Owner Manual - 2013 - 2nd PrintReady - 10/11/12 Black plate (1,1)
2013 Chevrolet Sonic Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Downloadable Applications . . . 7-45

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Bluetooth Phone/Devices . . . . . 7-50
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Luggage/Load Locations . . . . . . . 4-1 Trademarks and License
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2 Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Performance and
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Keys, Doors, and Warning Lights, Gauges, and Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-26 Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-13
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-21
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-28
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-38
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
2013 Chevrolet Sonic Owner Manual M
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-12
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74 Vehicle Data Recording and
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77 Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2 OnStar Additional
Special Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Additional Maintenance
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . 11-12
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-15
Introduction iii
specific vehicle to confirm each of Using this Manual

the features found on your vehicle.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, To quickly locate information about
substitute the name General the vehicle, use the Index in the
Motors of Canada Limited for back of the manual. It is an
Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it alphabetical list of what is in the
appears in this manual. manual and the page number where
The names, logos, emblems, it can be found.
slogans, vehicle model names, and Keep this manual in the vehicle for
vehicle body designs appearing in quick reference. Danger, Warnings, and
this manual including, but not limited
to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET, Canadian Vehicle Owners Cautions
the CHEVROLET Emblem, and Warning messages found on vehicle
SONIC are trademarks and/or Propritaires Canadiens labels and in this manual describe
service marks of General Motors A French language manual can be hazards and what to do to avoid or
LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates, obtained from your dealer, at reduce them.
or licensors. www.helminc.com, or from: Danger indicates a hazard with a
This manual describes features that On peut obtenir un exemplaire de high level of risk which will result in
may or may not be on your specific ce guide en franais auprs du serious injury or death.
vehicle either because they are concessionnaire ou l'adresse Warning or Caution indicates a
options that you did not purchase or savant: hazard that could result in injury or
due to changes subsequent to the
Helm, Incorporated death.
printing of this owner manual.
Please refer to the purchase Attention: Customer Service
documentation relating to your 47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, MI 48170
Litho in U.S.A.

Part No. 22788379 B Second Printing 2012 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
iv Introduction
Symbols % : Audio Steering Wheel Controls

{ WARNING or OnStar
The vehicle has components and
These mean there is something labels that use symbols instead of $ : Brake System Warning Light
that could hurt you or other text. Symbols are shown along with " : Charging System
people. the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific I : Cruise Control
Notice: This means there is
component, control, message, B : Engine Coolant Temperature
gauge, or indicator.
something that could result in O : Exterior Lamps
property or vehicle damage. This M : This symbol is shown when
would not be covered by the you need to see your owner manual # : Fog Lamps
vehicle's warranty. for additional instructions or . : Fuel Gauge
information.
+ : Fuses
* : This symbol is shown when 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
you need to see a service manual
Changer
for additional instructions or
information. j : LATCH System Child
Restraints
Vehicle Symbol Chart
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
A circle with a slash through it is a Here are some additional symbols
safety symbol which means Do that may be found on the vehicle : : Oil Pressure
Not, Do not do this, or Do not let and what they mean. For more } : Power
this happen. information on the symbol, refer to
the Index. / : Remote Vehicle Start
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Introduction v
>: Safety Belt Reminders

7: Tire Pressure Monitor
d: Traction Control/StabiliTrak
M: Windshield Washer Fluid
vi Introduction
2 NOTES
In Brief 1-1
In Brief Vehicle Features

Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Instrument Panel Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-15
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-16
Initial Drive Information Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Driver Information
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Performance and Maintenance
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Traction Control
Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-18
Tire Sealant and
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-8
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-19
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Driving for Better Fuel
Passenger Sensing System . . . 1-9
Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Roadside Assistance
Steering Wheel
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-11
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
In Brief 1-3
1. Air Vents on page 83. 12. Data Link Connector (DLC) 23. Hazard Warning Flashers on
2. Exterior Lamp Controls on (Out of View). See Malfunction page 63.
page 61. Indicator Lamp on page 512. 24. Passenger Sensing System on
3. Instrument Panel Illumination 13. Cruise Control on page 931. page 324.
Control on page 65. 14. Steering Wheel Adjustment on
4. Turn and Lane-Change Lever. page 52.
See Turn and Lane-Change 15. Steering Wheel Controls on
Signals on page 64. page 52.
5. Instrument Cluster on page 58. 16. Ignition Switch. See Ignition
6. Horn on page 52. Positions on page 914.
7. Windshield Wiper/Washer on 17. Central Locking System on

page 53. page 27.
8. Display Screen. 18. Climate Control Systems on

page 81.
9. Infotainment on page 71.
19. Power Outlets on page 56.
10. Instrument Panel Storage on
page 41. 20. Safety Locks on page 27.
USB Port on page 720 (Inside 21. Traction Control System (TCS)
IP Storage) (If Equipped). on page 928/StabiliTrak
System on page 929.
Auxiliary Devices on page 724
(Inside IP Storage) 22. Shift Lever. See Automatic
(If Equipped). Transmission on page 921
(If Equipped) or Manual
11. Hood Release. See Hood on Transmission on page 924
page 104. (If Equipped).
1-4 In Brief
Initial Drive cranking can be stopped by turning Press K to unlock the driver door or
the ignition key to ACC/ all doors.
Information ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF. See
This section provides a brief
Starting the Engine on page 916. Press Q to lock all doors.
overview about some of the Lock and unlock feedback can be
important features that may or may Remote Keyless Entry personalized. See Vehicle
not be on your specific vehicle. (RKE) System Personalization on page 526.
For more detailed information, refer The RKE transmitter may work up to Press V to release the trunk.
to each of the features which can be 60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle.
found later in this owner manual. Press and release 7 to initiate
vehicle locator.
Starting the Engine Press and hold 7 for at least
The vehicle has a three seconds to sound the panic
Computer-Controlled Cranking alarm.
System. It assists in starting the
engine and protects components. Press 7 again to cancel the panic
If the ignition key is turned to alarm.
START and then released when the See Keys on page 21 and Remote
engine begins cranking, the engine Keyless Entry (RKE) System
will continue cranking for a few Operation on page 23.
seconds or until the engine starts.
If the engine does not start and the RKE without Remote Start Shown Remote Vehicle Start
key is held in START, cranking will
be stopped after 15 seconds to Press the key release button to For vehicles with this feature, the
prevent damage. To prevent gear extend the key blade. The key can engine can be started from outside
damage, cranking is not allowed if be used for the ignition and all the vehicle.
the engine is running. Engine locks.
In Brief 1-5
Starting the Vehicle

. Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the .
vehicle. Turn the vehicle on and then off.
See Remote Vehicle Start on
2. Press and release Q. page 24.
3. Immediately after completing
Step 2, press and hold / for at Door Locks
least two seconds or until the To lock or unlock the doors from
turn signal lamps flash. outside the vehicle:
When the engine starts, the parking . Use the key in the driver door to
lamps will turn on and remain on as lock all doors or unlock the
long as the engine is running. The driver door only. To lock or unlock the doors from
doors will be locked and the climate inside the vehicle:
control system may come on. . Press Q or K on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. . Press Q or K on the central
The engine will continue to run for
See Remote Keyless Entry locking switch.
10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a
10-minute time extension. Remote (RKE) System Operation on . Pull the door handle. Pulling the
start can be extended only once. page 23. door handle again unlatches
the door.
Canceling a Remote Start . Use the lock knob on the top of
To cancel a remote start, do one of the door panel.
the following:
For more information see:
. Aim the RKE transmitter at the . Door Locks on page 26.
vehicle and press and hold /
. Central Locking System on
until the parking lamps turn off.
page 27.
1-6 In Brief
Liftgate Trunk Release To open the trunk from outside of

the vehicle:
To lock or unlock the liftgate from To lock or unlock the trunk from the
the inside, press Q or K on the outside, press Q or K on the RKE
. Press K on the RKE transmitter,
central locking switch located on the transmitter. See Remote Keyless then use the touch pad.
center stack. Entry (RKE) System Operation on . Press V on the
page 23. RKE transmitter.
To lock or unlock the trunk from the See Trunk (Sedan) on page 28 and
inside, press Q or K on the central Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
locking switch located on the center System Operation on page 23.
stack.
Windows
Manual Windows
Use the window crank to open and
close each window.
See Manual Windows on page 215.
To open the liftgate from the

outside, press K on the
RKE transmitter, then use the
touch pad.
See Liftgate (Hatchback) on
page 29.
In Brief 1-7
Power Windows Seat Adjustment Seat Height Adjuster

Manual Seats
Push the switch down to open the If available, move the lever up or
window. Pull the front of the switch down to manually raise or lower
up to close it. To adjust a manual seat: the seat.
The switches work when the vehicle 1. Pull the handle at the front of See Seat Adjustment on page 33.
is in ON/RUN or ACC/ the seat.
ACCESSORY, or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active. 2. Slide the seat to the desired
See Retained Accessory Power position and release the handle.
(RAP) on page 918. 3. Try to move the seat back and
See Power Windows on page 215. forth to be sure it is locked in
place.
See Seat Adjustment on page 33.
1-8 In Brief
Reclining Seatbacks To return the seatback to the upright while keeping the seat and the head
position: restraint height in the proper
1. Lift the lever fully without position.
applying pressure to the See Head Restraints on page 32
seatback, and the seatback will and Seat Adjustment on page 33.
return to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to Safety Belts
make sure it is locked.
See Reclining Seatbacks on
page 34.
Second Row Seats

The rear seatbacks can be folded
To recline a manual seatback: down to increase cargo space.
1. Lift the lever. See Rear Seats on page 37.
If necessary, move the safety
belt out of the way to access the Head Restraint
lever. Adjustment
2. Move the seatback to the Do not drive until the head restraints Refer to the following sections for
desired position, and then for all occupants are installed and important information on how to use
release the lever to lock the adjusted properly. safety belts properly.
seatback in place.
To achieve a comfortable seating . Safety Belts on page 38.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to position, change the seatback
make sure it is locked in place.
. How to Wear Safety Belts
recline angle as little as necessary Properly on page 310.
In Brief 1-9
. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 311. passenger sensing system. See Move the control up, down, or side
. Lower Anchors and Tethers for Passenger Sensing System on to side to adjust the mirror.
Children (LATCH System) on page 324 for important information. See Manual Mirrors on page 213.
page 337. The passenger airbag status
indicator will be visible on the Power Outside Mirrors
Passenger Sensing instrument panel when the vehicle is
System started. See Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 511.
Mirror Adjustment
Exterior Mirrors
Manual Outside Mirrors
United States
For vehicles with power outside

mirrors:
1. Select the mirror by moving the
Canada selector switch to L for the driver
side or R for the passenger side.
The passenger sensing system
turns off the front outboard 2. Use the control knob to move
passenger frontal airbag and knee the mirror in the desired
airbag under certain conditions. No direction.
other airbag is affected by the See Power Mirrors on page 213.
1-10 In Brief
Interior Mirror To adjust the steering wheel: The dome lamp controls are in the
1. Pull the lever down. headliner above the rear seats.
Hold the inside rearview mirror in
the center to move it for a clearer 2. Move the steering wheel up, 9 : Press to turn the lamps off,
view behind your vehicle. Adjust the down, forward, and backward. even when a door is open.
mirror to avoid glare from the H : When the button is returned to
headlamps behind you. Push the 3. Pull the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in place. the middle position, the lamps turn
tab forward for daytime use and pull on automatically when a door is
it for nighttime use. Do not adjust the steering wheel opened.
See Manual Rearview Mirror on while driving.
R: Press to turn on the dome lamps.
page 215.
Interior Lighting Reading Lamps
Steering Wheel Dome Lamps
Adjustment
For vehicles with front reading

lamps, they are in the overhead
console.
# or $ : Press to turn each lamp
on or off.
In Brief 1-11
For more information about interior taillamps, license plate lamps, Windshield Wiper/Washer
lighting, see Instrument Panel sidemarker lamps, and instrument
Illumination Control on page 65 or panel lights.
Courtesy Lamps on page 65. ; : Turns on the parking lamps,
taillamps, license plate lamps,
Exterior Lighting sidemarker lamps, and instrument
panel lights.
5 : Turns on the headlamps, Sedan
parking lamps, taillamps, license
plate lamps, sidemarker lamps, and
instrument panel lights. A warning
chime sounds if the driver door is
opened when the ignition switch is
off and the headlamps are on.
# : For vehicles with fog lamps, Hatchback
The exterior lamp control is on the press to turn the lamps on or off.
instrument panel to the outboard The windshield wiper/washer lever
See:
side of the steering column. is on the right side of the steering
. Exterior Lamp Controls on column.
O: Briefly turn to this position to page 61
turn the automatic light control off or Move the lever to one of the
on again.
. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) following positions:
on page 62
AUTO: Turns the headlamps on HI: Use for fast wipes.
automatically at normal brightness,
. Fog Lamps on page 64
LO: Use for slow wipes.
together with the parking lamps,
1-12 In Brief
Climate Controls 6. Rear Window Defogger

For vehicles with these climate 7. Recirculation
control systems, the heating,
cooling, and ventilation can be
controlled for the vehicle.
Hatchback Shown, Sedan Similar
INT: Move the lever up to INT for
intermittent wipes, then turn the x
INT band up for more frequent
wipes or down for less frequent
wipes.
OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.
8 : For a single wipe, briefly move Climate Control System with
the wiper lever down. For several Heater Only
wipes, hold the wiper lever down.
1. Temperature Control
nL: Pull the windshield wiper Climate Control System with
lever toward you to spray windshield Heater and Air Conditioning 2. Fan Control
washer fluid and activate the wipers. 3. Air Delivery Mode Control
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on 4. Rear Window Defogger
page 53. For vehicles with a rear 2. Fan Control
3. Air Delivery Mode Control See Climate Control Systems on
window wiper/washer, see Rear
page 81.
Window Wiper/Washer on page 54. 4. Driver and Passenger Heated
Seats
5. Air Conditioning
In Brief 1-13
Transmission lever to upshift, or push the Reverse Lockout

(minus) end of the button to
Automatic Transmission downshift.
Manual Mode See Manual Mode on page 923.
This position allows you to change Manual Transmission
gears similar to a manual
transmission. To use this feature: UpShift Light
1. Move the shift lever from
D (Drive) rearward to
M (Manual Mode).
Vehicles equipped with a manual The manual transmission is

transmission may have an up-shift equipped with a lock ring to prevent
light. This light indicates when to shifting into R (Reverse). To shift
shift to the next higher gear for into R (Reverse), press down the
better fuel economy. clutch pedal, lift up the ring on the
shift lever, and shift into
For the best fuel economy, R (Reverse). Let up on the clutch
accelerate slowly and shift when the pedal slowly while pressing the
light comes on, if weather, road, and accelerator pedal.
traffic conditions allow.
See Manual Transmission on
2. Press the + (plus) end of the It is normal for the light to go on and page 924.
button on the side of the shift off if the accelerator position
changes quickly. Ignore the light
during downshifts.
1-14 In Brief
. CD: Select the previous track or Retrieving Stations
Vehicle Features rewinds within a track.
Press the FAV 1-2-3 button to open
MENU/TUNE: Turn to navigate the
Radio(s) available menus. Turn to search for
a favorite page or to switch to
another favorite page. Briefly press
Radio Controls Without stations. one of the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve
Touchscreen AUX or CD/AUX: Press to play a the station.
O /VOL: Press to turn the system CD when listening to the radio. See Storing a Favorite Station
on or off. For more information about these under AM-FM Radio on page 712.
Turn to increase or decrease the and other radio features, see
Radio Controls With
volume. Operation on page 78.
Touchscreen
When the system is on, press and Storing a Favorite Station Audio Source Menu
release to mute the system. Press Stations from all bands can be
and release again to turn the sound stored in any order in the favorite
z VOL y (Volume): Press to
back on. increase or decrease the volume.
pages.
RADIO/BAND: Press to choose FM, Up to six stations can be stored in
O (Power): Press and hold to turn
AM, or SiriusXM (if equipped). each favorite page and the number
the system on and off.
SEEK : of available favorite pages can D (Home Page): Press to enter

be set. the Home Page.
. Radio: Seeks the next station.
.
Storing Stations Storing a Favorite Station
CD: Select the next track or fast
forwards within a track. To store the station to a position in Stations from all bands can be
the list, press the corresponding stored in any order in the favorite
SEEK : button 1 to 6 until a beep is heard. pages.
. Radio: Seeks the previous Up to five stations can be stored in
station. each of the seven favorites pages.
In Brief 1-15
Storing Stations Setting the Clock A second AUX input is on the front
To store the station to a position in of the infotainment system,
See Clock on page 54.
the list, press the corresponding if equipped. External devices such
button 15 until a beep is heard. as iPods, laptop computers, MP3
Satellite Radio players, CD changers, and USB
1. Select the desired station. SiriusXM is a satellite radio service storage devices may be connected,
based in the 48 contiguous United depending on the audio system.
2. Press S or T to select the
desired page of saved favorites. States and 10 Canadian provinces. See Auxiliary Devices on page 724.
SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide
variety of programming and Bluetooth
commercial-free music, coast to
coast, and in digital-quality sound. The Bluetooth system allows users
A fee is required to receive the with a Bluetooth-enabled mobile
SiriusXM service. phone to make and receive
hands-free calls using the vehicle
Refer to:
audio system and controls.
. www.siriusxm.com or call
The Bluetooth-enabled mobile
1-866-635-2349 (U.S.).
phone must be paired with the
3. Hold down any of the preset
. www.xmradio.ca or call in-vehicle Bluetooth system before it
buttons to save the current radio 1-877-209-0079 (Canada) can be used in the vehicle. Not all
station to that button of the See Satellite Radio on page 716. phones will support all functions.
selected favorites page. See Bluetooth (Voice Recognition)
To change a preset button, tune to Portable Audio Devices on page 737 or Bluetooth
the new desired radio station and (Overview) on page 726 or
Some vehicles have a 3.5 mm Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls) on
hold the button. (1/8 in) auxiliary input and a USB page 728 and Hands-Free Phone
See Storing a Favorite Station port in the storage area to the right on page 742.
under AM-FM Radio on page 712. of the infotainment system.
1-16 In Brief
Steering Wheel Controls speakers while using the Cruise Control

infotainment system. Press again to
turn the sound on.
For vehicles with OnStar or
Bluetooth systems, press to reject
an incoming call, or end a
current call.
_ SRC ^ : Press to select an audio
source.
Toggle up or down to select the next
or previous favorite radio station or
CD/MP3 track.
+ x : Press + or to increase or
Some audio steering wheel controls decrease the volume.
could differ depending on the 5 : Press to turn the cruise control
See Steering Wheel Controls on system on and off.
vehicle's options. Some audio
page 52.
steering wheel controls can be RES/+: Move the thumbwheel up to
adjusted at the steering wheel. resume a previously set speed or to
b / g : Press to interact with the accelerate.
available Bluetooth or OnStar SET/: Move the thumbwheel down
systems. to set a speed or to make the
$ / i : Press to reject an vehicle decelerate.
incoming call, or end a current call. *: Press to disengage cruise
Press to silence the vehicle control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
In Brief 1-17
See Cruise Control on page 931. Power Outlets On vehicles with this feature, the
sunroof only operates when the
Driver Information The accessory power outlets can be ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
used to plug in electrical equipment, Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is
Center (DIC) such as a cell phone or MP3 player. active.
The DIC display is in the instrument The vehicle has an accessory Open/Close: To open the sunroof,
cluster. It shows the status of many power outlet in front of the press and hold the rear of the
vehicle systems. The controls for cupholders on the center stack. switch. To close the sunroof, press
the DIC are on the turn signal lever.
See Power Outlets on page 56. and hold the front of the switch.
Vent: Press and hold the front of
Sunroof the switch to vent the sunroof.
Manually close the sunshade.
The sunroof will not operate if the
vehicle has an electrical failure.
1. SET/CLR: Press to set or clear See Sunroof on page 217.
the menu item displayed.
2. w x : Use the thumbwheel to
scroll through the items in
each menu.
3. MENU: Press to display the DIC
menus. This button is also used
to return to or exit the last
screen displayed on the DIC.
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 522.
1-18 In Brief
Performance and StabiliTrak System

Maintenance The StabiliTrak system assists with
directional control of the vehicle in
difficult driving conditions. The
Traction Control system is on when the vehicle is
System (TCS) started.
The low tire pressure warning light
The Traction Control System (TCS) . To turn off both traction control alerts to a significant loss in
limits wheel spin. The system is on and StabiliTrak, press and hold pressure of one of the vehicle's
when the vehicle is started. the TCS/StabiliTrak button g tires. If the warning light comes on,
. To turn off traction control, press until the Traction Off light i and stop as soon as possible and inflate
and release the TCS/StabiliTrak the tires to the recommended
the StabiliTrak Off light g pressure shown on the Tire and
button g on the center console. illuminate. Loading Information label. See
The Traction Off light i Vehicle Load Limits on page 99.
. Press the TCS/StabiliTrak button
illuminates. g again to turn on both systems. The warning light will remain on until
. Press and release the TCS/ the tire pressure is corrected.
See StabiliTrak System on
StabiliTrak button g again to page 929. The low tire pressure warning light
turn traction control back on. may come on in cool weather when
See Traction Control System (TCS) Tire Pressure Monitor the vehicle is first started, and then
on page 928. turn off as the vehicle is driven. This
This vehicle may have a Tire may be an early indicator that the
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). tire pressures are getting low and
the tires need to be inflated to the
proper pressure.
In Brief 1-19
The TPMS does not replace normal Remember, the oil life display must It cannot be reset accurately.
monthly tire maintenance. Maintain be reset after each oil change. It will See Engine Oil Life System on
the correct tire pressures. not reset itself. Also, be careful not page 1011.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System to reset the oil life display
accidentally at any time other than
on page 1048.
when the oil has just been changed. Driving for Better Fuel
It cannot be reset accurately until Economy
Tire Sealant and the next oil change. Driving habits can affect fuel
Compressor Kit mileage. Here are some driving tips
Resetting the Oil Life System
This vehicle may come with a spare to get the best fuel economy
tire and tire changing equipment or 1. Press the MENU button to show possible.
a tire sealant and compressor kit. Remaining Oil Life on the
display. This display shows an . Avoid fast starts and accelerate
The kit can be used to temporarily smoothly.
seal small punctures in the tread estimate of the oils remaining
area of the tire. See Tire Sealant useful life. If 99% is displayed, . Brake gradually and avoid
and Compressor Kit on page 1061. that means that 99% of the abrupt stops.
current oil life remains.
If the vehicle came with a spare tire . Avoid idling the engine for long
and tire changing equipment, see If 2. To reset the engine oil life periods of time.
a Tire Goes Flat on page 1059. system, press the SET/CLR .
button while the oil life display is When road and weather
active. After a few seconds, conditions are appropriate, use
Engine Oil Life System there will be a single chime and cruise control.
The engine oil life system calculates the oil life will be reset to 100%. . Always follow posted speed
engine oil life based on vehicle use Be careful not to reset the oil life limits or drive more slowly when
and displays the Code 82 (Change display accidentally at any time conditions require.
Engine Oil Soon) DIC message other than after the oil is changed. . Keep vehicle tires properly
when it is necessary to change the
inflated.
engine oil and filter.
1-20 In Brief
Combine several trips into a

OnStar
.
single trip.
. If equipped, this vehicle has a
Replace the vehicle's tires with
comprehensive, in-vehicle system
the same TPC Spec number
that can connect to a live Advisor
molded into the tire's sidewall
for Emergency, Security, Navigation,
near the size.
Connection, and Diagnostic
. Follow recommended scheduled Services. See OnStar Overview on
maintenance. page 141.
Roadside Assistance
Program
U.S.: 1-800-243-8872
TTY Users (U.S. Only):
1-888-889-2438
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
As the owner of a new Chevrolet,
you are automatically enrolled in the
Roadside Assistance program.
See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 135.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors, and Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Keys and Locks
Windows Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-13
2-13 Keys
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Keys and Locks Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 { WARNING
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Leaving children in a vehicle with
Interior Mirrors a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-15
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is dangerous and
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Windows children or others could be
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 seriously injured or killed. They
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 could operate the power windows
Central Locking System . . . . . . . 2-7 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 or other controls or make the
Door Ajar Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 vehicle move. The windows will
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 function with the RKE transmitter
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Roof in the vehicle, and children or
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 others could be caught in the path
Doors of a closing window. Do not leave
Trunk (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 children in a vehicle with an RKE
Liftgate (Hatchback) . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 transmitter.
Vehicle Security
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . 2-10
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) System
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 1315 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
If there is a decrease in the RKE
operating range:
. Check the distance. The
The key that is part of the Remote Press the button on the RKE transmitter may be too far from
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can transmitter to extend the key. Press the vehicle.
be used for the ignition and all the button and the key blade to
locks. retract the key.
. Check the location. Other
vehicles or objects may be
See your dealer if a new key is blocking the signal.
needed.
. Check the transmitter's battery.
If the vehicle has an ignition, and it See Battery Replacement later
becomes difficult to turn they key, in this section.
inspect the key blade for debris.
. If the transmitter is still not
If you are locked out of the vehicle, working correctly, see your
see Roadside Assistance Program dealer or a qualified technician
on page 135. for service.
Remote Keyless Entry indicate locking. See Remote more information see Remote
Locking, Unlocking, Starting under Unlock Feedback under Vehicle
(RKE) System Operation Vehicle Personalization on Personalization on page 526.
The RKE transmitter may work up to page 526.
60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle. Pressing K may also disarm the
If the driver door is open when Q is theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle
Other conditions can affect the pressed, all doors lock except the Alarm System on page 210.
performance of the transmitter. See driver door, if Unlocked Door Anti
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Lock Out is enabled through the
V (Remote Trunk Release): For
System on page 22. vehicles with this feature, press to
vehicle personalization. See release the trunk.
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
under Vehicle Personalization on 7 (Vehicle Locator/Panic
page 526. If the passenger door is Alarm): Press and release one
open when Q is pressed, all time to initiate vehicle locator. The
doors lock. exterior lamps flash and the horn
chirps three times. Press and hold
Pressing Q may also arm the 7 for at least three seconds to
theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle sound the panic alarm. The horn
Alarm System on page 210. sounds and the turn signals flash for
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the 30 seconds until 7 is pressed
driver door or all doors. See again, or the key is placed in the
Remote Locking, Unlocking, ignition and turned to ON/RUN.
RKE without Remote Start Shown Starting under Vehicle / (Remote Vehicle Start): For
Personalization on page 526. The vehicles with this feature, press and
The following buttons are on the
transmitter: turn signal indicators flash to release Q and then press and hold
indicate unlocking has occurred. For / within five seconds to start the
Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.
The turn signal indicators may flash
and/or the horn may sound to
engine from outside the vehicle Battery Replacement The climate control system will use
using the RKE transmitter. See the previous settings during a
The battery is not rechargeable. To
Remote Vehicle Start on page 24. remote start. The rear defog may
replace the battery:
The buttons on the RKE transmitter come on during remote start based
1. Push the button on the on cold ambient conditions. The
are disabled when there is a key in
transmitter to extend the key. rear fog indicator light does not
the ignition.
2. Remove the battery cover by come on during remote start.
Programming Transmitters to prying with a finger. If the vehicle has heated seats, they
the Vehicle may come on during a remote start.
3. Remove the old battery.
Only RKE transmitters programmed See Heated Front Seats on
to this vehicle will work. If a 4. Insert the new battery, positive page 36.
transmitter is lost or stolen, a side facing up. Replace with a
CR2032 or equivalent battery. Laws in some local communities
replacement can be purchased and may restrict the use of remote
programmed through your dealer. 5. Snap the battery cover back on starters. For example, some laws
When the replacement transmitter is to the transmitter. require a person using remote start
programmed to this vehicle, all to have the vehicle in view. Check
remaining transmitters must also be Remote Vehicle Start local regulations for any
reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen requirements.
transmitters will no longer work The vehicle may have this feature
once the new transmitter is that allows you to start the engine Other conditions can affect the
programmed. See your dealer to from outside the vehicle. performance of the transmitter. See
have new transmitters programmed. / (Remote Vehicle Start): This Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System on page 22.
button will be on the RKE
transmitter if the vehicle has remote
start.
Starting the Vehicle Extending Engine Run Time Canceling a Remote Start
To start the engine using the remote For a 10-minute extension, repeat To cancel a remote start, do one of
start feature: Steps 13 while the engine is still the following:
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the running. The remote start can be . Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle. extended once.
vehicle and press and hold /
When the remote start is extended, until the parking lamps turn off.
2. Press and release Q. the second 10 minutes will start
3. Immediately after completing immediately.
flashers.
Step 2, press and hold / for at For example, if the engine has been
least two seconds or until the running for five minutes, and
. Turn the vehicle on and then off.
turn signal lamps flash. The turn 10 minutes are added, the engine Conditions in Which Remote Start
signal lamps flashing confirms will run for a total of 15 minutes. Will Not Work
the request to remote start the A maximum of two remote starts,
vehicle has been received. The remote vehicle start feature will
or a single start with an extension, not operate if:
When the engine starts, the parking are allowed between ignition cycles.
lamps will turn on and remain on as
. The key is in the ignition.
After this, the vehicle's ignition
long as the engine is running. The switch must be turned to ON/RUN
. The hood is not closed.
doors will be locked and the climate and then back to LOCK/OFF using . The hazard warning flashers
control system may come on. the key, before the remote start are on.
The engine will continue to run for procedure can be used again. . The malfunction indicator lamp
10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a
is on.
10-minute time extension. Remote
start can be extended only once. . The engine coolant temperature
is too high.
Insert the key and turn it to ON/RUN
before driving. . The oil pressure is low.

. Two remote vehicle starts, or a . Press Q or K on the Remote
single remote start with an WARNING (Continued) Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
extension, have already See Remote Keyless Entry
been used. . Young children who get into
(RKE) System Operation on
unlocked vehicles may be
. The vehicle is not in P (Park). page 23.
unable to get out. A child can
be overcome by extreme heat
Door Locks and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from
{ WARNING heat stroke. Always lock the
vehicle whenever leaving it.
Unlocked doors can be . Outsiders can easily enter
dangerous. through an unlocked door
. Passengers, especially when you slow down or stop
children, can easily open the the vehicle. Locking the doors
doors and fall out of a moving can help prevent this from
vehicle. When a door is happening.
locked, the handle will not
open it. The chance of being
To lock or unlock the doors from To lock or unlock the doors from
thrown out of the vehicle in a
outside the vehicle: inside the vehicle:
crash is increased if the
doors are not locked. So, all . Use the key in the driver door to . Press Q or K on the central
passengers should wear lock all doors or unlock the
locking switch.
safety belts properly and the driver door only.
doors should be locked . Pull the door handle. Pulling the
whenever the vehicle is door handle again unlatches
driven. the door.
(Continued)

. Use the lock knob on the top of . For vehicles with an automatic
the door panel.
Delayed Locking transmission, shift the
Pressing Q on the central locking transmission into P (Park).
Central Locking System switch or on the RKE transmitter . For vehicle with a manual
This system allows for the doors when this feature is on will delay the transmission, remove the key
and liftgate/trunk to be locked and locking of the doors until from the ignition.
unlocked from the RKE transmitter five seconds after the last door is
closed. Three chimes will signal that This feature can be programmed.
or the central locking switch on the See Vehicle Personalization on
center stack. delayed locking is in use. See
Vehicle Personalization on page 526.
The system can be programed. See page 526.
Vehicle Personalization on Safety Locks
page 526. Automatic Door Locks The rear door safety locks prevent
The vehicle is programmed so that passengers from opening the rear
Door Ajar Reminder doors from inside the vehicle.
when the doors are closed, the
ignition is on, and the shift lever is
moved out of P (Park) for automatic
transmissions, or when the vehicle
speed is above 13 km/h (8 mph) for
manual transmissions, the doors
and the trunk/liftgate will lock.
If one of the doors, the trunk, or the To unlock the doors and the trunk/
liftgate is not closed properly while liftgate:
the ignition is on, the door ajar light . Press K on the center stack.
on the instrument panel comes on
and stays on until the doors are
closed.
Press { to activate the safety locks Doors WARNING (Continued)

on the rear doors. An indicator light
comes on when activated. Trunk (Sedan) . Adjust the climate control
Press { again to deactivate the system to a setting that
safety locks. { WARNING brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the
Exhaust gases can enter the highest setting. See Climate
vehicle if it is driven with the Control Systems in the
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with Index.
any objects that pass through the . If the vehicle is equipped with
seal between the body and the a power liftgate, disable the
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine power liftgate function.
exhaust contains carbon For more information about
monoxide (CO) which cannot be carbon monoxide, see Engine
seen or smelled. It can cause Exhaust on page 920.
unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle must be driven with To lock or unlock the trunk from the
the liftgate or trunk/hatch open:
outside, press Q or K on the RKE
. Close all of the windows. transmitter. See Remote Keyless
. Fully open the air outlets on Entry (RKE) System Operation on
or under the instrument page 23.
panel. To lock or unlock the trunk from the
(Continued) inside, press Q or K on the central
locking switch located on the center
stack.
Emergency Trunk Release There is a glow-in-the-dark

Handle emergency trunk release handle on
the underside of the trunk lid. This
Notice: Do not use the handle will glow following exposure
emergency trunk release handle to light. Pull the release handle
as a tie-down or anchor point down to open the trunk from the
when securing items in the trunk inside.
as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release
handle is only intended to aid a
Liftgate (Hatchback)
person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk { WARNING
from the inside.
To open the trunk from outside of Exhaust gases can enter the
the vehicle: vehicle if it is driven with the
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with
. Press K on the RKE transmitter, any objects that pass through the
then use the touch pad. seal between the body and the
. Press V on the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
RKE transmitter. exhaust contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which cannot be
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) seen or smelled. It can cause
System Operation on page 23. unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle must be driven with
the liftgate or trunk/hatch open:
. Close all of the windows.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued) Vehicle Security

This vehicle has theft-deterrent
. Fully open the air outlets on features; however, they do not make
or under the instrument the vehicle impossible to steal.
panel.
. Adjust the climate control Vehicle Alarm System
system to a setting that
brings in only outside air and This vehicle has an anti-theft alarm
set the fan speed to the system.
highest setting. See Climate
Control Systems in the
Index.
To open the liftgate from the
. If the vehicle is equipped with outside, press K on the
a power liftgate, disable the
RKE transmitter, then use the
power liftgate function.
touch pad.
For more information about See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
carbon monoxide, see Engine System Operation on page 23.
Exhaust on page 920.
When closing the liftgate, close from The indicator light on the instrument
the center to ensure that it fully panel near the windshield, indicates
To lock or unlock the liftgate from latches. the status of the system.
the inside, press Q or K on the
central locking switch located on the
center stack.
Arming the System Disarming the System How to Detect a Tamper

1. Close all doors, liftgate, To disarm the system, either unlock Condition
and hood. the doors using the RKE transmitter, If K is pressed and the horn chirps
2. Lock the vehicle using the or start the vehicle with a three times, an attempted break-in
transmitter or the power door recognized transmitter in the occurred while the system was
lock button. The indicator on the vehicle. armed.
instrument panel should come To avoid setting off the alarm by
on and stay on for about accident: Immobilizer
30 seconds. . Lock the vehicle with the See Radio Frequency Statement on
3. After 30 seconds, the alarm transmitter after all occupants page 1315 for information
system will arm, and the have left the vehicle and all regarding Part 15 of the Federal
indicator will begin to slowly doors are closed. Communications Commission (FCC)
flash indicating the alarm is . Always unlock a door with the rules and Industry Canada
operating. RKE transmitter. Unlocking a Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
If a door, the hood, or the liftgate is door any other way will not
opened without first unlocking with disarm the alarm. Immobilizer Operation
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) If you set off the alarm by accident, This vehicle has a passive
transmitter, the turn signals will flash theft-deterrent system.
and the horn will sound for about turn off the alarm by pressing K on
30 seconds. The alarm system will the RKE transmitter or start the The system does not have to be
then re-arm to monitor for the next vehicle with a recognized transmitter manually armed or disarmed.
unauthorized event. in the vehicle. The alarm will not
The vehicle is automatically
stop if you unlock the driver door
The theft-deterrent alarm system will immobilized when the key is
with the key.
not activate if the doors are locked removed from the ignition.
with the key.
The system is automatically When trying to start the vehicle, the Exterior Mirrors
disarmed when the vehicle is security light comes on briefly when
started with the correct key. The key the ignition is turned on.
uses a transponder that matches an Convex Mirrors
If the engine does not start and the
immobilizer control unit in the security light stays on, there is a
vehicle and automatically disarms problem with the system. Turn the { WARNING
the system. Only an authorized key ignition off and try again.
starts the vehicle. The vehicle may A convex mirror can make things,
not start if the key is damaged. If the engine still does not start, and like other vehicles, look farther
the key appears to be undamaged away than they really are. If you
or the light continues to stay on, try cut too sharply into the right lane,
another ignition key. If the engine you could hit a vehicle on the
does not start with the other key, the right. Check the inside mirror or
vehicle needs service. If the vehicle glance over your shoulder before
does start, the first key may be changing lanes.
damaged. See your dealer who can
service the theft-deterrent system
The security light in the instrument The passenger side mirror is convex
and have a new key made.
cluster comes on if there is a shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
problem with arming or disarming Do not leave the key or device that curved so more can be seen from
the theft-deterrent system. disarms or deactivates the the driver seat.
theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.
Manual Mirrors Power Mirrors Folding Mirrors

Manual Folding Mirrors
The vehicle has manual folding
mirrors. These mirrors can be folded
inward to prevent damage when
going through an automatic car
wash. To fold, pull the mirror toward
the vehicle. Push the mirror outward
to return it to the original position.
Heated Mirrors
For vehicles with this feature:
Move the control up, down, or side For vehicles with power outside
1 (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to heat the mirrors. See Rear
to side to adjust the mirror. mirrors:
Window and Outside Mirror
See Folding Mirrors on page 213. 1. Select the mirror by moving the Defogger under Climate Control
selector switch to L for the driver Systems on page 81.
side or R for the passenger side.
2. Use the control knob to move Blind Spot Mirrors
the mirror in the desired The blind spot mirror is a small
direction. convex mirror built into the upper
See Folding Mirrors on page 213. and outer corner of both outside
mirrors. It can show objects that
may be in the vehicle's blind zone.
Driving with the Blind Spot 1. When the approaching vehicle is Using the Outside Mirror with
Mirror a long distance away, the image the Blind Spot Mirror
in the main mirror is small and
near the inboard edge of the 1. Set the main mirror so that the
mirror. side of the vehicle can just be
seen and the blind spot mirror
2. As the vehicle gets closer, the has an unobstructed view.
image in the main mirror gets
larger and moves outboard. 2. When checking for traffic or
before changing a lane, look at
3. As the vehicle enters the blind the main driver/passenger side
zone, the image transitions from mirror to observe traffic in the
the main mirror to the blind spot adjacent lane, behind your
mirror. vehicle. Check the blind spot
4. When the vehicle is in the blind mirror for a vehicle in the blind
zone, the image only appears in zone. Then, glance over your
the blind spot mirror. shoulder to double check before
moving slowly into the
adjacent lane.
Actual Mirror View

Interior Mirrors Windows The vehicle aerodynamics are

designed to improve fuel economy
performance. This may result in a
Manual Rearview Mirror { WARNING pulsing sound when either rear
Hold the inside rearview mirror in window is down and the front
Never leave a child, a helpless windows are up. To reduce the
the center to move it for a clearer
adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, sound, open either a front window
view behind your vehicle. Adjust the
especially with the windows or the sunroof, if equipped.
mirror to avoid glare from the
headlamps behind you. Push the closed in warm or hot weather.
tab forward for daytime use and pull They can be overcome by the Manual Windows
it for nighttime use. extreme heat and suffer
permanent injuries or even death If equipped, use the window crank
Vehicles with OnStar have three from heat stroke. to open and close each window.
control buttons at the bottom of the
The rear windows do not open fully.
mirror. See your dealer for more
information about OnStar and how
to subscribe to it. See OnStar Power Windows
Overview on page 141.
{ WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the keys is dangerous for many
reasons. Children or others could
be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power
windows or other controls or even
make the vehicle move. The
(Continued)
If equipped, push the switch down Safety Function

WARNING (Continued) to open the window. Pull the front of
If any object is in the path of the
the switch up to close it.
windows will function and they window when the express-up
could be seriously injured or killed The switches work when the vehicle feature is active, the window will
if caught in the path of a closing is in ON/RUN or ACC/ stop and auto-reverse to a preset
window. Do not leave keys in a ACCESSORY, or when Retained position. Weather conditions may
vehicle with children. Accessory Power (RAP) is active. cause the window to auto-reverse.
See Retained Accessory Power The window switch may be held up
When there are children in the (RAP) on page 918. to the second position to close the
rear seat use the window lockout window. The window will return to
button to prevent unintentional Express Window Operation normal operation once the
operation of the windows. Windows with an express-down or obstruction or condition is removed.
express-up feature allow the window
to be lowered or raised without Safety Function Override
holding the switch. The driver If the battery on the vehicle has
window has express-down and been recharged or disconnected,
express-up. Pull a window switch up or is not working, the windows will
or push it down all the way, release need to be reprogrammed for the
it, and the window goes up or down express-up feature to work. Before
automatically. Stop the window by reprogramming, replace or recharge
pushing or pulling the switch in the the vehicle's battery.
same direction a second time or
To program the driver window:
briefly operating the switch to the
first detent in either direction. 1. With the ignition in ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN,
or when RAP is active, close all
doors.
2. Press and hold the power This feature prevents the rear Roof
window switch until the window passenger windows from operating,
is fully open. except from the driver position.
Sunroof
3. Pull the power window switch up Press o to disable the rear window
until the window is fully closed. switches.
4. Continue holding the switch up
Press o again to return to normal
for approximately two seconds
after the window is completely window operation.
closed.
Sun Visors
The window is now reprogrammed.
To block out glare, swing down the
Window Lockout sun visors. You can also remove
them from the center mount and
swing them to the side.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Vanity mirrors are on the back of the On vehicles with this feature, the
sun visors. Swing down the sun sunroof only operates when the
visor and open the cover. ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is
active.
Open/Close: To open the sunroof,
press and hold the rear of the
switch. To close the sunroof, press
and hold the front of the switch.
Vent: Press and hold the front of

the switch to vent the sunroof.
Manually close the sunshade.
The sunroof will not operate if the
vehicle has an electrical failure.
Dirt and debris may collect on the

sunroof seal or in the track. This
could cause an issue with sunroof
operation or noise. It could also plug
the water drainage system.
Periodically open the sunroof and
remove any obstacles or loose
debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and
roof sealing area using a clean
cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
remove grease from the sunroof.
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Adding Equipment to the

Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-16 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-28
Restraints Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-29
Replacing Safety Belt System Replacing Airbag System
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Head Restraints
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Airbag System Child Restraints
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Front Seats Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-19 Infants and Young
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 When Should an Airbag Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-34
Front Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 What Makes an Airbag Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-36
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Lower Anchors and Tethers
How Does an Airbag for Children (LATCH
Rear Seats
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
What Will You See after an Replacing LATCH System
Safety Belts Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Passenger Sensing Securing Child Restraints
How to Wear Safety Belts System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 (Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Securing Child Restraints
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 (Right Front
Safety Belt Use During Passenger Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
{ WARNING
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the The height of the head restraint can
top of the restraint is at the same be adjusted. Pull the head restraint
Front Seats height as the top of the occupant's up to raise it. Try to move the head
The front seats have adjustable head. This position reduces the restraint to make sure that it is
head restraints in the outboard chances of a neck injury in a crash. locked in place.
seating positions. To lower the head restraint, press
the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the head
restraint down. Try to move the
head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is
locked in place.
The front seat outboard head
restraints are not designed to be
removed.
Rear Seats To lower the head restraint, press Front Seats

the button, located on the top of the
The vehicle's rear seats have
seatback, and push the head
adjustable head restraints in the
restraint down. Try to move the Seat Adjustment
outboard seating positions.
head restraint after the button is Manual Seats
released to make sure that it is
locked in place.
Rear outboard head restraints are
{ WARNING
not designed to be removed. You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a driver
seat while the vehicle is moving.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
The height of the head restraint can

be adjusted. Pull the head restraint
up to raise it. Try to move the head
restraint to make sure that it is
locked in place.
To adjust a manual seat: Reclining Seatbacks To recline a manual seatback:

1. Pull the handle at the front of 1. Lift the lever.
the seat. { WARNING If necessary, move the safety
2. Slide the seat to the desired belt out of the way to access the
If either seatback is not locked, it
position and release the handle. lever.
could move forward in a sudden
3. Try to move the seat back and stop or crash. That could cause 2. Move the seatback to the
forth to be sure it is locked in injury to the person sitting there. desired position, and then
place. Always push and pull on the release the lever to lock the
seatbacks to be sure they are seatback in place.
Seat Height Adjuster
locked. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked in place.
To return the seatback to the upright
position:
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
If available, move the lever up or

down to manually raise or lower
the seat.
Front Seat Armrest

{ WARNING
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job.
The shoulder belt will not be
against your body. Instead, it will
be in front of you. In a crash, you
could go into it, receiving neck or
other injuries. Do not have a seatback reclined if
The lap belt could go up over the vehicle is moving.
your abdomen. The belt forces There is an armrest on the inboard
would be there, not at your pelvic side of the driver seat. To raise or
bones. This could cause serious lower the armrest, push up or pull
internal injuries. down on the armrest.
For proper protection when the
vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the
safety belt properly.
Heated Front Seats Remote Start Heated Seats

When it is cold outside, the heated
{ WARNING seats can be turned on
automatically during a remote
If you cannot feel temperature vehicle start. The heated seats will
change or pain to the skin, the be canceled when the ignition is
seat heater may cause burns. To turned on. Press the heated seat
reduce the risk of burns, people controls to use the heated seats
with such a condition should use after the vehicle is started.
care when using the seat heater, The heated seat indicator lights do
especially for long periods of not turn on during a remote start.
time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against If available, the controls are on the The temperature performance of an
climate control system. To operate, unoccupied seat may be reduced.
heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
the engine must be running. This is normal.
cover, or similar item. This may
cause the seat heater to Press M or L to heat the driver or The heated seats will not turn on
overheat. An overheated seat during a remote start unless the
passenger seat. The indicator light
heater may cause a burn or may heated seat feature is enabled in
on the control turns on when this
damage the seat. the vehicle personalization menu.
feature is on. Press the control
See Remote Vehicle Start on
again to turn this feature off.
page 24 and Vehicle
The passenger seat may take Personalization on page 526.
longer to heat up.
Rear Seats To fold the seatback down:
Folding the Seatback

Either side of the seatback can be
folded down for more cargo space.
Fold a seatback only when the
vehicle is not moving.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with
the safety belts still fastened may
cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the
safety belts and return them to Sedan Shown, Hatchback Similar
their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat. 2. Reach under the belt and pull
1. Make sure the safety belt is in the lever on top of the seatback
the retainer hook. to unlock the seatback.
A tab near the seatback lever
raises when the seatback is
unlocked.
3. Fold the seatback down.
Repeat Steps 13 for the other
seatback, if desired.
Raising the Seatback To raise a seatback: Safety Belts

1. Lift the seatback up and push it
{ WARNING rearward to lock it in place.
This section of the manual
describes how to use safety belts
Make sure the safety belt is in
If either seatback is not locked, it properly. It also describes some
the retainer hook and is not
could move forward in a sudden things not to do with safety belts.
twisted or caught in the
stop or crash. That could cause seatback.
injury to the person sitting there.
A tab near the seatback lever
{ WARNING
Always push and pull on the
retracts when the seatback is Do not let anyone ride where a
seatbacks to be sure they are locked in place.
locked. safety belt cannot be worn
The center rear safety belt may properly. In a crash, if you or your
lock when you raise the passenger(s) are not wearing
seatback. If this happens, let the safety belts, injuries can be much
{ WARNING belt go back all the way and worse than if you are wearing
start again. safety belts. You can be seriously
A safety belt that is improperly injured or killed by hitting things
routed, not properly attached, 2. Push and pull the top of the
seatback to be sure it is locked inside the vehicle harder or by
or twisted will not provide the being ejected from the vehicle. In
into position.
protection needed in a crash. The addition, anyone who is not
person wearing the belt could be 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the
buckled up can strike other
seriously injured. After raising the other seatback, if necessary.
passengers in the vehicle.
rear seatback, always check to be When the seat is not in use, it
sure that the safety belts are should be kept in the upright, locked It is extremely dangerous to ride
properly routed and attached, and position. in a cargo area, inside or outside
are not twisted. of a vehicle. In a collision,
passengers riding in these areas
(Continued)
Why Safety Belts Work safety belts. That is why wearing

WARNING (Continued) safety belts makes such good
sense.
are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow Questions and Answers About
passengers to ride in any area of Safety Belts
the vehicle that is not equipped Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
with seats and safety belts. after a crash if I am wearing a
Always wear a safety belt, and safety belt?
check that all passenger(s) are A: You could be whether you are
restrained properly too. wearing a safety belt or not.
Your chance of being conscious
This vehicle has indicators as a during and after a crash, so you
reminder to buckle the safety belts. can unbuckle and get out, is
See Safety Belt Reminders on When riding in a vehicle, you travel much greater if you are belted.
page 510. as fast as the vehicle does. If the Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why
vehicle stops suddenly, you keep should I have to wear safety
going until something stops you. belts?
It could be the windshield, the
instrument panel, or the safety belts! A: Airbags are supplemental
systems only; so they work with
When you wear a safety belt, you safety belts not instead of
and the vehicle slow down together. them. Whether or not an airbag
There is more time to stop because is provided, all occupants still
you stop over a longer distance and, have to buckle up to get the
when worn properly, your strongest most protection.
bones take the forces from the
Also, in nearly all states and in

. Wear the shoulder belt over the
all Canadian provinces, the law shoulder and across the chest.
requires wearing safety belts. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining
How to Wear Safety Belts forces. The shoulder belt locks if
there is a sudden stop or crash.
Properly
This section is only for people of { WARNING
adult size.
You can be seriously injured,
There are special things to know
or even killed, by not wearing
about safety belts and children. And
there are different rules for smaller your safety belt properly.
children and infants. If a child will be . Sit up straight and always keep . Never allow the lap or
riding in the vehicle, see Older your feet on the floor in front shoulder belt to become
Children on page 330 or Infants of you. loose or twisted.
and Young Children on page 332. . Always use the correct buckle . Never wear the shoulder belt
Follow those rules for everyone's for your seating position. under both arms or behind
protection. your back.
. Wear the lap part of the belt low
It is very important for all occupants and snug on the hips, just . Never route the lap or
to buckle up. Statistics show that touching the thighs. In a crash, shoulder belt over an
unbelted people are hurt more often this applies force to the strong armrest.
in crashes than those who are pelvic bones and you would be
wearing safety belts. less likely to slide under the lap
There are important things to know belt. If you slid under it, the belt
about wearing a safety belt properly. would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.
Lap-Shoulder Belt 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull

the belt across you. Do not let it
All seating positions in the vehicle get twisted.
have a lap-shoulder belt.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
The following instructions explain you pull the belt across you very
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt quickly. If this happens, let the
properly. belt go back slightly to unlock it.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is Then pull the belt across you
adjustable, so you can sit up more slowly.
straight. To see how, see Seats If the shoulder portion of a
in the Index. passenger belt is pulled out all
the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged. 3. Push the latch plate into the
If this happens, let the belt go buckle until it clicks.
back all the way and start again. If the latch plate will not go fully
into the buckle, check if the
correct buckle is being used.
Pull up on the latch plate to
make sure it is secure. If the belt
is not long enough, see Safety
Belt Extender on page 315.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt Adjust the height so the shoulder

height adjuster, move it to the portion of the belt is on the shoulder
height that is right for you. See and not falling off of it. The belt
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster should be close to, but not
in this section for instructions on contacting, the neck. Improper
use and important safety shoulder belt height adjustment
information. could reduce the effectiveness of
the safety belt in a crash. See How
to Wear Safety Belts Properly on
page 310.
To unlatch the belt, push the button

on the buckle. The belt should
return to its stowed position.
Before a door is closed, be sure the
belt is out of the way. If a door is
slammed against a safety belt,
damage can occur to both the
safety belt and the vehicle.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull
up on the shoulder belt. Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
It may be necessary to pull The vehicle has a shoulder belt
stitching on the safety belt To move it down, press the release
height adjuster for the driver and
through the latch plate to fully button and move the height adjuster
right front passenger seating
tighten the lap belt on smaller to the desired position.
positions.
occupants.
After the adjuster is set to the Rear Safety Belt Comfort To install the adjustable comfort
desired position, try to move it down Guides guide to the seatback and the
without pressing the release button safety belt:
to make sure it has locked into Rear safety belt comfort guides may
position. provide added safety belt comfort
for older children who have
Safety Belt Pretensioners outgrown booster seats and for
some adults. When installed on a
This vehicle may have safety belt
shoulder belt, the comfort guide
pretensioners for front outboard
positions the shoulder belt away
occupants. Although the safety belt
from the neck and head.
pretensioners cannot be seen, they
are part of the safety belt assembly. Safety belt comfort guides are
They can help tighten the safety available through your dealer.
belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal, near
frontal, side, or rear crash if the
threshold conditions for pretensioner
1. Locate the anchor loop on the
activation are met.
rear outboard seatback, near
Pretensioners, if equipped, work the top.
only once. If the pretensioners
2. Attach the adjustable comfort
activate in a crash, the
guide to the anchor loop by
pretensioners and probably other
threading the hook through
new parts of the vehicle's safety belt
the loop.
system will need to be replaced.
See Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts after a Crash on page 316.
6. Adjust the guide so the shoulder

portion of the belt is on the
shoulder and not falling off of it.
The belt should be close to, but
not contacting, the neck.
Improper comfort guide
adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in
a crash.
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly
3. Place the guide over the belt, 4. Be sure that the belt is not
worn may not provide the
and insert the two edges of the twisted and it lies flat. The
belt into the slots of the guide. elastic cord must be under the protection needed in a crash. The
belt and the guide on top. person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. The shoulder
5. The elastic cord on the comfort belt should go over the shoulder
guide is adjustable. You can and across the chest. These parts
make it longer or shorter by of the body are best able to take
squeezing both ends of the
belt restraining forces.
plastic adjuster and pulling on
the elastic cord or the guide.
Safety Belt Use During The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
Pregnancy belt is worn properly, it is more likely
Safety belts work for everyone, that the fetus will not be hurt in a
including pregnant women. Like all crash. For pregnant women, as for
occupants, they are more likely to anyone, the key to making safety
be seriously injured if they do not belts effective is wearing them
wear safety belts. properly.
Safety Belt Extender

If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten
around you, you should use it.
7. Buckle and position the safety
But if a safety belt is not long
belt as described previously in
enough, your dealer will order you
this section. Make sure that the
an extender. When you go in to
shoulder belt crosses the
order it, take the heaviest coat you
shoulder.
will wear, so the extender will be
To remove and store the comfort long enough for you. To help avoid
guide, squeeze the belt edges personal injury, do not let someone
together so that the safety belt can else use it, and use it only for the
be removed from the guide. seat it is made to fit. The extender
Un-hook the guide from the loop on A pregnant woman should wear a has been designed for adults. Never
the seat. Store the guide in a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap use it for securing child seats. To
convenient place like the glove box portion should be worn as low as wear it, attach it to the regular safety
for the next time it is needed. possible, below the rounding, belt. For more information, see the
throughout the pregnancy. instruction sheet that comes with
the extender.
Safety System Check

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)
Now and then, check that the safety
belt reminder light, safety belts, Do not bleach or dye safety belts. inspected and any necessary
buckles, latch plates, retractors, and It may severely weaken them. In replacements made as soon as
anchorages are all working properly. a crash, they might not be able to possible.
Look for any other loose or provide adequate protection.
damaged safety belt system parts Clean safety belts only with mild After a minor crash, replacement of
that might keep a safety belt system soap and lukewarm water. safety belts may not be necessary.
from doing its job. See your dealer
But the safety belt assemblies that
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
Replacing Safety Belt were used during any crash may
safety belts may not protect you in a
have been stressed or damaged.
crash. They can rip apart under System Parts after a See your dealer to have the safety
impact forces. If a belt is torn or
frayed, get a new one right away.
Crash belt assemblies inspected or
replaced.
Make sure the safety belt reminder
light is working. See Safety Belt
{ WARNING New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the safety belt
Reminders on page 510. A crash can damage the safety system was not being used at the
Keep safety belts clean and dry. belt system in the vehicle. time of the crash.
See Safety Belt Care on page 316. A damaged safety belt system
Have the safety belt pretensioners,
may not properly protect the
if equipped, checked if the vehicle
Safety Belt Care person using it, resulting in has been in a crash, or if the airbag
serious injury or even death in a readiness light stays on after you
Keep belts clean and dry.
crash. To help make sure the start the vehicle or while you are
safety belt systems are working driving. See Airbag Readiness Light
properly after a crash, have them on page 511.
(Continued)

. A roof-rail airbag for the front
Airbag System outboard passenger and the
For seat-mounted side impact
airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the
The vehicle has the following passenger seated directly side of the seatback closest to
airbags except where noted below: behind the front outboard the door.
passenger.
. A frontal airbag for the driver. For roof-rail airbags, the word
The vehicle may have the following AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.
. A frontal airbag for the front airbags on models sold in Canada:
outboard passenger. Airbags are designed to supplement
. A knee airbag for the driver. the protection provided by safety
. A knee airbag for the driver.
. A knee airbag for the front belts. Even though today's airbags
. A knee airbag for the front outboard passenger. are also designed to help reduce
outboard passenger. the risk of injury from the force of an
. Seat-mounted side impact inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
. A seat-mounted side impact airbags for the second row
airbag for the driver. very quickly to do their job.
outboard passengers.
. A seat-mounted side impact Here are the most important things
All vehicle airbags have the word to know about the airbag system:
airbag for the front outboard AIRBAG on the trim or on a label
passenger. near the deployment opening.
. Seat-mounted side impact For frontal airbags, the word
{ WARNING
airbags for the second row AIRBAG is on the center of the You can be severely injured or
outboard passengers. steering wheel for the driver and on killed in a crash if you are not
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver the instrument panel for the front wearing your safety belt, even
and the passenger seated outboard passenger. with airbags. Airbags are
directly behind the driver. For knee airbags, the word AIRBAG designed to work with safety
is on the lower part of the belts, not replace them. Also,
instrument panel. airbags are not designed to inflate
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued) { WARNING

in every crash. In some crashes seriously injured or killed. Do not Children who are up against,
safety belts are the only restraint. sit unnecessarily close to any or very close to, any airbag when
See When Should an Airbag airbag, as you would be if sitting it inflates can be seriously injured
Inflate? on page 321. on the edge of the seat or leaning or killed. Airbags plus
Wearing your safety belt during a forward. Safety belts help keep lap-shoulder belts offer protection
crash helps reduce the chance of you in position before and during for adults and older children, but
hitting things inside the vehicle or a crash. Always wear a safety not for young children and infants.
being ejected from it. Airbags are belt, even with airbags. The driver Neither the vehicle's safety belt
supplemental restraints to the should sit as far back as possible system nor its airbag system is
safety belts. Everyone in the while still maintaining control of designed for them. Young
vehicle should wear a safety belt the vehicle. children and infants need the
properly, whether or not there is Occupants should not lean on or protection that a child restraint
an airbag for that person. sleep against the door or side system can provide. Always
windows in seating positions with secure children properly in the
seat-mounted side impact airbags vehicle. To read how, see Older
and/or roof-rail airbags. Children on page 330 or Infants
{ WARNING and Young Children on
page 332.
Because airbags inflate with great
force and faster than the blink of
an eye, anyone who is up
against, or very close to any
airbag when it inflates can be
(Continued)
Where Are the Airbags?
There is an airbag readiness light

on the instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag electrical
system for malfunctions. The light
tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness The driver knee airbag, if equipped,
Light on page 511 for more is below the steering column. The
information. front outboard passenger knee
The driver frontal airbag is in the airbag, if equipped, is below the
center of the steering wheel. glove box.
The front outboard passenger
frontal airbag is in the passenger
side instrument panel.
WARNING (Continued)
or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept
clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that
Driver Side Shown, Passenger Rear Seat Driver Side Shown, block the inflation path of a
Side Similar Passenger Side Similar seat-mounted side impact airbag.
The seat-mounted side impact If the vehicle has second row seat Never secure anything to the roof
airbags for the driver and front mounted side impact airbags, they of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags
outboard passenger are in the side are in the sides of the rear seatback by routing a rope or tiedown
of the seatbacks closest to the door. closest to the door. through any door or window
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, opening. If you do, the path of an
right front passenger, and second { WARNING inflating roof-rail airbag will be
row outboard passengers are in the blocked.
ceiling above the side windows. If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury
(Continued)
When Should an Airbag whether the object is fixed or inflate at a level less than full
moving, rigid or deformable, narrow deployment. For more severe frontal
Inflate? or wide. impacts, full deployment occurs.
Frontal airbags are designed to Thresholds can also vary with The vehicle has seat-mounted side
inflate in moderate to severe frontal specific vehicle design. impact airbags for the driver and
or near frontal crashes to help front passenger. The vehicle may
reduce the potential for severe Frontal airbags are not intended to
inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear have seat-mounted side impact
injuries, mainly to the driver's or airbags for the second row outboard
front outboard passenger's head impacts, or in many side impacts.
passengers. The vehicle has
and chest. However, they are only In addition, the vehicle has roof-rail airbags. See Airbag System
designed to inflate if the impact dual-stage frontal airbags. on page 317. Seat-mounted side
exceeds a predetermined Dual-stage airbags adjust the impact airbags, if equipped, and
deployment threshold. Deployment restraint according to crash severity. roof-rail airbags are intended to
thresholds are used to predict how inflate in moderate to severe side
severe a crash is likely to be in time Frontal knee airbags, if equipped,
are designed to inflate in moderate crashes depending on the location
for the airbags to inflate and help of the impact. In addition, these
restrain the occupants. to severe frontal or near frontal
impacts that exceed a roof-rail airbags are intended to
Whether the frontal airbags will or predetermined deployment inflate during a rollover or in a
should inflate is not based primarily threshold. severe frontal impact. Seat-mounted
on how fast the vehicle is traveling. side impact airbags, if equipped,
It depends on what is hit, the The vehicle has electronic frontal and roof-rail airbags will inflate if the
direction of the impact, and how sensors, which help the sensing crash severity is above the system's
quickly the vehicle slows down. system distinguish between a designed threshold level. The
moderate frontal impact and a more threshold level can vary with
Frontal airbags may inflate at severe frontal impact. For moderate specific vehicle design.
different crash speeds depending on frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags
whether the vehicle hits an object Roof-rail airbags are not intended to
straight on or at an angle, and inflate in rear impacts.
A seat-mounted side impact airbag,
if equipped, is intended to inflate on How Does an Airbag But airbags would not help in many
the side of the vehicle that is struck. types of collisions, primarily
Both roof-rail airbags will inflate
Restrain? because the occupant's motion is
when either side of the vehicle is In moderate to severe frontal or not toward those airbags. See When
struck or if the sensing system near frontal collisions, even belted Should an Airbag Inflate? on
predicts that the vehicle is about to occupants can contact the steering page 321.
roll over on its side, or in a severe wheel or the instrument panel. In Airbags should never be regarded
frontal impact. moderate to severe side collisions, as anything more than a supplement
In any particular crash, no one can even belted occupants can contact to safety belts.
say whether an airbag should have the inside of the vehicle.
inflated simply because of the Airbags supplement the protection What Will You See after
vehicle damage or repair costs. provided by safety belts by
distributing the force of the impact
an Airbag Inflates?
What Makes an Airbag more evenly over the After the frontal airbags and
occupant's body. seat-mounted side impact airbags
Inflate? inflate, they quickly deflate, so
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags
In a deployment event, the sensing quickly that some people may not
are designed to help contain the
system sends an electrical signal even realize an airbag inflated.
head and chest of occupants in the
triggering a release of gas from the Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
outboard seating positions in the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the partially inflated for some time after
first and second rows. The rollover
airbag causing the bag to break out they inflate. Some components of
capable roof-rail airbags are
of the cover. The inflator, the airbag, the airbag module may be hot for
designed to help reduce the risk of
and related hardware are all part of several minutes. For location of the
full or partial ejection in rollover
the airbag module. airbags, see Where Are the
events, although no system can
For airbag location, see Where Are Airbags? on page 319.
prevent all such ejections.
the Airbags? on page 319. The parts of the airbag that come
into contact with you may be warm,
but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming The vehicle has a feature that may In many crashes severe enough to
from the vents in the deflated automatically unlock the doors, turn inflate the airbag, windshields are
airbags. Airbag inflation does not on the interior lamps, turn on the broken by vehicle deformation.
prevent the driver from seeing out of hazard warning flashers, and shut Additional windshield breakage may
the windshield or being able to steer off the fuel system after the airbags also occur from the front outboard
the vehicle, nor does it prevent inflate. You can lock the doors, turn passenger airbag.
people from leaving the vehicle. off the interior lamps, and turn off . Airbags are designed to inflate
the hazard warning flashers by only once. After an airbag
{ WARNING using the controls for those
features.
inflates, you will need some new
parts for the airbag system.
When an airbag inflates, there If you do not get them, the
may be dust in the air. This dust { WARNING airbag system will not be there
could cause breathing problems to help protect you in another
for people with a history of A crash severe enough to inflate crash. A new system will include
asthma or other breathing trouble. the airbags may have also airbag modules and possibly
To avoid this, everyone in the damaged important functions in other parts. The service manual
vehicle should get out as soon as the vehicle, such as the fuel for the vehicle covers the need
it is safe to do so. If you have system, brake and steering to replace other parts.
breathing problems but cannot systems, etc. Even if the vehicle . The vehicle has a crash sensing
get out of the vehicle after an appears to be drivable after a
and diagnostic module which
airbag inflates, then get fresh air moderate crash, there may be records information after a
by opening a window or a door. concealed damage that could crash. See Vehicle Data
If you experience breathing make it difficult to safely operate Recording and Privacy on
problems following an airbag the vehicle. page 1313 and Event Data
deployment, you should seek Use caution if you should attempt Recorders on page 1314.
medical attention. to restart the engine after a crash
has occurred.

. Let only qualified technicians The sensors are designed to detect
work on the airbag systems. the presence of a properly seated
Improper service can mean that occupant and determine if the front
an airbag system will not work outboard passenger frontal airbag
properly. See your dealer for and knee airbag should be allowed
service. to inflate or not.
Canada According to accident statistics,
Passenger Sensing children are safer when properly
System The words ON and OFF, or the
symbol for on and off, will be visible secured in a rear seat in the correct
The vehicle has a passenger during the system check. check. child restraint for their weight
sensing system for the front If you use remote start, if equipped, and size.
outboard passenger position. The to start the vehicle, you may not see We recommend that children be
passenger airbag status indicator the system check. When the system secured in a rear seat, including: an
will light on the instrument panel check is complete, either the word infant or a child riding in a
when the vehicle is started. ON or OFF, or the symbol for on or rear-facing child restraint; a child
off, will be visible. See Passenger riding in a forward-facing child seat;
Airbag Status Indicator on an older child riding in a booster
page 511. seat; and children, who are large
The passenger sensing system enough, using safety belts.
turns off the front outboard Never put a rear-facing child seat in
passenger frontal airbag and knee the front. This is because the risk to
United States airbag under certain conditions. No the rear-facing child is so great,
other airbag is affected by the if the airbag inflates.
passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system
works with sensors that are part of
the front outboard passenger seat.

. The system determines that a
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) small child is present in a
booster seat.
A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints . A front outboard passenger
restraint can be seriously injured in a rear seat, even if the
takes his/her weight off of the
or killed if the passenger frontal airbag(s) are off. If you secure a
seat for a period of time.
airbag inflates. This is because forward-facing child restraint in
the back of the rear-facing child the front outboard passenger . The front outboard passenger
restraint would be very close to seat, always move the seat as far seat is occupied by a smaller
the inflating airbag. A child in a back as it will go. It is better to person, such as a child who has
forward-facing child restraint can secure the child restraint in a outgrown child restraints.
be seriously injured or killed if the rear seat. . There is a critical problem with
passenger frontal airbag inflates the airbag system or the
and the passenger seat is in a passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system is
forward position. designed to turn off the front When the passenger sensing
Even if the passenger sensing outboard passenger frontal airbag system has turned off the front
system has turned off the front and knee airbag if: outboard passenger frontal airbag
outboard passenger airbag(s), no and knee airbag, the off indicator
. The front outboard passenger
system is fail-safe. No one can will light and stay lit as a reminder
seat is unoccupied.
guarantee that an airbag will not that the airbags are off. See
. The system determines that an Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
inflate under some unusual
infant is present in a rear-facing on page 511.
circumstance, even though the infant seat.
airbag(s) are off. The passenger sensing system is
. The system determines that a designed to turn on the front
(Continued)
small child is present in a child outboard passenger frontal airbag
restraint. and knee airbag anytime the system
senses that a person of adult size is
sitting properly in the front outboard
passenger seat. When the Seat) on page 345 or Securing

passenger sensing system has WARNING (Continued) Child Restraints (Right Front
allowed the airbags to be enabled, Passenger Seat) on page 345.
the on indicator will light and stay lit avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right 5. If, after reinstalling the child
as a reminder that the airbags are restraint and restarting the
active. away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 511 for more vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
For some children who have information, including important turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
outgrown child restraints, and for safety information. recline the vehicle seatback and
very small adults, the passenger adjust the seat cushion,
sensing system may or may not turn if adjustable, to make sure that
off the front outboard passenger If the On Indicator Is Lit for a the vehicle seatback is not
frontal airbag and knee airbag, Child Restraint pushing the child restraint into
depending upon the person's the seat cushion. Also make
seating posture and body build. If a child restraint has been installed sure the child restraint is not
Everyone in the vehicle who and the on indicator is lit: trapped under the vehicle head
has outgrown child restraints 1. Turn the vehicle off. restraint. If this happens, adjust
should wear a safety belt 2. Remove the child restraint from the head restraint. See Head
properly whether or not there is the vehicle. Restraints on page 32.
an airbag for that person. 6. Restart the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items
{ WARNING from the seat such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
If the on indicator is still lit, secure
the child in the child restraint in a
If the airbag readiness light ever heaters, or seat massagers. rear seat position in the vehicle, and
comes on and stays on, it means 4. Reinstall the child restraint check with your dealer.
that something may be wrong following the directions provided
with the airbag system. To help by the child restraint
(Continued) manufacturer and refer to
Securing Child Restraints (Rear
If the Off Indicator Is Lit for an 2. Remove any additional material A thick layer of additional material,
Adult-Size Occupant from the seat, such as blankets, such as a blanket or cushion,
cushions, seat covers, seat or aftermarket equipment such as
heaters, or seat massagers. seat covers, seat heaters, and seat
3. Place the seatback in the fully massagers can affect how well the
upright position. passenger sensing system
operates. We recommend that you
4. Have the person sit upright in not use seat covers or other
the seat, centered on the seat aftermarket equipment except when
cushion, with legs comfortably approved by GM for your specific
extended. vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
5. Restart the vehicle and have the the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
person remain in this position for page 328 for more information
two to three minutes after the on about modifications that can affect
indicator is lit. how the system operates.
If a person of adult size is sitting in

the front outboard passenger seat,
Additional Factors Affecting
System Operation
{ WARNING
but the off indicator is lit, it could be Stowing of articles under the
because that person is not sitting Safety belts help keep the
passenger in position on the seat passenger seat or between the
properly in the seat. Use the passenger seat cushion and
following steps to allow the system during vehicle maneuvers and
braking, which helps the passenger seatback may interfere with the
to detect that person and enable the
sensing system maintain the proper operation of the passenger
front outboard passenger frontal
passenger airbag status. See sensing system.
airbag:
Safety Belts and Child Restraints
1. Turn the vehicle off. in the Index for additional
information about the importance of
proper restraint use.
Servicing the WARNING (Continued)

Your dealer and the service manual
have information about the location
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle of the airbag sensors, sensing and
Airbags affect how the vehicle proper service procedures, and diagnostic module, and airbag
should be serviced. There are parts make sure the person performing wiring.
of the airbag system in several work for you is qualified to do so.
In addition, the vehicle has a
places around the vehicle. Your passenger sensing system for the
dealer and the service manual have Adding Equipment to the front outboard passenger position,
information about servicing the which includes sensors that are part
vehicle and the airbag system. To Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
of the passenger seat. The
purchase a service manual, see Adding accessories that change the passenger sensing system may not
Service Publications Ordering vehicle's frame, bumper system, operate properly if the original seat
Information on page 1311. height, front end or side sheet trim is replaced with non-GM
metal, may keep the airbag system covers, upholstery, or trim; or with
{ WARNING from working properly. The GM covers, upholstery, or trim
operation of the airbag system can designed for a different vehicle. Any
For up to 10 seconds after the also be affected by changing or object, such as an aftermarket seat
vehicle is turned off and the moving any parts of the front seats, heater or a comfort-enhancing pad
battery is disconnected, an airbag safety belts, the airbag sensing and or device, installed under or on top
can still inflate during improper diagnostic module, steering wheel, of the seat fabric, could also
service. You can be injured if you instrument panel, roof-rail airbag interfere with the operation of the
are close to an airbag when it modules, ceiling headliner or pillar passenger sensing system. This
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. garnish trim, front sensors, side could either prevent proper
They are probably part of the impact sensors, or airbag wiring. deployment of the passenger
airbag system. Be sure to follow airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
(Continued) sensing system from properly
turning off the passenger airbag(s). Notice: If an airbag covering is

See Passenger Sensing System on damaged, opened, or broken, the WARNING (Continued)
page 324. airbag may not work properly. Do
not open or break the airbag systems are working properly
The vehicle has rollover roof-rail after a crash, have them
airbags, see Different Size Tires coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers, inspected and any necessary
and Wheels on page 1056 for replacements made as soon as
additional important information. have the airbag covering and/or
airbag module replaced. For the possible.
If you have to modify your vehicle location of the airbags, see
because you have a disability and Where Are the Airbags? on If an airbag inflates, you will need to
have questions about whether the page 319. See your dealer for replace airbag system parts. See
modifications will affect the vehicle's service. your dealer for service.
airbag system, or if you have
questions about whether the airbag Replacing Airbag System If the airbag readiness light stays on
system will be affected if the vehicle after the vehicle is started or comes
is modified for any other reason, call Parts after a Crash on when you are driving, the airbag
Customer Assistance. See system may not work properly. Have
Customer Assistance Offices on { WARNING the vehicle serviced right away. See
page 133. Airbag Readiness Light on
A crash can damage the airbag page 511.
Airbag System Check systems in the vehicle.
A damaged airbag system may
The airbag system does not need not work properly and may not
regularly scheduled maintenance or protect you and your
replacement. Make sure the airbag passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
readiness light is working. See in serious injury or even death. To
Airbag Readiness Light on
help make sure the airbag
page 511.
(Continued)
Child Restraints The manufacturer's instructions that

come with the booster seat, state
Q: What is the proper way to
wear safety belts?
the weight and height limitations for
Older Children that booster. Use a booster seat
A: An older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the
with a lap-shoulder belt until the additional restraint a shoulder
child passes the below fit test: belt can provide. The shoulder
. Sit all the way back on the seat. belt should not cross the face or
Do the knees bend at the seat neck. The lap belt should fit
edge? If yes, continue. If no, snugly below the hips, just
return to the booster seat. touching the top of the thighs.
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. This applies belt force to the
Does the shoulder belt rest on child's pelvic bones in a crash.
the shoulder? If yes, continue. It should never be worn over the
If no, then return to the abdomen, which could cause
booster seat. severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
. Does the lap belt fit low and
snug on the hips, touching the According to accident statistics,
Older children who have outgrown
thighs? If yes, continue. If no, children and infants are safer when
booster seats should wear the
return to the booster seat. properly restrained in a child
vehicle's safety belts.
restraint system or infant restraint
. Can proper safety belt fit be system secured in a rear seating
maintained for the length of the position.
trip? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat. In a crash, children who are not
buckled up can strike other people
who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older

children need to use safety belts WARNING (Continued)
properly.
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
{ WARNING That could cause serious or fatal
Never allow more than one child injuries. The shoulder belt should
to wear the same safety belt. The go over the shoulder and across
safety belt cannot properly spread the chest.
the impact forces. In a crash, they
can be crushed together and
seriously injured. A safety belt
must be used by only one person
at a time. { WARNING
Never allow a child to wear the
safety belt with the shoulder belt
behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt.
The child could move too far
forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
might also slide under the lap
(Continued)
Infants and Young Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer

WARNING (Continued)
protection for adults and older
Children children, but not for young children
Everyone in a vehicle needs and infants. Neither the vehicle's arms. An infant should be
protection! This includes infants and safety belt system nor its airbag secured in an appropriate
all other children. Neither the system is designed for them. Every restraint.
distance traveled nor the age and time infants and young children ride
size of the traveler changes the in vehicles, they should have the
need, for everyone, to use safety protection provided by appropriate
restraints. In fact, the law in every child restraints.
state in the United States and in Children who are not restrained
every Canadian province says properly can strike other people,
children up to some age must be or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
restrained while in a vehicle.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Never hold an infant or a child
Children can be seriously injured while riding in a vehicle. Due to
or strangled if a shoulder belt is crash forces, an infant or a child
wrapped around their neck and will become so heavy it is not
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Never leave children
possible to hold it during a crash.
For example, in a crash at only
{ WARNING
unattended in a vehicle and never 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) Children who are up against,
allow children to play with the infant will suddenly become a or very close to, any airbag when
safety belts. 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's it inflates can be seriously injured
(Continued) or killed. Never put a rear-facing
(Continued)
Q: What are the different types of are many kinds of restraints

WARNING (Continued) add-on child restraints? available for children with
A: Add-on child restraints, which special needs.
child restraint in the right front
seat. Secure a rear-facing child are purchased by the vehicle
restraint in a rear seat. It is also owner, are available in four basic { WARNING
better to secure a forward-facing types. Selection of a particular
restraint should take into To reduce the risk of neck and
child restraint in a rear seat. If you head injury during a crash, infants
must secure a forward-facing consideration not only the child's
weight, height, and age but also need complete support. In a
child restraint in the right front crash, if an infant is in a
whether or not the restraint will
seat, always move the front rear-facing child restraint, the
be compatible with the motor
passenger seat as far back as it vehicle in which it will be used. crash forces can be distributed
will go. across the strongest part of an
For most basic types of child
restraints, there are many infant's body, the back and
different models available. When shoulders. Infants should always
purchasing a child restraint, be be secured in rear-facing child
sure it is designed to be used in restraints.
a motor vehicle. If it is, the
restraint will have a label saying
that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards. { WARNING
The restraint manufacturer A young child's hip bones are still
instructions that come with the so small that the vehicle's regular
restraint state the weight and safety belt may not remain low on
height limitations for a particular the hip bones, as it should.
child restraint. In addition, there
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Child Restraint Systems
Instead, it may settle up around
the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal
injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, young children should
always be secured in appropriate Forward-Facing Child Seat
child restraints.
Rear-Facing Infant Seat A forward-facing child seat provides
restraint for the child's body with the
A rear-facing infant seat provides harness.
restraint with the seating surface
against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
Securing an Add-On Child Children can be endangered in a

Restraint in the Vehicle crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
{ WARNING When securing an add-on child
restraint, refer to the instructions
A child can be seriously injured or that come with the restraint which
killed in a crash if the child may be on the restraint itself or in a
restraint is not properly secured in booklet, or both, and to this manual.
the vehicle. Secure the child The child restraint instructions are
restraint properly in the vehicle important, so if they are not
using the vehicle safety belt or available, obtain a replacement
LATCH system, following the copy from the manufacturer.
Booster Seats instructions that came with that Keep in mind that an unsecured
A booster seat is a child restraint child restraint and the instructions child restraint can move around in a
designed to improve the fit of the in this manual. collision or sudden stop and injure
vehicle's safety belt system. people in the vehicle. Be sure to
A booster seat can also help a child To help reduce the chance of injury, properly secure any child restraint in
to see out the window. the child restraint must be secured the vehicle even when no child is
in the vehicle. Child restraint in it.
systems must be secured in vehicle In some areas, Certified Child
seats by lap belts or the lap belt Passenger Safety Technicians
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by (CPSTs) are available to inspect
the LATCH system. See Lower and demonstrate how to correctly
Anchors and Tethers for Children use and install child restraints. In
(LATCH System) on page 337. the U.S., refer to the National
Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) website to
locate the nearest child safety seat We recommend that children and
inspection station. For CPST child restraints be secured in a rear WARNING (Continued)
availability in Canada, check with seat, including: an infant or a child
Transport Canada or the Provincial riding in a rear-facing child restraint; passenger airbag inflates and the
Ministry of Transportation office. a child riding in a forward-facing passenger seat is in a forward
child seat; an older child riding in a position.
Securing the Child within the booster seat; and children, who are Even if the passenger sensing
Child Restraint large enough, using safety belts. system has turned off the right
A label on your sun visor says, front passenger frontal airbag, no
{ WARNING Never put a rear-facing child seat in system is fail-safe. No one can
the front. This is because the risk to guarantee that an airbag will not
A child can be seriously injured or
the rear-facing child is so great, deploy under some unusual
killed in a crash if the child is not
if the airbag deploys. circumstance, even though it is
properly secured in the child
turned off.
restraint. Secure the child
properly following the instructions { WARNING Secure rear-facing child restraints
that came with that child restraint. in a rear seat, even if the airbag
A child in a rear-facing child
is off. If you secure a
restraint can be seriously injured
forward-facing child restraint in
Where to Put the or killed if the right front
the right front seat, always move
passenger airbag inflates. This is
Restraint because the back of the
the front passenger seat as far
According to accident statistics, back as it will go. It is better to
rear-facing child restraint would
children and infants are safer when secure the child restraint in a
be very close to the inflating
properly restrained in a child rear seat.
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
restraint system or infant restraint child restraint can be seriously See Passenger Sensing System
system secured in a rear seating injured or killed if the right front on page 324 for additional
position. information.
(Continued)
When securing a child restraint in a Keep in mind that an unsecured When installing a child restraint with
rear seating position, study the child restraint can move around in a a top tether, you must also use
instructions that came with your collision or sudden stop and injure either the lower anchors or the
child restraint to make sure it is people in the vehicle. Be sure to safety belts to properly secure the
compatible with this vehicle. properly secure any child restraint in child restraint. A child restraint must
Child restraints and booster seats your vehicle even when no child never be installed using only the top
vary considerably in size, and some is in it. tether and anchor.
may fit in certain seating positions In order to use the LATCH system in
better than others. Always make Lower Anchors and your vehicle, you need a child
sure the child restraint is properly Tethers for Children restraint that has LATCH
secured. (LATCH System) attachments. The child restraint
Depending on where you place the manufacturer will provide you with
The LATCH system secures a child instructions on how to use the child
child restraint and the size of the restraint during driving or in a crash.
child restraint, you may not be able restraint and its attachments. The
LATCH attachments on the child following explains how to attach a
to access adjacent safety belt restraint are used to attach the child
assemblies or LATCH anchors for child restraint with these
restraint to the anchors in the attachments in your vehicle.
additional passengers or child vehicle. This system is designed to
restraints. Adjacent seating make installation of a child restraint Not all vehicle seating positions or
positions should not be used if the easier. child restraints have lower anchors
child restraint prevents access to or and attachments or top tether
interferes with the routing of the Make sure that a LATCH-compatible anchors and attachments.
safety belt. child restraint is properly installed
using the anchors, or use the
Wherever you install a child vehicle's safety belts to secure the
restraint, be sure to secure the child restraint, following the instructions
restraint properly. that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor The child restraint may have a
single tether (3) or a dual tether (4).
Either will have a single
attachment (2) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a
top tether are designed for use with
or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow
Lower anchors (1) are metal bars A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top of the instructions for your child
built into the vehicle. There are two the child restraint to the vehicle. restraint.
lower anchors for each LATCH A top tether anchor is built into the
seating position that will vehicle. The top tether
accommodate a child restraint with attachment (2) on the child restraint
lower attachments (2). connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether

Anchor Locations
To assist in locating the lower

anchors, each seating position with
lower anchors has two labels, near
the crease between the seatback
and the seat cushion.
Sedan
For sedan models, the top tether
anchors are under the covers
behind the rear seat on the filler
I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating panel. Pull open the cover to access
positions with top tether anchors. the top tether anchors. Be sure to
H (Lower Anchor): Seating To assist in locating the top tether use an anchor on the same side of
positions with two lower anchors. anchors, the top tether anchor the vehicle as the seating position
symbol is on the cover for sedan where the child restraint will be
models or near the anchors on placed.
hatchback models.
the instructions that come with the

child restraint say that the top tether WARNING (Continued)
must be attached.
belts to secure the restraint,
According to accident statistics, following the instructions that
children and infants are safer when came with the child restraint and
properly restrained in a child the instructions in this manual.
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position. See Where to Put the
Restraint on page 336 for { WARNING
additional information.
Do not attach more than one child
Hatchback Securing a Child Restraint restraint to a single anchor.
Designed for the LATCH Attaching more than one child
For hatchback models, the top
System restraint to a single anchor could
tether anchors are on the back of
the rear seatbacks. Remove the cause the anchor or attachment
cargo cover before installing the top { WARNING to come loose or even break
tether. The cargo cover should during a crash. A child or others
remain off while the top tether is in If a LATCH-type child restraint is could be injured. To reduce the
use. Be sure to use an anchor on not attached to anchors, the child risk of serious or fatal injuries
the same side of the vehicle as the restraint will not be able to protect during a crash, attach only one
seating position where the child the child correctly. In a crash, the child restraint per anchor.
restraint will be placed. child could be seriously injured or
killed. Install a LATCH-type child
Do not secure a child restraint in a
restraint properly using the
position without a top tether anchor
anchors, or use the vehicle safety
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if (Continued)
If you need to secure more than one 1.1. Find the lower anchors for
{ WARNING child restraint in the rear seat, see the desired seating
Where to Put the Restraint on position.
Children can be seriously injured page 336.
or strangled if a shoulder belt is 1.2. Put the child restraint on
wrapped around their neck and This system is designed to make the seat.
the safety belt continues to the installation of child restraints 1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
tighten. Buckle any unused safety easier. When using lower anchors, attachments on the child
belts behind the child restraint so do not use the vehicle's safety belts. restraint to the lower
Instead, use the vehicle's anchors anchors.
children cannot reach them. Pull
and child restraint attachments to
the shoulder belt all the way out 2. If the child restraint manufacturer
secure the restraints. Some
of the retractor to set the lock, restraints also use another vehicle recommends that the top tether
if the vehicle has one, after the anchor to secure a top tether. be attached, attach and tighten
child restraint has been installed. the top tether to the top tether
1. Attach and tighten the lower anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
attachments to the lower child restraint instructions and
Notice: Do not let the LATCH anchors. If the child restraint
attachments rub against the the following steps:
does not have lower
vehicles safety belts. This may attachments or the desired 2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
damage these parts. If necessary, seating position does not have 2.2. Open the cover,
move buckled safety belts to lower anchors, secure the child if equipped, to access the
avoid rubbing the LATCH restraint with the top tether and top tether anchors.
attachments. the safety belts. Refer to your
child restraint manufacturer 2.3. For hatchback models,
Do not fold the empty rear seat
instructions and the instructions remove the cargo cover
with a safety belt buckled. This
in this manual. before installing the top
could damage the safety belt or
tether. The cargo cover
the seat. Unbuckle and return the
should remain off while the
safety belt to its stowed position,
top tether is in use.
before folding the seat.
2.4. Route and tighten the top If the position you are using
tether according to your has an adjustable headrest
child restraint instructions or head restraint and you
and the following are using a single tether,
instructions: raise the headrest or head
restraint and route the
tether under the headrest or
head restraint and in
between the headrest or
If the position you are using head restraint posts.
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
are using a single tether,
route the tether over the
seatback. If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
are using a dual tether,
raise the headrest or head
restraint and route the
tether under the headrest or
head restraint and around If the child restraint has the LATCH
the headrest or head WARNING (Continued) system, see Lower Anchors and
restraint posts. Tethers for Children (LATCH
working properly after a crash, System) on page 337 for how and
3. Before placing a child in the see your dealer to have the
child restraint, make sure it is where to install the child restraint
system inspected and any using LATCH. If a child restraint is
securely held in place. To check, necessary replacements made as
grasp the child restraint at the secured in the vehicle using a
soon as possible. safety belt and it uses a top tether,
LATCH path and attempt to
move it side to side and back see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
and forth. There should be no If the vehicle has the LATCH system Children (LATCH System) on
more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of and it was being used during a page 337 for top tether anchor
movement for proper installation. crash, new LATCH system parts locations.
may be needed. Do not secure a child seat in a
Replacing LATCH System New parts and repairs may be position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
Parts After a Crash necessary even if the LATCH
that the top tether be anchored, or if
system was not being used at the
time of the crash. the instructions that come with the
{ WARNING child restraint say that the top strap
Securing Child Restraints must be anchored.
A crash can damage the LATCH
system in the vehicle. A damaged (Rear Seat) In Canada, the law requires that
LATCH system may not properly forward-facing child restraints have
When securing a child restraint in a a top tether, and that the tether be
secure the child restraint,
rear seating position, study the attached.
resulting in serious injury or even instructions that came with the child
death in a crash. To help make restraint to make sure it is If the child restraint does not have
sure the LATCH system is compatible with this vehicle. the LATCH system, you will be
(Continued) using the safety belt to secure the
child restraint in this position.
Be sure to follow the instructions

that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
If more than one child restraint
needs to be installed in the rear
seat, be sure to read Where to Put
the Restraint on page 336.
1. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of 3. Push the latch plate into the 4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
the vehicle safety belt through or buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the
around the restraint. The child lock. When the retractor lock is
restraint instructions will show Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt set, the belt can be tightened but
you how. not pulled out of the retractor.
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
6. If the child restraint has a top Securing Child Restraints

tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
(Right Front
regarding the use of the top Passenger Seat)
tether. See Lower Anchors and This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat
Tethers for Children (LATCH is a safer place to secure a
System) on page 337 for more forward-facing child restraint. See
information. Where to Put the Restraint on
7. Before placing a child in the page 336.
child restraint, make sure it is In addition, the vehicle has a
securely held in place. To check, passenger sensing system which is
grasp the child restraint at the designed to turn off the front
5. To tighten the belt, push down safety belt path and attempt to outboard passenger frontal airbag
on the child restraint, pull the move it side to side and back and knee airbag under certain
shoulder portion of the belt to and forth. When the child conditions. See Passenger Sensing
tighten the lap portion of the belt, restraint is properly installed, System on page 324 and
and feed the shoulder belt back there should be no more than Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
into the retractor. When installing 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement. on page 511 for more information
a forward-facing child restraint, it To remove the child restraint, on this, including important safety
may be helpful to use your knee unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and information.
to push down on the child let it return to the stowed position.
restraint as you tighten the belt. Never put a rear-facing child seat in
If the top tether is attached to a top the front. This is because the risk to
Try to pull the belt out of the tether anchor, disconnect it. the rear-facing child is so great,
retractor to make sure the if the airbag deploys.
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.
the instructions that come with the

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints
restraint can be seriously injured in a rear seat, even if the In Canada, the law requires that
or killed if the passenger frontal airbag(s) are off. If you secure a forward-facing child restraints have
airbag inflates. This is because forward-facing child restraint in a top tether, and that the tether be
the back of the rear-facing child the front outboard passenger attached.
restraint would be very close to seat, always move the seat as far You will be using the lap-shoulder
the inflating airbag. A child in a back as it will go. It is better to belt to secure the child restraint in
forward-facing child restraint can secure the child restraint in a this position. Follow the instructions
be seriously injured or killed if the rear seat. that came with the child restraint.
passenger frontal airbag inflates 1. Move the seat as far back as it
and the passenger seat is in a If the child restraint has the LATCH will go before securing the
forward position. system, see Lower Anchors and forward-facing child restraint.
Even if the passenger sensing Tethers for Children (LATCH When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the front System) on page 337 for how to system has turned off the front
outboard passenger airbag(s), no install your child restraint using outboard passenger frontal
system is fail-safe. No one can LATCH. If a child restraint is secured airbag and knee airbag, the off
guarantee that an airbag will not using a safety belt and it uses a top indicator on the passenger
inflate under some unusual tether, see Lower Anchors and airbag status indicator should
circumstance, even though the Tethers for Children (LATCH light and stay lit when you start
System) on page 337 for top tether the vehicle. See Passenger
airbag(s) are off.
anchor locations. Airbag Status Indicator on
(Continued) page 511.
Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor 2. Put the child restraint on
if a national or local law requires the seat.
that the top tether be anchored, or if
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run

the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. Push the latch plate into the 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the
Position the release button on lock. When the retractor lock is
the buckle so that the safety belt set, the belt can be tightened but
could be quickly unbuckled if not pulled out of the retractor.
necessary.
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the
belt if needed.
7. Before placing a child in the

child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and back
and forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
If the airbags are off, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag
6. To tighten the belt, push down status indicator will come on and
on the child restraint, pull the stay on when the vehicle is started.
shoulder portion of the belt to If a child restraint has been installed
tighten the lap portion of the belt, and the off symbol is not lit, see If
and feed the shoulder belt back the On Indicator Is Lit for a Child
into the retractor. When installing Restraint under Passenger Sensing
a forward-facing child restraint, it System on page 324.
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child To remove the child restraint,
restraint as you tighten the belt. unbuckle the vehicle's safety belt
and let it go back all the way.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 5 and 6.
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage Luggage/Load

Compartments Locations
Storage Compartments
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1 Instrument Panel Storage Load Compartment
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 (Hatchback)
Luggage/Load Locations The load compartment cover can be
Load Compartment used to conceal objects under it or
(Hatchback) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 removed and placed on the bottom
of the load compartment to carry
Additional Storage Features larger loads.
Cargo Cover (Hatchback) . . . . . 4-2
To remove the load compartment
cover:
1. Lift up on the load compartment
cover and pull out.
2. Store the load compartment
cover on the bottom of the load
Lift up on the lever to open. compartment.
If equipped, the storage area may
have an auxiliary input jack and
USB port inside.
Glove Box
Lift up on the glove box lever to
open it.
4-2 Storage
To install the load compartment Additional Storage To remove the cargo cover:
cover: 1. Remove both of the cords from
1. Align the front sides of the load
Features the hooks at the top of the
compartment cover into the slots liftgate.
on both sides at the front of the Cargo Cover (Hatchback)
2. Push up on the underside of the
load compartment. cargo cover at both pins at the
2. Lower the load compartment { WARNING front sides of the cargo cover.
cover onto the lip around the To install the cargo cover:
An unsecured cargo cover could
load compartment.
strike people in a sudden stop or 1. Align the clips on the underside
turn, or in a crash. Store the of the cargo cover over the pins
cargo cover securely or remove it on both sides of the cargo area
from the vehicle. and push down.
2. Reconnect both of the cords to
The cargo cover can be used to the hooks at the top of the
cover items in the rear of the liftgate.
vehicle.
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Engine Coolant Temperature

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Controls Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-10 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-19
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-11 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-19
Controls Passenger Airbag Status Immobilizer Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Reduced Engine Power
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2 Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-12 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Malfunction High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3 Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Daytime Running Lamps
Rear Window Wiper/ Service Vehicle Soon (DRL) Indicator Light . . . . . . . 5-21
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-21
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Brake System Warning Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Information Displays
Power Steering Warning Driver Information
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Indicators Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Vehicle Messages
StabiliTrak OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-17 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Traction Control System
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 (TCS)/StabiliTrak Light . . . . 5-17 Vehicle Personalization
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-26
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Controls Steering Wheel Controls $ / i (Mute/End Call): Press to

reject an incoming call, or end a
Steering Wheel current call. Press to silence the
vehicle speakers while using the
Adjustment infotainment system. Press again to
turn the sound on.
For vehicles with OnStar or
Bluetooth systems, press to reject
an incoming call, or end a
current call.
_ SRC ^ (Source): Press to select
an audio source.
Use to scroll up or down to select
Some audio controls can be the next or previous favorite radio
adjusted at the steering wheel. station or CD/MP3 track.
b / g (Push to Talk): For vehicles + x (Volume): Press + or to

To adjust the steering wheel: with Bluetooth or OnStar, press to increase or decrease the volume.
interact with those systems. See
1. Pull the lever down. Bluetooth (Voice Recognition) on Horn
2. Move the steering wheel up, page 737 or Bluetooth (Overview)
down, forward, and backward. on page 726 or Bluetooth Press a on the steering wheel pad
(Infotainment Controls) on to sound the horn.
3. Pull the lever up to lock the page 728 or OnStar Overview on
steering wheel in place. page 141.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
Windshield Wiper/Washer long the windshield washer had

been activated. See Washer Fluid
on page 1020 for information on
filling the windshield washer fluid
reservoir.
Hatchback Shown, Sedan Similar { WARNING

Sedan INT: (Intermittent Wipes): Move In freezing weather, do not use
the lever up to INT for intermittent the washer until the windshield is
wipes, then turn the x INT band warmed. Otherwise the washer
up for more frequent wipes or down fluid can form ice on the
for less frequent wipes. windshield, blocking your vision.
OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.
8 (Mist): For a single wipe, briefly Clear snow and ice from the wiper
Hatchback move the wiper lever down. For blades before using them. If frozen
The windshield wiper/washer lever several wipes, hold the wiper to the windshield, carefully loosen or
is on the right side of the steering lever down. thaw them. Damaged wiper blades
should be replaced. See Wiper
column. n L (Windshield Washer): Pull Blade Replacement on page 1026.
Move the lever to one of the the windshield wiper lever toward
following positions: you to spray windshield washer fluid Heavy snow or ice can overload the
and activate the wipers. The wipers wiper motor. A circuit breaker will
HI: Use for fast wipes. will continue until the lever is stop the motor until it cools down.
LO: Use for slow wipes. released or the maximum wash time
is reached. When the windshield
wiper lever is released, additional
wipes may occur depending on how
Rear Window Wiper/ m = REAR (Rear Washer): Push miles or degrees of turn before
the windshield wiper lever forward needing a signal from the GPS
Washer satellites. When the compass
to spray washer fluid on the rear
For vehicles with the rear wiper/ window. The lever returns to its display shows CAL, drive the
washer, the controls are on the end starting position when released. vehicle for a short distance in an
of the windshield wiper lever. open area where it can receive a
The windshield washer reservoir is GPS signal. The compass system
used for the windshield and the rear will automatically determine when
window. Check the fluid level in the the GPS signal is restored and
reservoir if either washer is not provide a heading again.
working. See Washer Fluid on
page 1020.
Clock
Compass The infotainment system controls
are used to access the time and
ON: Press the upper portion of the The vehicle may have a compass date settings through the menu
button for continuous rear window display in the Driver Information system. See Operation on page 78
wipes. Center (DIC). The compass receives for information about how to use the
its heading and other information menu system.
OFF: The rear wiper turns off when
from the Global Positioning
the button is returned to the middle Radio Without Touchscreen
System (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak,
position.
and vehicle speed information. To set the time and date:
INT (Intermittent Rear Wipes):
Avoid covering the GPS antenna,
Press the lower portion of the button
located on the roof, for long periods 1. Press H.
to set a delay between wipes.
of time with objects that may 2. Select Time and Date Settings.
interfere with the antenna's ability to
receive a satellite signal. The 3. Select Set Time or Set Date.
compass system is designed to 4. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to
operate for a certain number of adjust the highlighted value.
5. Press the MENU/TUNE knob to 4. Press the MENU/TUNE knob to 3. Press S or T to set the date
select the next value. select MM/DD/YYYY (month/ display to DD/MM/YYYY (day/
6. To save the time or date and day/year), or DD/MM/YYYY month/year), MM/DD/YYYY
return to the Time and Date (day/month/year), or YYYY/MM/ (month/day/year), or YYYY/MM/
DD (year/month/day). DD (year/month/day) display
Settings menu, press the /
BACK button at any time or Radio With Touchscreen format.
press the MENU/TUNE knob The infotainment system controls 4. Press 4.
after adjusting the minutes are used to access the time and
or year. date settings through the menu Setting the Time and Date
To set the 12/24 hour format: system. See Operation on page 78 1. Press D, and then press
for information about how to use the settings.
1. Press H. menu system.
2. Press time and date settings,
2. Select Time and Date Settings. Setting the 12/24 Hour Format and then set time and date.
3. Highlight Set Time Format.
1. Press D , and then press 3. Press y or z to adjust the
4. Press the MENU/TUNE knob to settings. value.
select the 12 hour or 24 hour
display format. 2. Press time and date settings. 4. Press 4.
To set the month and day format: 3. Select 12/24 HR Format.
Automatic Clock Sync
1. Press H. 4. Press 4.
1. Press D, and then press
2. Select Time and Date Settings. Setting the Month and Day settings.
3. Highlight Set Date Format. Format 2. Press time and date settings,
1. Press D , and then press and then automatic clock sync.
settings.
2. Press time and date settings.
3. Select On to display the real Notice: Leaving electrical Cigarette Lighter

time or Off to display the time equipment plugged in for an
set by the user. extended period of time while the For vehicles with a cigarette lighter,
vehicle is off will drain the it is located in the center floor
4. Press 4. battery. Always unplug electrical console.
equipment when not in use and The ignition must be turned to ACC/
Power Outlets do not plug in equipment that ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.
The accessory power outlets can be exceeds the maximum 20 ampere
rating. To activate the cigarette lighter,
used to plug in electrical equipment, push it into the heating element and
such as a cell phone or MP3 player. Certain accessory power plugs may let go. When the lighter is ready it
The vehicle has an accessory not be compatible with the will pop back out.
power outlet located in front of the accessory power outlet and could
overload vehicle or adapter fuses. Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter
cupholders on the center floor in while it is heating does not let
console. If a problem is experienced, see
your dealer. the lighter back away from the
Remove the cover to access and heating element when it is hot.
replace when not in use. When adding electrical equipment, Damage from overheating can
be sure to follow the proper occur to the lighter or heating
installation instructions included with element, or a fuse could be
{ WARNING the equipment. See Add-On blown. Do not hold a cigarette
Electrical Equipment on page 938. lighter in while it is heating.
Power is always supplied to the
outlets. Do not leave electrical Notice: Hanging heavy
equipment plugged in when the equipment from the power outlet
vehicle is not in use because the can cause damage not covered
vehicle could catch fire and cause by the vehicle warranty. The
injury or death. power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only, such
as cell phone charge cords.
Ashtrays Warning Lights, Gauges can indicate when there

could be a problem with a vehicle
The vehicle may have a removable Gauges, and function. Often gauges and warning
ashtray. lights work together to indicate a
Indicators problem with the vehicle.
The removable ashtray can be
placed in the front cupholders. To Warning lights and gauges can When one of the warning lights
open the removable ashtray, lift the signal that something is wrong comes on and stays on while
lid of the ashtray. After using, close before it becomes serious enough driving, or when one of the gauges
the lid. to cause an expensive repair or shows there may be a problem,
replacement. Paying attention to the check the section that explains what
Notice: If papers, pins, or other warning lights and gauges could
flammable items are put in the to do. Follow this manual's advice.
prevent injury. Waiting to do repairs can be costly
ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite Warning lights come on when there and even dangerous.
them and possibly damage the could be a problem with a vehicle
vehicle. Never put flammable function. Some warning lights come
items in the ashtray. on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
Instrument Cluster
United States Manual Transmission Shown, Canada Similar

Speedometer The trip odometer measures the Fuel Gauge

distance the vehicle has been
The speedometer shows the driven since the function was last
vehicle's speed in either kilometers reset.
per hour (km/h) or miles per
hour (mph). Press the reset stem in the lower
right of the tachometer to toggle
Odometer between the odometer and the trip
odometer. To reset the trip odometer
to zero, press and hold the reset
stem while the trip odometer is
being displayed. Be careful not to
reset the engine oil life monitor
accidentally.
Tachometer The fuel gauge indicates about how

The odometer shows how far the
vehicle has been driven, in either The tachometer displays the engine much fuel is left when the ignition is
kilometers or miles. speed in revolutions per turned to ON/RUN.
minute (rpm). When the tank nears empty, the low
Trip Odometer fuel warning light will come on.
There is still a little fuel left, but the
vehicle's fuel tank should be filled
soon. See Low Fuel Warning Light
on page 519 for more information.
An arrow on the fuel gauge
indicates on which side of the
vehicle the fuel door is located.
Here are four things that some

owners ask about. None of these
show a problem with the fuel gauge:
. At the service station, the gas
pump shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
When the vehicle is started, this When the vehicle is started, this
. It takes a little more or less fuel
light flashes and a chime may come light flashes and a chime may come
to fill up than the gauge
on to remind the driver to fasten on to remind passengers to fasten
indicated. For example, the
their safety belt. Then the light stays their safety belt. Then the light stays
gauge may have indicated the
on solid until the belt is buckled. on solid until the belt is buckled.
tank was half full, but it actually
This cycle may continue several This cycle continues several times if
took a little more or less than
times if the driver remains or the passenger remains or becomes
half the tank's capacity to fill
becomes unbuckled while the unbuckled while the vehicle is
the tank.
vehicle is moving. moving.
. The indicator moves a little when
If the driver safety belt is buckled, If the passenger safety belt is
turning a corner or speeding up.
neither the chime nor the light buckled, neither the chime nor the
. The gauge goes back to empty comes on. light comes on.
when the ignition is turned off.
Passenger Safety Belt The front passenger safety belt
Reminder Light warning light and chime may turn on
Safety Belt Reminders if an object is put on the seat such
There is a passenger safety belt as a briefcase, handbag, grocery
Driver Safety Belt Reminder reminder light near the passenger bag, laptop, or other electronic
Light airbag status indicator. See device. To turn off the warning light
There is a driver safety belt Passenger Sensing System on and/or chime, remove the object
reminder light on the instrument page 324. from the seat or buckle the
cluster. safety belt.
Airbag Readiness Light

{ WARNING
This light shows if there is an
electrical problem with the airbag If the airbag readiness light stays
system. The system check includes on after the vehicle is started or
the airbag sensor(s), passenger comes on while driving, it means
sensing system, the pretensioners the airbag system might not be
(if equipped), the airbag modules, working properly. The airbags in United States
the wiring, and the crash sensing the vehicle might not inflate in a
and diagnostic module. For more crash, or they could even inflate
information on the airbag system, without a crash. To help avoid
see Airbag System on page 317. injury, have the vehicle serviced
right away.
Canada
Passenger Airbag Status
When the vehicle is started, the
Indicator passenger airbag status indicator
The vehicle has a passenger will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
sensing system. See Passenger for on and off, for several seconds
The airbag readiness light comes on
Sensing System on page 324 for as a system check. If you use
for several seconds when the
important safety information. The remote start, if equipped, to start the
vehicle is started. If the light does
instrument panel has a passenger vehicle, you may not see the system
not come on then, have it fixed
airbag status indicator. check. Then, after several seconds,
immediately.
the status indicator will light either
ON or OFF, or the on or off symbol
to let you know the status of the
front outboard passenger frontal
airbag and knee airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is dealer. Driving while this light is on

lit on the passenger airbag status WARNING (Continued) could drain the battery. If a short
indicator, it means that the front distance must be driven with the
outboard passenger frontal airbag avoid injury to yourself or others, light on, turn off all accessories,
and knee airbag are allowed to have the vehicle serviced right such as the radio and air
inflate. away. See Airbag Readiness conditioner, to help reduce the drain
Light on page 511 for more on the battery.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is information, including important
lit on the passenger airbag status safety information.
indicator, it means that the Malfunction
passenger sensing system has Indicator Lamp
turned off the front outboard Charging System Light A computer system called OBD II
passenger frontal airbag and knee
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second
airbag.
Generation) monitors the operation
If, after several seconds, both status of the vehicle to ensure emissions
indicator lights remain on, or if there are at acceptable levels, helping to
are no lights at all, there may be a maintain a clean environment. The
problem with the lights or the malfunction indicator lamp comes
passenger sensing system. See on when the vehicle is placed in
your dealer for service. This light will come on briefly when ON/RUN, as a check to show it is
the ignition is turned on, and the working. If it does not, have the
{ WARNING engine is not running, as a check to vehicle serviced by your dealer. See
Ignition Positions on page 914 for
show it is working.
If the airbag readiness light ever more information.
It should go out when the engine is
comes on and stays on, it means
started. If it stays on, or comes on
that something may be wrong while driving, there may be a
with the airbag system. To help problem with the electrical charging
(Continued) system. Have it checked by your
smoothly. This could lead to could damage the emission control

costly repairs that might not be system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
covered by the vehicle warranty. and service might be required.
Notice: Modifications made to the To prevent more serious damage to
engine, transmission, exhaust, the vehicle:
intake, or fuel system of the . Reduce vehicle speed.
If the malfunction indicator lamp vehicle or the replacement of the
comes on while the engine is original tires with other than . Avoid hard accelerations.
running, this indicates that the those of the same Tire . Avoid steep uphill grades.
OBD II system has detected a Performance Criteria (TPC) can
problem and diagnosis and service affect the vehicle's emission If the light continues to flash, find a
might be required. controls and can cause this light safe place to stop and park the
to come on. Modifications to vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at
Malfunctions often are indicated by least 10 seconds, and restart the
the system before any problem is these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by the engine. If the light is still flashing,
apparent. Being aware of the light follow the previous steps and see
can prevent more serious damage vehicle warranty. This could also
result in a failure to pass a your dealer for service as soon as
to the vehicle. This system also possible.
assists the service technician in required Emission Inspection/
correctly diagnosing any Maintenance test. See Light On Steady: An emission
malfunction. Accessories and Modifications on control system malfunction has
page 103. been detected on the vehicle.
Notice: If the vehicle is Diagnosis and service might be
continually driven with this light This light comes on during a
malfunction in one of two ways: required.
on, the emission controls might
not work as well, the vehicle fuel Light Flashing: A misfire condition
economy might not be as good, has been detected. A misfire
and the engine might not run as increases vehicle emissions and
The following may correct an If one or more of these conditions

emission control system occurs, change the fuel brand used.
malfunction: It may require at least one full tank
. Check that the fuel cap is fully of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
installed. See Filling the Tank on See Recommended Fuel on
page 936. The diagnostic page 933.
system can determine if the fuel If none of the above have made the The DLC is under the instrument
cap has been left off or light turn off, your dealer can check panel to the left of the steering
improperly installed. A loose or the vehicle. The dealer has the wheel. See your dealer if assistance
missing fuel cap allows fuel to proper test equipment and is needed.
evaporate into the atmosphere. diagnostic tools to fix any
A few driving trips with the cap The vehicle may not pass
mechanical or electrical problems inspection if:
properly installed should turn the that might have developed.
light off. . The malfunction indicator lamp is
. Check that good quality fuel is Emissions Inspection and on with the engine running, or if
used. Poor fuel quality causes Maintenance Programs the light does not come on when
the engine not to run as the ignition is turned to ON/RUN
Depending on where you live, your while the engine is off. See your
efficiently as designed and may vehicle may be required to
cause stalling after start-up, dealer for assistance in verifying
participate in an emission control proper operation of the
stalling when the vehicle is system inspection and maintenance
changed into gear, misfiring, malfunction indicator lamp.
program. For the inspection, the
hesitation on acceleration, emission system test equipment will . The OBD II (On-Board
or stumbling on acceleration. likely connect to the vehicle's Data Diagnostics) system determines
These conditions might go away Link Connector (DLC). that critical emission control
once the engine is warmed up. systems have not been
completely diagnosed. The
vehicle would be considered not
ready for inspection. This can
happen if the 12-volt battery has If the light comes on, take the
recently been replaced or run vehicle to your dealer for service as WARNING (Continued)
down. The diagnostic system is soon as possible.
designed to evaluate critical the vehicle has been pulled off
the road and carefully stopped,
emission control systems during Brake System Warning have the vehicle towed for
normal driving. This can take
several days of routine driving.
Light service.
If this has been done and the The vehicle brake system consists
vehicle still does not pass the of two hydraulic circuits. If one
inspection for lack of OBD II circuit is not working, the remaining
system readiness, your dealer circuit can still work to stop the
can prepare the vehicle for vehicle. For normal braking
inspection. performance, both circuits need to
be working
Service Vehicle Soon If the warning light comes on, there Metric English
Light is a brake problem. Have the brake
system inspected right away. This light should come on briefly
when the ignition is turned to ON.
If it does not come on then, have it
{ WARNING fixed so it will be ready to warn if
The brake system might not be there is a problem.
working properly if the brake When the ignition is on, the brake
system warning light is on. system warning light will also come
For vehicles with this light, it comes Driving with the brake system on when the parking brake is set.
on if a condition exists that may warning light on can lead to a The light will stay on if the parking
require the vehicle to be taken in for crash. If the light is still on after brake does not fully release. If it
service. (Continued)
stays on after the parking brake is engine again to reset the system. For manual transmission vehicles,
fully released, it means there is a If the light still stays on, or comes there is an up-shift light that comes
brake problem. on again while driving, the vehicle on in the lower DIC area. It shows
If the light comes on while driving, needs service. See your dealer. when to shift to the next higher gear
carefully pull off the road and stop. If the regular brake system warning for best fuel economy.
The pedal may be harder to push or light is not on, the brakes will still See Manual Transmission on
may go closer to the floor. It may work, but the antilock brakes will not page 924.
take longer to stop. If the light is still work. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, the antilock
on, have the vehicle towed for
brakes will not work and there is a Power Steering Warning
service. See Towing the Vehicle on
page 1077. problem with the regular brakes. Light
See Brake System Warning Light on
page 515.
Antilock Brake System
The ABS warning light will come on
(ABS) Warning Light briefly when the ignition is turned to
ON/RUN. This is normal. If the light
does not come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn if there is
a problem. This light comes on briefly when the
ignition is turned to ON/RUN as a
Up-Shift Light check to show it is working.
If it does not come on have the
This light comes on briefly when the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
engine is started.
If this light stays on, or comes on
If the light stays on, turn the ignition while driving, the system may not be
to LOCK/OFF or if the light comes working. If this happens, see your
on, stop as soon as possible and dealer for service.
turn the ignition off. Then start the
Traction Off Light See Traction Control System (TCS) See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 928 and StabiliTrak on page 928 and StabiliTrak
System on page 929. System on page 929.
StabiliTrak OFF Light Traction Control System

(TCS)/StabiliTrak Light
This light comes on briefly while

starting the engine. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer. If the system is working
normally, the indicator light then This light comes on briefly while
turns off. starting the engine. If it does not, The StabiliTrak or Traction Control
have the vehicle serviced by your System (TCS) indicator/warning
The traction off light comes on when
dealer. light comes on briefly when the
the Traction Control System (TCS)
has been turned off by pressing and This light comes on when the engine is started.
releasing the TCS/StabiliTrak StabiliTrak system is turned off. If the light does not come on, have
button. If StabiliTrak is off, the Traction the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
Control System (TCS) is also off. If the system is working normally,
This light and the StabiliTrak OFF
light come on when StabiliTrak is If the TCS is off, the system does the indicator light turns off.
turned off. not assist in controlling the vehicle. If the light is on and not flashing, the
Turn on the TCS and the StabiliTrak TCS, and potentially the StabiliTrak
If the TCS is off, wheel spin is not
systems and the warning light system have been disabled.
limited. Adjust driving accordingly.
turns off.
If the indicator/warning light is on Notice: The engine coolant For vehicles with the Tire Pressure
and flashing, the TCS and/or the temperature warning light Monitor System (TPMS), this light
StabiliTrak system is actively indicates that the vehicle has comes on briefly when the engine is
working. overheated. Driving with this light started. It provides information
See StabiliTrak System on on can damage the engine and it about tire pressures and the TPMS.
page 929 and Traction Control may not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. See Engine When the Light Is On Steady
System (TCS) on page 928.
Overheating on page 1019. This indicates that one or more of
the tires are significantly
Engine Coolant The engine coolant temperature
underinflated.
warning light comes on when the
Temperature Warning engine has overheated. Stop as soon as possible, and
Light inflate the tires to the pressure value
If this happens, pull over and turn
off the engine as soon as possible. shown on the Tire and Loading
See Engine Overheating on Information label. See Tire Pressure
page 1019. on page 1047.
When the Light Flashes First and
Tire Pressure Light Then Is On Steady
If the light flashes for about a minute
This light comes on briefly while and then stays on, there may be a
starting the vehicle. problem with the TPMS. If the
problem is not corrected, the light
If it does not, have the vehicle will come on at every ignition cycle.
serviced by the dealer. If the system See Tire Pressure Monitor
is working normally the indicator Operation on page 1049.
light goes off.
Engine Oil Pressure Light If the vehicle has low engine oil Low Fuel Warning Light
pressure, this light will stay on after
the engine is started, or come on
while driving.
This indicates that the engine is not
receiving enough oil. The engine
could be low on oil, or could have
some other oil problem. Have it
The oil pressure light should come fixed immediately by your dealer. This light comes on for a few
on briefly as the engine is started. The oil pressure light could also seconds when the ignition is turned
If it does not come on, have the come on in other situations: on as a check to indicate it is
vehicle serviced by your dealer. working. If it does not come on,
. When the ignition is on but the have it fixed.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil engine is not running, the light
maintenance can damage the will come on as a test to show it This light comes on when the
engine. Driving with the engine is working. The light will go out vehicle is low on fuel.
oil low can also damage the when the ignition is turned on. The low fuel warning light comes on
engine. The repairs would not be If it does not come on with the when there are approximately 6.0 L
covered by the vehicle warranty. ignition on, there may be a (1.7 gal) of fuel remaining in
Check the oil level as soon as problem with the fuse or bulb. the tank.
possible. Add oil if required, but Have it fixed right away.
if the oil level is within the To turn the light off, add fuel to the
operating range and the oil
. If the vehicle comes to a hard fuel tank. See Filling the Tank on
pressure is still low, have the stop, the light may come on for a page 936.
vehicle serviced. Always follow moment. This is normal.
the maintenance schedule for
changing engine oil.
Immobilizer Light Reduced Engine Power The vehicle can be driven at a

reduced speed when the reduced
Light engine power light is on but
acceleration and speed might be
reduced. The performance could be
reduced until the next time the
vehicle is driven. If this light stays
on, see your dealer as soon as
possible for diagnosis and repair.
The immobilizer light should come
on briefly as the engine is started.
If it does not come on, have the
The reduced engine power light High-Beam On Light
should come on briefly as the
vehicle serviced by your dealer. engine is started. If it does not come
If the system is working normally, on, have the vehicle serviced by
the indicator light turns off. your dealer.
If the light stays on and the engine This light, along with the malfunction
does not start, there could be a indicator lamp, displays when a
problem with the immobilizer noticeable reduction in the vehicle's
system. See Immobilizer Operation performance occurs. Stop the This light comes on when the
on page 211. vehicle and turn off the ignition. Wait high-beam headlamps are in use.
10 seconds and restart the vehicle.
This might correct the condition. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer on page 62.
Daytime Running Lamps The light goes out when the fog For vehicles with cruise control, the
lamps are turned off. See Fog cruise control light is white when the
(DRL) Indicator Light Lamps on page 64 for more cruise control is on and ready, and
information. turns green when the cruise control
is set and active.
Lamps On Reminder The light turns off when the cruise
control is turned off. See Cruise
Control on page 931.
This light turns on whenever the Door Ajar Light

Daytime Running Lamps are in use.
See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
on page 62. This light comes on when the
exterior lamps are in use. See
Front Fog Lamp Light Exterior Lamp Controls on page 61.
Cruise Control Light This light comes on when a door is

open or not securely latched. Before
driving, check that all doors are
properly closed.
For vehicles with fog lamps, this

light comes on when the fog lamps
are on.
Information Displays DIC Buttons DIC Menu Items

Press MENU to view the DIC
Driver Information menus. Some items display in the
Center (DIC) upper display area, some in the
lower display area, and others use
The DIC displays information about both the upper and lower display
your vehicle. It also displays areas. Use w x to scroll through
warning messages if a system the menu items. Not all items are
problem is detected. See Vehicle 1. SET/CLR: Press to set or clear
available on every vehicle. The
Messages on page 525. All the menu item displayed. This is
following is a list of all possible
messages appear in the DIC display not used to reset the trip
menu items:
in the instrument cluster. odometer. To reset the trip
odometer, use the reset button . Average Speed
DIC Operation and Displays on the tachometer in the . Timer
The DIC has different displays instrument cluster.
. Average Fuel Economy
which can be accessed by using the 2. w x (Thumbwheel): Use to
DIC buttons on the turn signal lever . Fuel Range
scroll through the items in
on the left side of the steering . Units
each menu.
wheel. The DIC displays trip, fuel,
. Language
and warning messages if a system 3. MENU: Press to display the DIC
problem is detected. menus. This button is also used . Tire Learn
to return to or exit the last
screen displayed on the DIC.
. Remaining Oil Life
Average Speed Timer Average Fuel Economy
Metric Metric
This display can be used as a timer.
To start/stop the timer, press SET/
CLR while the timer is displayed.
The display will show the amount of
time that has passed since the timer
was last reset, not including time the
ignition is off. The timer will record
up to 99:59 hours, after which the
display will return to zero. To reset
the timer to zero, press and hold
English SET/CLR. English
This display shows the average This display shows the approximate
speed. To reset the average speed average liters per 100 kilometers
to zero, press and hold the SET/ (L/100 km) or miles per
CLR button while the average gallon (mpg). This number is
speed is displayed. calculated based on the number of
L/100 km (mpg) recorded since the
last time this menu item was reset.
To reset the average fuel economy, Units Tire Learn

press and hold the SET/CLR button This menu is not available while the This menu is not available while the
while the average fuel economy is vehicle is moving. Press SET/CLR vehicle is moving. This display
displayed. while the unit display is active and allows for matching of the TPMS
Fuel Range move w x to change units when sensors. See Tire Pressure Monitor
UNIT SET is displayed. Press SET/ System on page 1048 and Tire
CLR to confirm the setting. You will Pressure Monitor Operation on
have to select 1, 2, or 3 for the unit page 1049.
display. 1 is Imperial units, 2 is US Remaining Oil Life
units, and 3 is metric units. This will
change the displays on the cluster This menu is not available while the
and DIC to the type of vehicle is moving. This display
measurements you select. shows an estimate of the oil's
remaining useful life. If 99 : % is
Language displayed, that means 99% of the
Metric Shown, English Similar
This menu is not available while the current oil life remains.
This displays the approximate vehicle is moving. Press SET/CLR
distance the vehicle can be driven When the remaining oil life is low,
while the language display is active the Code 82 message will appear
without refueling. The fuel range
estimate is based on an average of and move w x to change the on the display. The oil should be
the vehicle's fuel economy over language of the displays when changed as soon as possible. See
recent driving history and the LANG SET is displayed. You will Engine Oil on page 109. In addition
amount of fuel remaining in the have to select 1 or 2 for the to the engine oil life system
fuel tank. language display. 1 is Alphabet and monitoring the oil life, additional
2 is Arabic Numeral. Press SET/ maintenance is recommended in the
CLR to confirm the setting. Maintenance Schedule. See
Maintenance Schedule on
page 112.
Remember, the oil life display must Vehicle Messages 24: License Plate Lamp Failure
be reset after each oil change. It will 25: Left Front Turn Indicator Failure
not reset itself. Also, be careful not DIC messages display when the
to reset the oil life display status of the vehicle has changed 26: Left Rear Turn Indicator Failure
accidentally at any time other than and action may be needed to 27: Right Front Turn Indicator
when the oil has just been changed. correct the condition. Multiple Failure
It cannot be reset accurately until messages appear one after another.
the next oil change. To reset the 28: Right Rear Turn Indicator
Press any of the DIC buttons on the Failure
engine oil life system, press the turn signal lever to acknowledge
SET/CLR button while the oil life and clear them from the display. 52: Change Timing Belt
display is active. See Engine Oil More urgent messages cannot be
Life System on page 1011. 82: Change Engine Oil Soon
cleared from the DIC display. All
messages should be taken 84: Engine Power Is Reduced
seriously. Clearing messages will 89: Service Vehicle Soon
not correct the problem.
Vehicle messages appear as code
numbers.
15: Center High Mounted Brake
Lamp Failure
16: Service Brake Lamps
21: Left Front Position Lamp
Failure
22: Right Front Position Lamp
Failure
23: Reversing Lamp Failure
Vehicle 3. Press MENU/TUNE to select the Chime Volume

Vehicle Settings menu. This allows selection of the chime
Personalization The following list of menu items may volume level.
Personalization Menu (Radio be available: Press MENU/TUNE when Chime
Without Touchscreen) . Comfort and Convenience Volume is highlighted. Turn the
The audio system controls are used . Climate and Air Quality MENU/TUNE knob to select Normal
to access the personalization or High. Press MENU/TUNE to
. Language confirm and go back to the
menus for customizing vehicle
features. . Lighting last menu.
CONFIG (Configuration): Press to . Power Door Locks Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear
access the Configuration . Remote Lock, Unlock, Start When on and the vehicle on, this
Settings menu. feature will turn the rear wipers on
. Return to Factory Settings when the vehicle is placed in
MENU/TUNE: Turn to scroll
through the menus. Press to enter Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to R (Reverse) when the front wipers
the menus and select the menu highlight the menu. Press MENU/ are on.
items. TUNE to select it. Each of the Press MENU/TUNE when Auto
menus is detailed in the following Wipe in Reverse Gear is
/ BACK: Press to exit or move information.
backward in a menu. highlighted. Turn the MENU/TUNE
Comfort and Convenience knob to select On or Off. Press
Entering the Personalization MENU/TUNE to confirm and go
Menus Select the Comfort and back to the last menu.
Convenience menu and the
1. Press CONFIG to access the following will be displayed: Language
Configuration Settings menu.
. Chime Volume Select the Language menu and the
2. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to following will be displayed:
. Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear
highlight Vehicle Settings.
. English

. French Exit Lighting Unlock Door Anti Lock Out
. Spanish Press MENU/TUNE when Exit When on, this feature will keep the
Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to Lighting is highlighted. Turn the driver door from locking when the
select the language. Press MENU/ MENU/TUNE knob to select Off, door is open. If off is selected, the
TUNE to confirm and go back to the 30 Seconds, 1 Minute, or 2 Minutes. Unlock Door Anti Lock Out menu
last menu. Press MENU/TUNE to confirm and will be available and the door will
go back to the last menu. lock as programmed through
Exterior Lighting this menu.
Power Door Locks
Select the Lighting menu and the Press MENU/TUNE when Unlock
following will be displayed: Select Power Door Locks and the Door Anti Lock Out is highlighted.
following will be displayed: Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to
. Exterior Vehicle Locator Lights
. Auto Door Unlock select On or Off. Press MENU/
. Exit Lighting TUNE to confirm and go back to the
. Unlock Door Anti Lock Out
Exterior Vehicle Locator Lights last menu.
. Delayed Door Lock
This allows selection of whether the Delayed Door Lock
exterior lamps will turn on when Auto Door Unlock
When on, this feature will delay the
unlocking the vehicle. This allows selection of which of the locking of the doors until
Press MENU/TUNE when Exterior doors will automatically unlock when five seconds after the last door is
Vehicle Locator Lights is the vehicle is shifted into P (Park) or closed. Three chimes will signal that
highlighted. Turn the MENU/TUNE the key is removed. delayed locking is in use. Pressing
knob to select On or Off. Press Press MENU/TUNE when Auto either Q or K on the RKE
MENU/TUNE to confirm and go Door Unlock is highlighted. Turn the transmitter twice will override the
back to the last menu. MENU/TUNE knob to select All delayed locking feature and
Doors, Driver Door, or Off. Press immediately lock all of the doors.
MENU/TUNE to confirm and go
back to the last menu.
Press MENU/TUNE when Delayed Remote Lock Feedback doors will unlock at the first press of
Door Lock is highlighted. Turn the This allows selection of what type of K. Press MENU/TUNE to confirm
MENU/TUNE knob to select On or feedback is given when locking the and go back to the last menu.
Off. Press MENU/TUNE to confirm vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
and go back to the last menu. Return to Factory Settings
Press MENU/TUNE when Remote Select Return to Factory Settings to
Remote Lock, Unlock, Start Lock Feedback is highlighted. Turn return all of the vehicle
Select Remote Lock, Unlock, Start the MENU/TUNE knob to select personalization to the default
and the following will be displayed: Lights and Horn, Lights Only, Horn settings. Turn the MENU/TUNE
Only, or Off. Press MENU/TUNE to knob to select Yes or No. Press
. Remote Unlock Feedback confirm and go back to the MENU/TUNE to confirm and go
. Remote Lock Feedback last menu. back to the last menu.
. Remote Door Unlock Remote Door Unlock Personalization Menu (Radio
Remote Unlock Feedback This allows selection of which doors With Touchscreen)
When on, the exterior lamps will will unlock when pressing K on the Settings can be made with the
flash when unlocking the vehicle RKE transmitter. ignition ON and the vehicle not
with the RKE transmitter. Press MENU/TUNE when Remote moving.
Press MENU/TUNE when Remote Door Unlock is highlighted. Turn the The following are all possible
Unlock Feedback is highlighted. MENU/TUNE knob to select All personalization features. Depending
Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to Doors or Driver Door Only. When on the vehicle, some may not be
select On or Off. Press MENU/ set to Driver Door Only, the driver available.
TUNE to confirm and go back to the door will unlock the first time K is D (Home): Press to access the
last menu. pressed and all doors will unlock Home Page Menu.
when K is pressed a second time.
When set to All Doors, all of the
Q or R : Press to scroll through the
menus or setup items.
4: Press to exit, or return to the Settings menus and functions may Auto Volume
previous screen or menu. vary depending on vehicle option. This feature adjusts the radio
To access the menu: Time & Date Settings volume to compensate for road and
wind noise as the vehicle speeds up
1. Press D. Select to change the settings: or slows down, so that the volume
2. Press Settings.
. Set Time Format: Select 12h level is consistent.
or 24h.
The following list of menu items may Press S or T to select Off, Low,
be available: . Set Date Format: Press S or T Medium, or High. Press 4.
. Time & Date Settings to select the date display.
Radio Tune Bar
. Radio Settings
. Set Time & Date: Select, then
Select to display the radio station
press y or z to adjust the
. Connection Settings tune bar.
value.
. Vehicle Settings . Automatic Clock Sync: Select to Select On or Off. Press 4.
. Language display the real or user time on Radio Text
. Text Scroll the radio. Select On or Off.
Select to display the radio broadcast
. Touch Beep Sound Radio Settings information.
. Max Startup Volume Select and the following may be Select On or Off. Press 4.
displayed:
. System Version XM Categories
. Auto Volume
. DivX VOD Select to set the selection of XM
. Radio Tune Bar
Press the menu item to select it. categories. Press 4.
Each of the menus is detailed in the . Radio Text
following information. . XM Categories
. Radio Factory Settings
Radio Factory Settings Ringtone Volume Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear

Select to restore the radio to the Select to set the ringtone volume. Select to set this feature on or off.
factory settings. Press 4. Press S or T. Press 4.
When on, and the front wipers are
on, the rear window wiper will turn
Connection Settings Vehicle Settings on automatically when the vehicle is
Select and the following may be shifted into R (Reverse).
Select and the following may be
displayed: displayed: Select On or Off. Press 4.
. Bluetooth Settings . Comfort and Convenience Lighting
. Change Ringtone . Lighting Select and the following may be
. Ringtone Volume . Power Door Locks displayed:
Bluetooth Settings . Lock, Unlock Settings
. Exit Lighting
Select this feature to: . Vehicle Factory Settings
. Vehicle Locator Lights
. Connect, disconnect, or delete a Exit Lighting
device
Comfort and Convenience
Select the and the following may be Select to set how long the exterior
. Change or set a Personal lamps stay on when leaving the
displayed:
Identification Number (PIN) vehicle and it is dark outside.
. Chime Volume
. Turn on or off the Bluetooth Press S or T to select Off, 30 Sec,
connection . Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear
60 Sec, or 120 Sec. Press 4.
. Check the device information Chime Volume
Change Ringtone Select to set the chime volume
level.
Select to set different ringtones.
Press 4. Select Normal or High. Press 4.
Vehicle Locator Lights Delayed Door Lock menu will be Remote Unlock Light Feedback
This allows selection of how long available and the door will lock as When on, the exterior lamps will
the exterior lamps stay on when programmed through this menu. flash when unlocking the vehicle
leaving the vehicle and it is dark Select On or Off. Press 4. with the RKE transmitter.
outside. Select Flash Lights or Lights Off.
Delayed Door Lock
Select On or Off. Press 4. Press 4.
When on, this feature will delay the
Power Door Locks locking of the doors until Remote Lock Light & Horn
five seconds after the last door is Feedback
closed. Three chimes will signal that Select to set what type of feedback
displayed:
delayed locking is in use. Pressing
. Auto Door Unlock is given when pressing Q on the
either Q or K on the RKE
RKE transmitter.
. Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out transmitter twice will override the
. Delayed Door Lock
delayed locking feature and Press S or T to select Lights Only,
immediately lock all of the doors. Lights & Horn, Horn Only, or Off.
Auto Door Unlock Press 4.
Select On or Off. Press 4.
Select to set which of the doors will
Lock, Unlock Settings Remote Door Unlock
automatically unlock when the
vehicle is shifted into P (Park). Select and the following may be Select to set which doors will unlock
displayed: when pressing K on the RKE
Press S or T to select All Doors,
transmitter.
Driver Door, or Off. Press 4. . Remote Unlock Light Feedback
Select All Doors or Driver Door.
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
. Remote Lock Light & Horn
When set to Driver Door Only, the
Feedback
When on, this feature will keep the driver door will unlock the first time
driver door from locking when the
. Remote Door Unlock K is pressed and all doors will
door is open. If Off is selected, the unlock when the button is pressed a
second time. When set to All Doors, Select On or Off. Press 4. DivX video. See divx.com for
all of the doors will unlock at the first more information and software
press of K. Press 4. Touch Beep Volume tools on how to convert files into
When on, a beep will be heard DivX videos.
Vehicle Factory Settings when pressing the screen. When . DIVX VIDEO-ON DEMAND: This
Select to return all of the vehicle off, the beep is canceled. DivX Certified device must be
personalization to the default registered in order to play
settings. Select Yes or No. Select On or Off. Press 4. purchased DivX
Press 4. Max Startup Volume Video-on-Demand (VOD)
movies. To obtain a registration
Language This allows the startup volume of code, locate the DivX VOD
the infotainment system to be set. section in the device setup
displayed: Press S or T to select the desired menu. See vod.divx.com for
more information on how to
. English volume between 9-21. Press 4. complete the registration.
. French System Version Press 4.
. Spanish Press to view the version of the
Select the language desired. infotainment system. Press 4.
Press 4.
DivX VOD
Text Scroll Press DivX VOD.
When on, if there is long text . DIVX VIDEO: DivX is a digital
displayed on the audio screen, the video format created by DivX,
text is scrolled. When off, the text is LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi
scrolled once and displayed in Corporation. This is an official
truncated form. DivX Certified device that plays
Lighting 6-1
. Taillamps
Lighting Exterior Lighting . License Plate Lamps
Exterior Lamp Controls . Instrument Panel Lights
Exterior Lighting . Sidemarker Lamps
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Headlamp High/Low-Beam ; (Parking Lamps): Turns the
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 parking lamps on together with the
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 following:
Daytime Running . Taillamps
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Automatic Headlamp . License Plate Lamps
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 . Instrument Panel Lights
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3
Turn and Lane-Change
. Sidemarker Lamps
The exterior lamp control is on the
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
instrument panel to the outboard 5 (Headlamps): Turns the
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 headlamps on together with the
side of the steering column.
Interior Lighting lamps listed below. A warning chime
There are four positions: sounds if the driver door is opened
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 O (Off): Briefly turn to this position when the ignition switch is off and
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 to turn the automatic light control off the headlamps are on.
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 or on again. . Parking Lamps
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 AUTO (Automatic): Turns the . Taillamps
Lighting Features headlamps on automatically at
normal brightness, together with the
. License Plate Lamps
Battery Load Management . . . . 6-6
following: . Instrument Panel Lights
Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-6
. Parking Lamps . Sidemarker Lamps
6-2 Lighting
# (Front Fog Lamps): For

vehicles with fog lamps, press to
turn the lamps on or off.
See Fog Lamps on page 64.
When the lights are on, ; will be
lit. See Lamps On Reminder on This indicator light turns on in the This indicator light turns on in the
page 521. instrument cluster when the instrument cluster when the DRL
high-beam headlamps are on. are on.
Headlamp High/ A light sensor on top of the
Low-Beam Changer Flash-to-Pass instrument panel makes the DRL
To flash the high beams, pull the work, so be sure it is not covered.
turn signal lever all the way toward The DRL system makes the
you. Then release it. low-beam headlamps come on at a
reduced brightness when the
Daytime Running following conditions are met:
Lamps (DRL) . The ignition is in the ON/
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can RUN mode.
3 (Headlamp High/Low-Beam make it easier for others to see the . The exterior lamp control is
Changer): Push the turn signal front of your vehicle during the day. in AUTO.
lever away from you to turn the high Fully functional daytime running . The engine is running.
beams on. lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada. When the DRL are on, only the
Push the lever again or pull the low-beam headlamps, at a reduced
lever toward you to return to low level of brightness, will be on. The
beams.
Lighting 6-3
taillamps, sidemarker, instrument not operating, these lamps turn off.

panel, and other lamps will not Move the exterior lamp control to P
be on.
or ; to disable this feature.
The headlamps automatically
change from DRL to the regular Hazard Warning Flashers
headlamps depending on the
darkness of the surroundings. The
other lamps that come on with the
headlamps will also come on.
The vehicle has a light sensor on
When it is bright enough outside, top of the instrument panel. Make
the headlamps go off and the DRL sure it is not covered, or the
come on. headlamps will be on when they are
To turn the DRL lamps off or on not needed.
again, turn the exterior lamp control The system may also turn on the
to O and then release. For vehicles headlamps when driving through a
first sold in Canada, the DRL lamps parking garage or tunnel.
cannot be turned off.
Lights On with Wipers
Automatic Headlamp If the windshield wipers are | (Hazard Warning Flasher):
System activated in daylight with the engine Press and momentarily hold this
on, and the exterior lamp control is
When it is dark enough outside and button to make the front and rear
in AUTO, the headlamps, parking
the exterior lamp control is in the turn signal lamps flash on and off.
lamps, and other exterior lamps This warns others that you are
automatic position, the headlamps come on. The transition time for the
come on automatically. See Exterior having trouble. Press and
lamps coming on varies based on
Lamp Controls on page 61. momentarily hold again to turn the
wiper speed. When the wipers are flashers off.
6-4 Lighting
Turn and Lane-Change may be burned out. Replace any For vehicles with front fog lamps,
burned out bulbs. If a bulb is not the button is on the outboard side of
Signals burned out, check the fuse. See the instrument panel.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers on The ignition must be on to turn on
page 1032 or Bulb Replacement on the fog lamps.
page 1027.
# (Fog Lamps): Press to turn the
Turn Signal On Chime fog lamps on or off. An indicator
If the turn signal is left on for more light on the instrument cluster
than 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chime will comes on when the fog lamps
sound at each flash of the turn are on.
signal. To turn the chime off, move The fog lamps come on together
the turn signal lever to the neutral with the parking lamps.
Move the lever all the way up or position.
down to signal a turn. If the high-beam headlamps are
Fog Lamps turned on, the fog lamps will turn off.
An arrow on the instrument cluster
If the high-beam headlamps are
will flash in the direction of the turn
turned off, the fog lamps will turn
or lane change.
back on again.
Raise or lower the lever until the
Some localities have laws that
arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
require the headlamps to be on
change. The turn signal flashes along with the fog lamps.
three times.
The lever returns to its neutral
position when it is released.
If after signaling a turn or lane
change the arrow flashes rapidly or
does not come on, a signal bulb
Lighting 6-5
Interior Lighting Courtesy Lamps H (Door): When the button is

returned to the middle position, the
The courtesy lamps come on
Instrument Panel lamps turn on automatically when a
automatically when any door is
door is opened.
Illumination Control opened and the dome lamp is in the
door position. R (On): Press to turn on the dome
lamps.
Dome Lamps
Reading Lamps
This feature controls the brightness

of the instrument panel controls and
infotainment display screen. The
thumbwheel is to the left of the
steering column on the instrument For vehicles with front reading
panel. lamps, they are in the overhead
console.
D (Instrument Panel The dome lamp controls are in the
Brightness): Move the headliner above the rear seats. # or $ (Reading Lamps): Press
thumbwheel up or down and hold, to to turn each lamp on or off.
9 (Dome Lamp Override): Press
brighten or dim the instrument panel to turn the lamps off, even when a
controls and infotainment display door is open.
screen.
6-6 Lighting
Lighting Features This is because the generator highest levels of corrective action,
(alternator) may not be spinning fast this action may be noticeable to the
enough at idle to produce all the driver.
Battery Load power needed for very high
Management electrical loads. Battery Power Protection
The vehicle has Electric Power A high electrical load occurs when The battery saver feature is
Management (EPM) that estimates several of the following are on, such designed to protect the vehicle's
the battery's temperature and state as: headlamps, high beams, fog battery.
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage lamps, rear window defogger,
for best performance and extended climate control fan at high speed, If some interior lamps are left on
life of the battery. heated seats, engine cooling fans, and the ignition is turned off, the
trailer loads, and loads plugged into battery rundown protection system
When the battery's state of charge automatically turns the lamp off after
accessory power outlets.
is low, the voltage is raised slightly some time.
to quickly bring the charge back up. EPM works to prevent excessive
When the state of charge is high, discharge of the battery. It does this
the voltage is lowered slightly to by balancing the generator's output
prevent overcharging. If the vehicle and the vehicle's electrical needs.
has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage It can increase engine idle speed to
display on the Driver Information generate more power, whenever
Center (DIC), you may see the needed. It can temporarily reduce
voltage move up or down. This is the power demands of some
normal. If there is a problem, an accessories.
alert will be displayed. Normally, these actions occur in
The battery can be discharged at steps or levels, without being
idle if the electrical loads are very noticeable. In rare cases at the
high. This is true for all vehicles.
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Phone
Bluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-26
Introduction
System Bluetooth (Infotainment
Controls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28 Infotainment
Bluetooth (Voice Determine which radio the vehicle
Introduction Recognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37 has and read the following pages to
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Hands-Free Phone . . . . . . . . . . 7-42 become familiar with its features.
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2 Downloadable Applications
Overview (AM-FM Radio) . . . . .
Overview (Radio with
7-3 Smartphone Link { WARNING
(Overview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
CD/USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Smartphone Link Taking your eyes off the road for
Overview (Radio with (Pandora) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47 extended periods could cause a
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Smartphone Link crash resulting in injury or death
Home Page (Radio with (Stitcher) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48 to you or others. Do not give
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 extended attention to infotainment
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Bluetooth Phone/Devices tasks while driving.
Pictures and Movies (Audio
Radio System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Pictures and Movies (Picture This system provides access to
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55 many audio and non-audio listings.
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 Pictures and Movies (Movie
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-18 To minimize taking your eyes off the
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56 road while driving, do the following
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
while the vehicle is parked:
Trademarks and License
Audio Players . Become familiar with the
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Agreements
Trademarks and License operation and controls of the
USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 audio system.
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24 Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Bluetooth Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
7-2 Infotainment System

. Set up the tone, speaker
adjustments, and preset radio
Theft-Deterrent Feature
stations. The theft-deterrent feature works by
learning a portion of the Vehicle
See Defensive Driving on page 92.
Identification Number (VIN) to the
Notice: Contact your dealer infotainment system. The
before adding any equipment. infotainment system does not
Adding audio or communication operate if it is stolen or moved to a
equipment could interfere with different vehicle.
the operation of the engine, radio,
or other systems, and could
damage them. Follow federal
rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
Customer Assistance
Assistance is available to help with
Bluetooth pairing, application
downloading and installation, other
mobile device interface, and
operation support of the
infotainment system. Specialists are
available when calling this
Customer Assistance number: U.S.
(855) 4 SUPPORT (478-7767).
Overview (AM-FM Radio) 1. FAV 1-2-3 (Favorites)

. Radio: Opens the
favorites list.
2. O /VOL (Power/Volume)
. Turns the system on or off
and adjusts the volume.
3. Buttons 16
. Radio: Saves and selects
favorite stations.
4. SEEK
. Radio: Seeks the next
station.
. CD: Selects the next track
or fast forwards within a
track.
5. SEEK
. Radio: Seeks the previous
station.
. CD: Selects the previous
track or rewinds within a
track.
6. MENU/TUNE 12. TONE

. Radio: Manually selects . Opens the Tone menu.
radio stations. 13. INFO (Information)
. CD: Selects tracks. . Radio: Shows available
7. RADIO/BAND information about the
. Changes the band while current station.
listening to the radio. . CD: Shows available
. Selects the radio when information about the
listening to a different audio current track.
source. 14. CONFIG (Configuration)
8. / BACK . Opens the
Configuration menu.
. Menu: Moves one
level back. 15. AUX Port
. Character Input: Deletes
. 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
the last character. connection for external
devices.
9. AUX
. Selects external audio
source.
10. H (Clock Menu)
. Opens the Clock menu.
11. 5 / > (Phone Mute)
. Mutes the audio system.
Overview (Radio with CD/USB) 1. O /VOL (Power/Volume)

. Turns the system on or off
and adjusts the volume.
2. Z (Eject)
. Removes a disc from the
CD slot.
3. Buttons 16
. Radio: Saves and selects
favorite stations.
4. AUX Port
. 3.5 mm (1/8 in) connection
for external devices.
5. MENU/TUNE
. Radio: Manually selects
radio stations.
. CD: Selects tracks.
6. FAV 1-2-3 (Favorites)
. Radio: Opens the
favorites list.
7. INFO (Information) 12. RADIO/BAND

. Radio: Shows available . Changes the band while
information about the listening to the radio.
current station. . Selects the radio when
. CD: Shows available listening to a different
information about the audio source.
current track.
13. H (Clock Menu)
8. CD Slot
. Opens the Clock menu.
9. SEEK 14. TONE
. Radio: Seeks the next . Opens the Tone menu.
station.
15. CONFIG (Configuration)
. CD: Selects the next track
or fast forwards within a . Opens the
track. Configuration menu.
10. SEEK 16. / BACK
. Radio: Seeks the previous . Menu: Moves one
station. level back.
. CD: Selects the previous . Character Input: Deletes
track or rewinds within a the last character.
track.
17. 5 / > (Phone/Mute)
11. CD/AUX . Opens the Phone menu.
. Selects the CD player or
an external audio source.
. Mutes the audio system.
Overview (Radio with Touchscreen) Home Page (Radio with

Touchscreen)
Touchscreen Buttons
Touchscreen buttons show on the
screen when available. When a
function is unavailable, the button
may gray out. When a function is
selected, the button may highlight.
Home Page Features
1. z VOL y (Volume) 3. D (Home Page)

. Press to decrease or . Press to go to the Home PressF to go to the Home Page.
increase the volume. Page. See Home Page e audio: Press to select AM, FM,
(Radio with Touchscreen) SiriusXM (if equipped), USB/iPod/
2. O (Power) on page 77. Bluetooth Audio, or AUX.
. Press and hold to turn the G picture & movie: Press to view
power on or off. a picture, movie, or auxiliary video.
7 telephone: Press to activate Turning the System On or Off Menu System

the phone features (if equipped). O /VOL (Power/Volume): Press to Controls
See Bluetooth (Voice Recognition) turn the system on and off.
on page 737 or Bluetooth The MENU/TUNE knob, MENU/
(Overview) on page 726 or Automatic Switch-Off TUNE button, and / BACK button
Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls) on If the infotainment system is on after are used to navigate the menu
page 728. the ignition is turned off, the system system.
^ smartphone link: Press to listen will turn off automatically after MENU/TUNE Knob:
to Pandora or Stitcher. See 10 minutes.
Smartphone Link (Overview) on Turn to:
page 745 or Smartphone Link
Volume Control . Enter the menu system.
(Pandora) on page 747 or O /VOL (Power/Volume): Turn to . Highlight a menu option.
Smartphone Link (Stitcher) on adjust the volume.
page 748. . Select a value.
5 / > (Phone/Mute): For vehicles
8 settings: Press to access the with OnStar, press and hold 5 / > MENU/TUNE Button:
Personalization menu. See Vehicle to mute the infotainment system. Press to:
Personalization on page 526.
Press and hold 5 / > again, or turn . Select or activate the highlighted
Operation the O /VOL knob to cancel mute. menu option.
For vehicles without OnStar, press . Confirm a set value.
Radio Controls Without 5 / > to mute the infotainment
Touchscreen
. Turn a system setting on or off.
system. Press 5 / > again, or turn
The infotainment system is operated / BACK:
the O /VOL knob to cancel mute.
by using the pushbuttons, Press to:
multifunction knobs, menus shown . Exit a menu.
on the display, and steering wheel
controls, if equipped.

. Return from a submenu screen An arrow on the right-hand edge of 2. Press the MENU/TUNE button to
to the previous menu screen. the menu indicates that it has a select the character.
. Delete the last character in a submenu with other options.
Audio Settings
sequence. Activating a Setting
The audio settings can be set for
Selecting a Menu Option each radio band and each audio
player source.
To quickly reset an audio setting
value to 0:
1. Press the TONE button.
2. Select the audio setting.
1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to
1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to highlight the setting. 3. Press and hold the MENU/TUNE
move the highlighted bar. button until the value changes
2. Press the MENU/TUNE button to
to 0.
2. Press the MENU/TUNE button to activate the setting.
select the highlighted option. Press the / BACK button to go
Entering a Character Sequence
back to the Tone Settings menu.
Submenus
Adjusting the Treble, Midrange,
and Bass

highlight the setting.
1. Press the TONE button. Press the / BACK button to go Auto Volume
2. Select Treble, Midrange, back to the Tone Settings menu. The auto volume feature
or Bass. automatically adjusts the radio
System Settings volume to compensate for road and
select the value between Configuring the Number of wind noise as the vehicle speeds up
-12 and +12. Favorite Pages or slows down, so that the volume
level is consistent.
Press the / BACK button to go The level of volume compensation
back to the Tone Settings menu. can be selected, or the auto volume
Adjusting the Fader and Balance feature can be turned off.
1. Press the TONE button. 1. Press the MENU/TUNE button.
2. Select Fader or Balance. 2. Select Radio Settings.
To configure the number of available 3. Select Auto volume control.
favorite pages:
select the value between 4. Select the setting.
-15 and +15. 1. Press the MENU/TUNE button.
5. Press the / BACK button to go
Press the / BACK button to go 2. Select FM menu.
back to the System
back to the Tone Settings menu. 3. Select Favorites list. Configuration menu.
Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer) 4. Select the number of available Radio Controls With
favorite pages. Touchscreen
For vehicles with an equalizer:
1. Press the TONE button. 5. Press the / BACK button to go The infotainment system is operated
back to the System by using the pushbuttons, menus
2. Select EQ. Configuration menu. shown on the display, and steering
3. Select the setting for Pop, Rock, wheel controls.
Classical, Talk, or Country.

. Reset: Restore the settings back
Turning the System On or Off 1. Press D. to default settings.
O (Power): Press and hold to turn 2. Select Settings.
the radio on and off. Press OK to exit Tone Settings.
3. Select Radio Settings.
Automatic Switch-Off
4. Select the setting by pressing S
If the infotainment system has been
turned on after the ignition is turned or T.
off, the system will turn off 5. Press the 4.
automatically after 10 minutes.
Audio Settings
Volume Control
The audio settings can be set for
z VOL y (Volume): Press to
each radio band and each audio
increase or decrease the volume or
player source.
press the volume bar.
Tone Settings: Press menu, then
> (Mute): Press z VOL y, then tone settings from the AM or
press > to mute and unmute the FM menu.
system.
. EQ (Equalizer): Press S or T to
System Settings select a sound style or turn off
Auto Volume the sound style.
This feature automatically adjusts
. Bass, Mid (Midrange), or Treble:
the radio volume to compensate for Press or + to change the
road and wind noise. desired sound style from 12
to +12.
The level of volume compensation
can be selected, or the feature can
. Fader or Balance: Adjust the
be turned off. front/rear or left/right speakers.
Radio FAV 1-2-3: Press to open the Selecting a Band

favorites list and select the
Press the RADIO/BAND button to
favorites page.
AM-FM Radio choose AM, FM, or SiriusXM,
16: Press to select preset if equipped. The last station that
Radio Controls Without stations. was playing starts playing again.
Touchscreen
RDS (Radio Data System) Selecting a Station
The buttons used to control the
radio are: The radio may have RDS. The RDS Seek Tuning
feature is available for use only on
P /VOL: Press to turn the radio on FM stations that broadcast RDS If the radio station is not known:
and off. information. This feature only works Briefly press SEEK or SEEK to
RADIO/BAND: Press to choose when the information from the radio automatically search for the next
between AM, FM, and SiriusXM, station is available. In rare cases, a available station. If a station is not
if equipped. radio station could broadcast found, the radio switches to a more
incorrect information that causes the sensitive search level. If a station
MENU/TUNE Knob: Turn to radio features to work improperly.
navigate the available menus. Turn still is not found, the frequency that
If this happens, contact the radio was last active begins to play.
to search for stations. station.
INFO: Press to display additional If the radio station is known:
While the radio is tuned to an
information that may be available for FM-RDS station, the station name Press and hold SEEK or SEEK
the current song. or call letters display. until the station on the display is
SEEK : Press to search for the Radio Menus
reached, then release the button.
next station. Favorites List
Radio menus are available for AM
SEEK: Press to search for the and FM. 1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob.
previous station.
Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to open 2. Select Favorites List.
the main radio menu for that band. 3. Select the station.
Station Lists 3. Select the programming type. Storing a Station as a Favorite

1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob. A list of stations that transmit
Stations from all bands can be
programming of the selected
2. Select AM or FM Station List. All stored in any order in the favorite
type displays.
receivable stations in the current pages.
reception area are displayed. If a 4. Select the station.
Up to six stations can be stored in
station list has not been created, The category lists are updated each favorite page and the number
an automatic station search when the station lists are of available favorite pages can
is done. updated. be set.
3. The first station in the list Updating Station and Category Storing Stations
will play. Lists
To store the station to a position in
Category Lists If stations stored in the station list the list, press the corresponding
Most stations that broadcast an can no longer be received: button 1 to 6 until a beep is heard.
RDS program type code specify the 1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob. Retrieving Stations
type of programming transmitted. 2. Select Update AM or FM Station
Some stations change the program Press the FAV 1-2-3 button to open
List, if the stations stored in the a favorite page or to switch to
type code depending on the station list are no longer
content. The system stores the RDS another favorite page. Briefly press
received. A station search will be one of the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve
stations sorted by program type in completed and the first station in
the FM category list. the station.
the updated list will play.
To search for a programming type Radio Controls With
To cancel the station search, press
determined by station: the MENU/TUNE button. Touchscreen
1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob. Audio Source Menu
2. Select FM category list. A list of z VOL y (Volume): Press to
all available programming types increase or decrease the volume.
displays.
O (Power): Press and hold to turn Selecting an Auxiliary Device Hold and drag to the left or right of
the system on and off. the radio station to automatically
search for available radio stations.
D (Home Page): Press to enter
the Home Page. Manual Tuning
RDS (Radio Data System) Continue pressing q TUNE r to
manually change the radio station.
The radio may have RDS. The RDS
feature is available for use only on Favorite List
FM stations that broadcast RDS
information. This feature only works
when the information from the radio
station is available. In rare cases, a Connect the auxiliary device to the
radio station could broadcast AUX input terminal. Play will begin
incorrect information that causes the when the system has finished
radio features to work improperly. reading the information on the
If this happens, contact the radio device.
station. If the storage device is already
While the radio is tuned to an connected, press D, audio, Source
. From the AM or FM menu, press
FM-RDS station, the station name R, select AUX from the drop
or call letters display. down menu. favorite list on the screen.
Selecting a Band Selecting a Station . Press Q or R to scroll through

the list. Press on the station to
Press D, audio, then Source R to Seek Tuning select it.
choose AM, FM, or SiriusXM, If the radio station is not known:
if equipped. The last station that
was playing starts playing again. Press g SEEK l to automatically
search for available radio stations.
Station List Update Station List Storing Stations

To store the station to a position in
the list, press the corresponding
button 15 until a beep is heard.
1. Select the desired station.
2. Press S or T to select the
desired page of saved favorites.
. From the AM or FM menu, press . From the AM or FM menu, press

AM or FM station list on the update AM or FM station list on
screen. the screen. The broadcasting list
updating will begin.
. Press Q or R to scroll through
the list. Press on the station to
. During the AM or FM
select it. broadcasting list update, press
Cancel to stop the updates.
Category List
Storing a Station as a Favorite 3. Hold down any of the preset
. From the FM menu, press FM buttons to save the current radio
category list on the screen. Stations from all bands can be station to that button of the
stored in any order in the favorite selected favorites page.
. Press Q or R to scroll through pages.
the list. Press on the station to To change a preset button, tune to
Up to five stations can be stored in the new desired radio station and
select it.
each of the seven favorites pages. hold the button.
Satellite Radio MENU/TUNE: Turn to go to the 2. Press and release the FAV 1-2-3
next XM channel. button to display the page where
SiriusXM Satelite Radio the channel is to be stored.
Service Storing an SiriusXM Channel
3. Press and hold one of the six
SiriusXM is a satellite radio service Drivers are encouraged to set up numbered pushbuttons until a
based in the 48 contiguous United XM channel favorites while the beep sounds. When the
States and 10 Canadian provinces. vehicle is not moving. Tune to pushbutton is pressed and
SiriusXM Satellite Radio has a wide favorite stations using the released, the channel that was
variety of programming and pushbuttons, favorites button, and set will return.
commercial-free music, coast to steering wheel controls. See
Defensive Driving on page 92. 4. Repeat Steps 13 for each XM
coast, and in digital-quality sound. channel to be stored as a
A service fee is required to receive A maximum of 36 stations can be favorite.
the SiriusXM service. For more programmed as favorites using the
information, contact SiriusXM at six pushbuttons positioned below To set up the number of favorites
www.siriusxm.com or the radio station frequency labels pages:
1-866-635-2349 (U.S.), and and by using the radio favorites 1. Press and hold FAV 1-2-3 until
www.xmradio.ca or 1-877-209-0079 page button (FAV 1-2-3 button). the radio setup menu displays.
(Canada). Press the FAV 1-2-3 button to go
through up to six pages of favorites, 2. Select the desired number of
Finding a Channel each having six favorite stations favorites pages by pressing the
available per page. Each page of pushbutton located below the
RADIO/BAND: Press to choose
favorites can contain any displayed page numbers.
XM. The display will show the
selection. combination of AM, FM, or XM 3. Press FAV 1-2-3 to return to the
channels. To store an XM channel original main radio screen
SEEK : Press to seek the next as a favorite: showing the radio frequency
XM channel. tabs and to begin the process of
1. Tune in the desired channel.
SEEK: Press to seek the
previous XM channel.
programming favorites for the station. If this station was one of the AM
chosen number of numbered presets, choose another station for
The range for most AM stations is
pages. that preset button.
greater than for FM, especially at
SiriusXM Radio Messages RADIO ID: If tuned to channel 0, night. The longer range can cause
this message alternates with the station frequencies to interfere with
UPDATING: The encryption code SiriusXM Radio eight-digit radio ID each other. For better radio
in the receiver is being updated, and label. This label is needed to reception, most AM radio stations
no action is required. This process activate the service. boost the power levels during the
should take no longer than day, and then reduce these levels
30 seconds. CHECK XM TUNER: If this
message does not clear within a during the night. Static can also
NO SIGNAL: The system is short period of time, the receiver occur when things like storms and
functioning correctly, but the vehicle could have a fault. Consult with your power lines interfere with radio
is in a location that is blocking the dealer. reception. When this happens, try
SiriusXM signal. When the vehicle is reducing the treble on the radio.
moved into an open area, the signal
should return.
Radio Reception FM Stereo
LOADING: The audio system is Frequency interference and static FM signals only reach about 16 to
can occur during normal radio 65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although the
acquiring and processing audio and
reception if items such as cell phone radio has a built-in electronic circuit
text data. No action is needed. This
message should disappear shortly. chargers, vehicle convenience that automatically works to reduce
accessories, and external electronic interference, some static can occur,
OFF AIR: This channel is not devices are plugged into the especially around tall buildings or
currently in service. Tune in to accessory power outlet. If there is hills, causing the sound to fade in
another channel. interference or static, unplug the and out.
CH UNAVAILABLE: This item from the accessory power
previously assigned channel is no outlet.
longer assigned. Tune to another
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Satellite Radio Antenna Audio Players

Service
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service located on the roof of the vehicle. CD Player
gives digital radio reception from Keep the antenna clear of The CD player can play audio CDs
coast to coast in the 48 contiguous obstructions for clear radio and MP3 CDs.
United States, and in Canada. Just reception.
as with FM, tall buildings or hills can The CD player will not play
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the 8 cm (3 in) CDs.
interfere with satellite radio signals,
performance of the XM system (if
causing the sound to fade in and
equipped) may be affected if the Care of CDs
out. In addition, traveling or standing
sunroof is open. Sound quality can be reduced due
under heavy foliage, bridges,
garages, or tunnels may cause loss to disc quality, recording method,
of the SiriusXM signal for a period Multi-Band Antenna quality of the music recorded, and
of time. The multi-band antenna is on the how the disc has been handled.
roof of the vehicle. The antenna is Handle discs carefully and store
Cellular Phone Usage them in their original cases or other
used for the AM-FM radio, OnStar,
Cellular phone usage may cause the SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service protective cases away from direct
interference with the vehicle's radio. System, and GPS (Global sunlight and dust. If the bottom
This interference may occur when Positioning System), if the vehicle surface of a disc is damaged, the
making or receiving phone calls, has these features. Keep the disc may not play properly or at all.
charging the phone's battery, antenna clear of obstructions for Do not touch the bottom surface of
or simply having the phone on. This clear reception. a disc while handling it; this could
interference causes an increased damage the surface. Pick up discs
level of static while listening to the by grasping the outer edges or the
radio. If static is received while edge of the hole and the outer edge.
listening to the radio, unplug the If the bottom surface of a disc is
cellular phone and turn it off. dirty, take a soft, lint-free cloth,
or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a
mild neutral detergent solution Control Buttons If the disc is not removed after it is
mixed with water, and clean it. Wipe ejected, it is pulled back in after a
The buttons used to control the CD
the disc from the center to the few seconds.
player are:
outer edge.
AUX or CD/AUX: Press to use the Playing a CD or MP3 CD
Care of the CD Player CD player. Press the AUX or CD/AUX button.
Do not add a label to a disc, as it If there is a disc in the player, it
could get caught in the CD player. SEEK or SEEK: Press to
begins playing.
If a label is needed, label the top of select tracks or to fast forward or
rewind within a track. Information about the disc and
the recorded disc with a
current track is shown on the
marking pen. INFO: Press to display additional display depending on the data
Do not use disc lens cleaners information about the current track stored.
because they could contaminate the that may be available.
lens of the disc optics and damage MENU/TUNE: Turn to select tracks. Selecting a CD Track
the CD player. Turn to enter the menu. Press to Using the control buttons:
Notice: If a label is added to a select the menu. . Press SEEK or SEEK to
CD, more than one CD is inserted Z (Eject): Press to eject the disc. select the next or previous track.
into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched Inserting a CD . Turn the MENU/TUNE knob.
or damaged CDs, the CD player With the printed side facing up, Using the CD Menu:
could be damaged. While using insert a disc into the CD slot until it
the CD player, use only CDs in 1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob.
is drawn in.
good condition without any label, 2. Select Tracks List.
load one CD at a time, and keep Removing a CD
3. Select the track.
the CD player and the loading slot
free of foreign materials, liquids,
Press Z.
and debris. The disc is pushed out of the
CD slot.
Playing Tracks in Random Order of information stored on the disc. Overview (Radio with CD/USB) on
Turn the MENU/TUNE knob and set FM automatically plays while the page 77 or Overview (Radio with
Shuffle Songs to On. disc is being read. Touchscreen) on page 77.
Tracks can be searched by: Portable devices are controlled by
Fast Forward and Rewind using the menu system described in
. Playlists
Press and hold SEEK or SEEK Operation on page 78.
to fast forward or rewind within the
. Artists
current track. . Albums
Selecting an MP3 Track . Song Titles
Using the control buttons: . Genres
. Press SEEK or SEEK to
. Folder View
select the next or previous track. To search for tracks:
. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob. 1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob.
Using the CD Menu: 2. Select Search.
1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob. 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
2. Select Playlists/Folders. Song Titles, Genres,
or Folder View. 1. 3.5 mm (1/8 in) Auxiliary Input
3. Select the playlist or folder. Jack. See Auxiliary Devices on
4. Select the track. page 724.
Searching for MP3 Tracks USB Port 2. USB Port.
The search feature may take some The USB Port, if equipped, is in the
time to display the information after storage area to the right of the
reading the disc due to the amount infotainment system. See Overview
(AM-FM Radio) on page 73 or
Radio Without Touchscreen

. Albums Repeat
For vehicles with a USB port, the
. Song Titles Turn the MENU/TUNE knob and set
following devices may be connected . Podcasts Repeat to On or Off, then press the
and controlled by the infotainment / BACK button to return to the main
. Genres screen.
system:
. Audiobooks On: Repeats the current track.
. iPods
.
. Composers Off: Playback starts from the
PlaysForSure Devices (PFDs)
To search for tracks: beginning of the current track after
. USB Drives
the last track finishes.
1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob.
. Zunes
2. Select Search. Connecting and Controlling a
Not all iPods, PFDs, USB Drives, PlaysForSure Device (PFD)
and Zunes are compatible with the 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres,
or Zune
infotainment system.
Audiobooks, or Composers. Connecting a PFD or Zune
Connecting and Controlling
an iPod 4. Select the track. Connect the PFD or Zune to the
USB port.
Not all iPods can be controlled by Shuffle
the infotainment system. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob and set Searching for a Track
Connecting an iPod Shuffle Songs (Random) to On or Tracks can be searched for by:
Off, then press the / BACK button . Playlists
Connect the iPod to the USB port.
to return to the main screen. .
Searching for a Track Artists
On: Plays tracks in the current
Tracks can be searched for by: folder in random order.
. Albums
. Playlists Off: Plays tracks in the current
. Song Titles
folder in sequential order.
. Artists

. Podcasts Repeat Off: Playback starts from Files that do not have any meta
. Genres the beginning of the current track data stored in the ID3 tag display as
after the last track finishes. Unknown.
To search for tracks:
Connecting and Controlling a Tracks can be searched for by:
USB Drive . Playlists*
2. Select Search.
The infotainment system can only . Artists
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, play back .mp3 and .wma files from
Song Titles, Podcasts, . Albums
a USB drive.
or Genres. . Song Titles
Only the first 2,500 songs are
4. Select the track. recognized on the device. . Genres
Shuffle Functionality When a device is not supported, the . Folder View
Turn the MENU/TUNE knob and set message No supported data found. *This only displays if a playlist is
Shuffle Songs (Random) to On You can safely disconnect the found on the device.
or Off. device appears.
To search for tracks:
On: Plays current tracks in random Connecting a USB Drive
order. Connect the USB drive to the
USB port. 2. Select Search.
Off: Plays current tracks in
sequential order. 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Searching for a Track
Song Titles, Genres,
Repeat Functionality It is normal for the search feature to or Folder View.
Turn the MENU/TUNE knob and set take some time to display the
Repeat to On or Off. information after reading the device
due to the amount of information
Repeat On: Repeats the current stored.
track.
Shuffle Functionality USB Support USB Supported File and Folder

Turn the MENU/TUNE knob and set Structure
USB Supported Devices
Shuffle Songs (Random) to On The Infotainment system supports:
or Off.
. USB Flash Drives
. Up to 2,500 folders.
. Portable USB Hard Drives
On: Plays current tracks in random . Up to 10 folders in depth.
order. . 2G-5G iPod nano
. Up to 2,500 music files.
Off: Plays current tracks in . 1G-3G iPod touch
sequential order. . Up to 2,500 photo files.
. 120GB/160GB iPod classic
. Up to 250 movie files.
Repeat Functionality . 3G/3GS/4/4S iPhone
Turn the MENU/TUNE knob and set
. ID3 Tag (versions 1.0/1.1/2.2/
Not all iPods and USB drives are 2.3/2.4).
Repeat to On or Off. compatible with the USB port.
Repeat On: Repeats the current
. FAT16.
Make sure the iPod has the latest
track. firmware from Apple for proper . FAT32.
Repeat Off: Playback starts from operation. iPod firmware can be . exFAT.
the beginning of the current track updated using the latest iTunes
after the last track finishes. application. See www.apple.com/ Connecting a USB Storage
itunes. Device or iPod/iPhone
Radio With Touchscreen
For help with identifying your iPod, To connect a USB storage device,
The infotainment system can play go to www.apple.com/support. connect the device to the USB port.
music or movies by connecting an
auxiliary device to the USB port, The USB port can play both lower To connect an iPod/iPhone, connect
if equipped. and upper case .mp3, .wma, .ogg, one end of the devices cable to the
and .wav files stored on a USB iPod/iPhone and the other end to
storage device. the USB port.
The iPod/iPhone charges while it is (Radio with CD/USB) on page 77 Radio Without Touchscreen
connected to the vehicle if the or Overview (Radio with
Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY Touchscreen) on page 77.
the auxiliary input jack to use a
or ON/RUN position. When the Portable devices are controlled by portable audio player.
vehicle is turned off, the iPod/ using the menu system described in
iPhone automatically powers off and Playback of an audio device that is
Operation on page 78.
will not charge or draw power from connected to the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
the vehicle's battery. jack can only be controlled using
the controls on the device.
For more information on USB
usage, see Audio System in Adjusting the Volume
Pictures and Movies (Audio System)
on page 750 or Pictures and Turn the O /VOL knob to adjust the
Movies (Picture System) on volume of the infotainment system
page 755 or Pictures and Movies after the volume level has been set
(Movie System) on page 756. on the portable audio device.
Radio With Touchscreen
Auxiliary Devices
The infotainment system can play
The optional AUX input allows music or movies connected by the
portable devices to connect to the auxiliary device.
vehicle using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in) 1. 3.5 mm (1/8 in) Auxiliary
input jack. The AUX input jack, Input Jack Play will begin when the system has
if equipped, is in the storage area to 2. USB Port. See USB Port on finished reading the information on
the right of the infotainment system. page 720. the device.
A second AUX input is on the front
of the infotainment system,
if equipped. See Overview (AM-FM
Radio) on page 73 or Overview
Playing Music If the USB storage device is already 2. Press the desired menu.
connected: . tone settings: Adjust the
1. Press D. sound setup. See Tone
Settings under Radio
2. Press picture and movie. Controls with Touchscreen
3. Press Source R. in Operation on page 78.
. clock/temp display: To
4. Press USB (Movie).
display the clock and
For iPod/iPhone, connect the iPod/ temperature on the full
iPhone to the AUX input terminal by screen, select On or Off.
using the AUX cable for iPod/
To play the music from the device, . display settings: Adjust the
iPhone to play movie files.
if the device is already connected: brightness and contrast of
Using the AUX Movie Menu the screen.
1. Press D.
2. Press audio. 3. Press 4.
3. Press Source R. Bluetooth Audio
4. Press AUX/USB. Streaming Audio
To adjust the tone settings, see If equipped, music may be played
Tone Settings under Radio from a paired Bluetooth. See
Controls with Touchscreen in Bluetooth (Voice Recognition) on
Operation on page 78. page 737 or Bluetooth (Overview)
Playing Movies 1. Press MENU from the AUX on page 726 or Bluetooth
movie screen. The AUX menu is (Infotainment Controls) on
Movies are not available while displayed. page 728 for help pairing a device.
driving.
The music can be controlled by All devices launch audio differently. Phone
controls on the device. When selecting Bluetooth audio as
a source, the radio may show as
To play music via Bluetooth:
paused on the screen. Press play Bluetooth (Overview)
1. Power on the device, pair, and on the device to begin playback. For vehicles equipped with
connect the device. The device Bluetooth capability, the system can
will displayed GM Audio Some phones support sending
Bluetooth music information to interact with many cell phones,
Source. allowing:
display on the radio. When the radio
2. Once paired, press CD/AUX to receives this information, it will . Placement and receipt of calls in
select Bluetooth Audio. check to see if any album art is a hands-free mode.
3. Press the play button on the available and display it. For more
information about your phone and
. Sharing of the cell phones
device to begin playback. address book or contact list with
supported Bluetooth features, see
When selecting Bluetooth audio, the www.gm.com/bluetooth. the vehicle.
radio may not be able to launch the To minimize driver distraction,
audio player on the connected before driving, and with the vehicle
device to start playing. When the parked:
vehicle is not moving, choose the
phone to begin playback.
. Become familiar with the
features of the cell phone.
Organize the phone book and
contact lists clearly and delete
duplicate or rarely used entries.
If possible, program speed dial
or other shortcuts.
. Review the controls and
operation of the infotainment
system.

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.
The system may not work with
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system $ / i (Mute/End Call): Press to
can use a Bluetooth-capable cell end a call, reject a call, or cancel an
all cell phones. See Pairing in phone with a Hands-Free Profile to operation.
this section. make and receive phone calls. The
. If the cell phone has voice infotainment system and voice Infotainment System Controls
dialing capability, learn to use recognition are used to control the If equipped, the infotainment system
that feature to access the system. The system can be used allows certain controls to be
address book or contact list. See while in ON/RUN or ACC/ selected on the infotainment display.
Voice Pass-Thru in this ACCESSORY. The range of the
Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m For information about how to
section. navigate the menu system using the
(30 ft). Not all phones support all
. See Storing and Deleting Phone functions and not all phones work infotainment controls, see Operation
Numbers in this section. with the Bluetooth system. See on page 78.
www.gm.com/bluetooth for more 5 / > (Phone): Press to enter the
{ WARNING information about compatible Phone main menu.
phones.
When using a cell phone, it can Voice Recognition
be distracting to look too long or Bluetooth Controls
The voice recognition system uses
too often at the screen of the Use the buttons located on the commands to control the system
phone or the infotainment infotainment system and the and dial phone numbers.
(navigation) system. Taking your steering wheel to operate the
eyes off the road too long or too Noise: The system may not
Bluetooth system.
often could cause a crash recognize voice commands if there
Steering Wheel Controls is too much background noise. Do
resulting in injury or death. Focus
not point the center air vents directly
your attention on driving. b / g (Push to Talk): Press to upward.
answer incoming calls, confirm
system information, and start voice
recognition.
When to Speak: A tone sounds to Communications Commission (FCC) phone and an MP3 player at the
indicate that the system is ready for rules and Industry Canada same time. This requires the
a voice command. Wait for the tone Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. device to be paired two times;
and then speak. once as a hands-free device
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a Bluetooth (Infotainment and once as an MP3 device.
calm and natural voice. Controls) . Up to five cell phones can be
paired to the Bluetooth system.
Audio System For information about how to
navigate the menu system using the . The pairing process is disabled
When using the Bluetooth system, infotainment controls, see Operation when the vehicle is moving.
sound comes through the vehicle's on page 78.
front audio system speakers and
. Pairing only needs to be
overrides the audio system. Use the Pairing Without Touchscreen completed once, unless the
O /VOL knob during a call to pairing information on the cell
A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone phone changes or the cell phone
change the volume level. The
must be paired to the Bluetooth is deleted from the system.
adjusted volume level remains in
system and then connected to the
memory for later calls. The system . Only one paired cell phone can
vehicle before it can be used. See
maintains a minimum volume level. be connected to the Bluetooth
your cell phone manufacturer's user
guide for Bluetooth functions before system at a time.
Other Information
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth . If multiple paired cell phones are
The Bluetooth word mark and phone is not connected, calls will be within range of the system, the
logos are owned by the Bluetooth made using OnStar Hands-Free system connects to the first
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks Calling, if available. See OnStar available paired cell phone in the
by General Motors is under license. Overview on page 141. order that they were first paired
Other trademarks and trade names
to the system. To link to a
are those of their respective owners. Pairing Information
different paired phone, see
See Radio Frequency Statement on . A Bluetooth phone with MP3 Linking to a Different Phone
page 1315 for information capability can be paired later in this section.
regarding Part 15 of the Federal separately to the vehicle as a
Pairing a Phone as a Hands-Free paired and connected to the Linking to a Different Phone
Device vehicle. The system responds To link to a different phone, the new
1. Press the CONFIG button. with <Phone name> has been phone must be in the vehicle and
successfully paired after the available to be connected to the
2. Select Phone Settings or pairing process is complete.
Bluetooth Settings. Bluetooth system before the
7. Repeat Steps 16 to pair process is started.
3. Select Bluetooth. additional phones. 1. Press the CONFIG button.
4. Select Pair Device Listing All Paired and Connected
(Hands-Free). A four-digit 2. Select Phone Settings or
Phones Bluetooth Settings.
Personal Identification Number
(PIN) appears on the display. 1. Press the CONFIG button. 3. Select Bluetooth.
The PIN is used is Step 6. 2. Select Phone Settings or 4. Select Device List.
5. Start the pairing process on the Bluetooth Settings.
5. Select the new phone to link to
cell phone to be paired to the 3. Select Bluetooth. and follow the on-screen
vehicle. See the cell phone prompts.
manufacturer's user guide for 4. Select Device List.
information on this process. Deleting a Paired Phone If delete is selected, the
highlighted phone will be
6. Locate the device named Your 1. Press the CONFIG button. deleted.
Vehicle in the list on the cell
2. Select Phone Settings or
phone. Follow the instructions Making a Call Using
on the cell phone to enter the Bluetooth Settings.
Phone Book
PIN provided in Step 4. After the 3. Select Bluetooth.
PIN is successfully entered, the For cell phones that support the
4. Select Device List. phone book feature, the Bluetooth
system prompts you to provide a
name for the paired cell phone. 5. Select the phone to delete and system can use the contacts stored
This name will be used to follow the on-screen prompts. on your cell phone to make calls.
indicate which phones are
See your cell phone's owner's guide to scroll through the entire list of 3. Select Call to start dialing the
or contact your wireless provider to names/numbers in the number.
find out if this feature is supported phone book.
by your phone. Accepting or Declining a Call
4. Select the name or number you
When a cell phone supports the want to call. When an incoming call is received,
phone book feature, the Phone the infotainment system mutes and
To make a call using the Call a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
Book and Call Lists menus are Lists menu:
automatically available. Accepting a Call
The Phone Book menu allows you 1. Press 5 / > once or twice
Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to
to access the phone book stored in (depending on the radio).
Answer and press the MENU/
the cell phone to make a call. 2. Select Call Lists. TUNE knob to accept the call.
The Call Lists menu allows you to 3. Select the Incoming Calls, Declining a Call
access the phone numbers from the Outgoing Calls, or Missed
Incoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, and Calls list. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to
Missed Calls menus on your cell Decline and press the MENU/
phone to make a call. 4. Select the name or number you TUNE knob to decline the call.
want to call.
To make a call using the Phone Call Waiting
Book menu: Making a Call
Call waiting must be supported on
1. Press 5 / > once or twice To make a call: the Bluetooth phone and enabled by
(depending on the radio). 1. Press 5 / > once or twice the wireless service carrier to work.
2. Select Phone Book. (depending on the radio). Accepting a Call
3. Search through the list by 2. Enter the character sequence. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to
selecting the letter group the See Entering a Character Answer and press the MENU/
phone book entry begins with, Sequence in Operation on TUNE knob to accept the call.
or press the MENU/TUNE button page 78.
Declining a Call 3. Enter the character sequence Dual Tone Multi-Frequency

Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to then select Call. See Entering a (DTMF) Tones
Decline and press the MENU/ Character Sequence in
Operation on page 78. The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can
TUNE knob to decline the call. send numbers during a call. This is
4. After the call has been placed, used when calling a menu-driven
Switching Between Calls (Call turn or press the MENU/TUNE
Waiting Calls Only) phone system.
knob and choose Merge Calls.
To switch between calls: 1. Turn or press the MENU/TUNE
5. To add more callers to the knob and select Enter Number.
1. Turn or press the MENU/ conference call, repeat
TUNE knob. Steps 14. The number of 2. Enter the character sequence.
callers that can be added is See Entering a Character
2. Select Switch Call from Sequence in Operation on
the menu. limited by your wireless service
carrier. page 78.
Conference Calling Pairing With Touchscreen
Ending a Call
Conference calling and three-way A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
calling must be supported on the Turn or press the MENU/TUNE
knob and select Hang Up. must be paired to the Bluetooth
Bluetooth phone and enabled by the system and then connected to the
wireless service carrier to work. Muting a Call vehicle before it can be used. See
To start a conference while in a your cell phone manufacturer's user
To Mute a Call guide for Bluetooth functions before
current call:
Turn or press the MENU/TUNE pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth
1. Turn or press the MENU/ knob and select Mute Call. phone is not connected, calls will be
TUNE knob. made using OnStar Hands-Free
To Cancel Mute Calling, if available. See OnStar
2. Select Enter Number.
Turn or press the MENU/TUNE Overview on page 141.
knob and select Mute Call.
Pairing Information When the Bluetooth device and 3. Press Search Bluetooth Device.
. A Bluetooth phone with MP3 infotainment system are 4. Press the desired device to pair
capability cannot be paired to successfully paired, the phone book on the searched list screen.
the vehicle as a phone and an is downloaded automatically.
However, the phone book may not 5. Press Yes on the pop-up screen
MP3 player at the same time. of the Bluetooth device and
be downloaded automatically
. Up to five cell phones can be according to the type of the phone. infotainment system.
paired to the Bluetooth system. In this case, proceed with the 6. When the Bluetooth device and
. The pairing process is disabled phonebook download on phone. infotainment system are
when the vehicle is moving. Pairing a Phone successfully paired, the
. Pairing only needs to be telephone screen is displayed on
When there is no paired device on the infotainment system.
completed once, unless the the infotainment system and the
pairing information on the cell Simple Secure Pairing (SSP) is Pairing a Phone
phone changes or the cell phone supported:
is deleted from the system. When a paired device is on the
1. Press D. infotainment system and the SSP is
. Only one paired cell phone can supported:
be connected to the Bluetooth
system at a time. 1. Press D.
. If multiple paired cell phones are
within range of the system, the
system connects to the first
available paired cell phone in the
order that they were first paired
to the system. To link to a
different paired phone, see
Linking to a Different Phone 2. Press telephone, then
later in this section. press Yes.

. The connected phone is 2. Press telephone, then
highlighted by 5. press Yes.
. The 5 7 indicates the 3. Press Search Bluetooth Device.
hands-free and phone music 4. Press the desired device to pair
function are enabled. on the searched list screen.
. The 7 indicates only 5. Input the PIN code
hands-free function is enabled. (default: 1234) to the Bluetooth
device. When the Bluetooth
2. Press settings. . The 5 indicates only Bluetooth device and infotainment system
3. Press connection settings. music is enabled. are successfully paired, the
telephone screen is displayed on
4. Press bluetooth settings. Pairing a Phone
the infotainment system.
5. Press pair device. When there is no paired device on
When the connection fails, a failure
the infotainment system and the
6. Press Search Bluetooth Device. message is displayed on the
SSP is not supported:
infotainment system.
7. Press the desired device to pair
on the searched list screen. 1. Press D. If a Bluetooth device was previously
connected, the infotainment system
8. Press Yes on the pop-up screen executes the auto connection.
of the Bluetooth device and However, if the Bluetooth setting on
infotainment system. the Bluetooth device is turned off, a
9. When the Bluetooth device and failure message is displayed on the
infotainment system are infotainment system.
successfully paired, the 5 7
is displayed on the "pair device"
screen.
Pairing a Phone device and infotainment system Checking the Bluetooth

When a paired device is on the are successfully paired, 5 7 Connection
infotainment system and the SSP is is displayed on the pair device 1. Press D.
not supported: screen.
2. Select settings.
1. Press D. . The connected phone is
highlighted by 5. 3. Press connection settings.
4. Press bluetooth settings.
. The 5 7 indicates the
hands-free and phone music 5. Press pair device.
function are enabled. 6. The paired device will show with
. The 7 indicates only
5 7 when connected.
hands-free function is enabled. Disconnecting the Bluetooth
Device
. The 5 indicates only Bluetooth
music is enabled. 1. Press D.
2. Press settings. Connecting a Bluetooth Device 2. Select settings.
3. Press connection settings. 3. Press connection settings.
1. Press D.
4. Press bluetooth settings. 4. Press bluetooth settings.
2. Select settings.
5. Press pair device. 5. Press pair device.
3. Press connection settings.
6. Press Search Bluetooth Device. 6. Press the name of the device to
4. Press bluetooth settings.
7. Press the desired device to pair be disconnected.
on the searched list screen. 5. Press pair device.
7. Press OK.
8. Input the PIN code 6. Press the device to be paired.
Deleting a Paired Phone
(default: 1234) to the Bluetooth 7. Press OK.
device. When the Bluetooth 1. Press D.
2. Select settings.
. The sound played by the . For Bluetooth music to play, the
Bluetooth device is delivered music must be played at least
3. Press connection settings. through the infotainment system. once from the music player
4. Press bluetooth settings. . Bluetooth music can be played mode of the cell phone or
only when a Bluetooth device Bluetooth device after
5. Press pair device.
has been connected. To play connecting as a stereo headset.
6. Press Delete. After being played at least once,
Bluetooth music, connect the
7. Press Yes. Bluetooth phone to the the music player will
infotainment system. automatically play upon entering
Bluetooth Music play mode, and it will
. If the Bluetooth device is automatically stop when the
Before playing Bluetooth music,
disconnected while playing music player mode ends. If the
read the follow information.
phone music, the music is cell phone or Bluetooth device is
. A cell phone or Bluetooth device discontinued. The audio not in the waiting screen mode,
that supports Advanced Audio streaming function may not be some devices may not
Distribution Profile (A2DP) supported in some Bluetooth automatically play in Bluetooth
versions over 1.2 must be phones. Only one function can music play mode.
registered and connected to the be used at a time between the
product. Bluetooth hands-free or Phone
. From the cell phone or Bluetooth music function. For example,
device, find the Bluetooth device if you convert to the Bluetooth
type to set/connect the item as a hands-free while playing Phone
stereo headset. music, the music is
discontinued. Playing music from
. 5 will appear on the screen if the car is not possible when
the stereo headset is there are no music files stored in
successfully connected. the cell phone.
Playing Bluetooth Music Search Conditions that may occur when

playing Bluetooth music:
1. Press D. Press and hold g or l to fast
forward or rewind.
. It takes some time to transmit
data from the cell phone to the
Playing a File Repeatedly infotainment system.
Press v during playback. . If the cell phone or Bluetooth
.
device is not in the waiting
1: Plays the current file screen mode, it may not
repeatedly. automatically play despite being
. ALL: Plays all files repeatedly. carried out from the Bluetooth
. OFF: Returns to normal music play mode.
playback. . The infotainment system
2. Press audio. transmits the order to play from
This function may not be supported
3. Press source R. depending on the cell phone. the cell phone in the Bluetooth
music play mode. If this is done
4. Press Bluetooth, then select the Playing a File Randomly in a different mode, then the
connected Bluetooth music device transmits the order to
play mode. Press u during playback. stop. Depending on the cell
Pause . NO: Plays all files repeatedly. phones options, this order to
play/stop may take time to
Press r j to pause.
. OFF: Returns to normal activate.
playback.
Press r j again to resume.
. If the Bluetooth music playback
This function may not be supported is not functioning, then check to
Skipping the Previous or Next File depending on the cell phone. see if the cell phone is in the
Do not change the track too quickly waiting screen mode.
Press g or l to select the when playing Bluetooth music.
previous or next file.

. Sounds may be cut off during made using OnStar Hands-Free to the system. To link to a
the Bluetooth music playback. Calling, if available. See OnStar different paired phone, see
. The infotainment system outputs Overview on page 141. Connecting to a Different
the audio from the cell phone or Phone later in this section.
Pairing Information
Bluetooth device as it is Pairing a Phone
transmitted. . A Bluetooth phone with MP3
capability can be paired to the 1. Press b / g. The system
Bluetooth (Voice vehicle as a phone and an MP3 responds Ready, followed by
player at the same time. a tone.
Recognition) . Up to five cell phones can be 2. Say Bluetooth. This command
Using Voice Recognition paired to the Bluetooth system. can be skipped.
To use voice recognition, press the . The pairing process is disabled 3. Say Pair. The system responds
b / g button located on the steering when the vehicle is moving. with instructions and a four-digit
wheel. Use the commands below for . Pairing only needs to be Personal Identification Number
the various voice features. For completed once, unless the (PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.
additional information, say "Help" pairing information on the cell
while you are in a voice 4. Start the pairing process on the
phone changes or the cell phone cell phone that you want to pair.
recognition menu. is deleted from the system. For help with this process, see
Pairing . Only one paired cell phone can your cell phone manufacturer's
A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone be connected to the Bluetooth user guide.
must be paired to the Bluetooth system at a time. 5. Locate the device named Your
system and then connected to the . If multiple paired cell phones are Vehicle in the list on the cell
vehicle before it can be used. See within range of the system, the phone. Follow the instructions
your cell phone manufacturer's user system connects to the first on the cell phone to enter the
guide for Bluetooth functions before available paired cell phone in the PIN provided in Step 3. After the
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth order that they were first paired PIN is successfully entered, the
phone is not connected, calls will be system prompts you to provide a
name for the paired cell phone. Deleting a Paired Phone 2. Say Bluetooth.
This name will be used to If the phone name you want to 3. Say Change phone.
indicate which phones are delete is unknown, see Listing All
paired and connected to the . If another cell phone is
Paired and Connected Phones. found, the response will be
vehicle. The system responds
with <Phone name> has been 1. Press b / g. The system <Phone name> is now
successfully paired after the responds Ready, followed by connected.
pairing process is complete. a tone. . If another cell phone is not
6. Repeat Steps 15 to pair 2. Say Bluetooth. found, the original phone
additional phones. remains connected.
3. Say Delete. The system asks
Listing All Paired and Connected for which phone to delete. Storing and Deleting Phone
Phones 4. Say the name of the phone you Numbers
The system can list all cell phones want to delete. The system can store up to
paired to it. If a paired cell phone is 30 phone numbers as name tags in
also connected to the vehicle, the Connecting to a Different Phone
the Hands-Free Directory that is
system responds with is connected To connect to a different cell phone, shared between the Bluetooth and
after that phone name. the Bluetooth system looks for the OnStar systems.
next available cell phone in the
1. Press b / g. The system order in which all available cell
The following commands are used
responds Ready, followed by to delete and store phone numbers.
phones were paired. Depending on
a tone. which cell phone you want to Store: This command will store a
2. Say Bluetooth. connect to, you may have to use phone number, or a group of
this command several times. numbers as a name tag.
3. Say List.
1. Press b / g. The system Digit Store: This command allows
responds Ready, followed by a phone number to be stored as a
a tone. name tag by entering the digits one
at a time.
Delete: This command is used to To hear all of the numbers Using the Delete All Name Tags
delete individual name tags. recognized by the system, say Command
Delete All Name Tags: This Verify at any time. This command deletes all stored
command deletes all stored name 1. Press b / g. The system name tags in the Hands-Free
tags in the Hands-Free Calling responds Ready, followed by Calling Directory and the
Directory and the Destinations a tone. Destinations Directory.
Directory. To delete all name tags:
2. Say Digit Store.
Using the Store Command
3. Say each digit, one at a time, 1. Press b / g. The system
1. Press b / g. The system that you want to store. After responds Ready, followed by
responds Ready, followed by each digit is entered, the system a tone.
a tone. repeats back the digit it heard 2. Say Delete all name tags.
followed by a tone. After the last
2. Say Store. digit has been entered, say Listing Stored Numbers
3. Say the phone number or group Store, and then follow the
The list command will list all stored
of numbers you want to store all directions given by the system to
numbers and name tags.
at once with no pauses, then save a name tag for this number.
follow the directions given by the Using the List Command
system to save a name tag for Using the Delete Command
this number. 1. Press b / g. The system
1. Press b / g. The system
responds Ready, followed by
Using the Digit Store Command responds Ready, followed by
a tone.
a tone.
If an unwanted number is 2. Say Directory.
recognized by the system, say 2. Say Delete.
Clear at any time to clear the last 3. Say Hands-Free Calling.
3. Say the name tag you want to
number. delete. 4. Say List.
Making a Call Calling 911 Emergency Number 2. Say Digit Dial.

Calls can be made using the 1. Press b / g. The system 3. Say each digit, one at a time,
following commands. responds Ready, followed by that you want to dial. After each
a tone. digit is entered, the system
Dial or Call: The dial or call
repeats back the digit it heard
command can be used 2. Say Dial or Call. followed by a tone. After the last
interchangeably to dial a phone
3. Say 911. digit has been entered,
number or a stored name tag.
say Dial.
Digit Dial: This command allows a 4. Say Dial or Call.
Once connected, the person called
phone number to be dialed by Using the Digit Dial Command will be heard through the audio
entering the digits one at a time.
The digit dial command allows a speakers.
Re-dial: This command is used to phone number to be dialed by
dial the last number used on the cell Using the Re-dial Command
entering the digits one at a time.
phone. After each digit is entered, the 1. Press b / g. The system
Using the Dial or Call system repeats back the digit it responds Ready, followed by
Command heard followed by a tone. a tone.
If an unwanted number is 2. After the tone, say Re-dial. The
1. Press b / g. The system recognized by the system, say system dials the last number
responds Ready, followed by Clear at any time to clear the last called from the connected cell
a tone. number. phone.
2. Say Dial or Call. To hear all of the numbers Once connected, the person called
3. Say the entire number without recognized by the system, say will be heard through the audio
pausing or say the name tag. Verify at any time. speakers.
Once connected, the person called 1. Press b / g. The system
will be heard through the audio responds Ready, followed by
speakers. a tone.
Receiving a Call Three-Way Calling To cancel mute, press b / g , and

When an incoming call is received, Three-way calling must be then say Un-mute Call.
the audio system mutes and a ring supported on the cell phone and Transferring a Call
tone is heard in the vehicle. enabled by the wireless service
carrier. Audio can be transferred between
. Press b / g to answer the call. the Bluetooth system and the cell
1. While on a call, press b / g. phone.
. Press $ / i to ignore a call.
2. Say Three-way call. The cell phone must be paired and
Call Waiting 3. Use the dial or call command to connected with the Bluetooth
Call waiting must be supported on dial the number of the third party system before a call can be
the cell phone and enabled by the to be called. transferred. The connection process
wireless service carrier. can take up to two minutes after the
4. Once the call is connected, ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
. Press b / g to answer an press b / g to link all callers
incoming call when another call together. To Transfer Audio from the
is active. The original call is Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone
placed on hold. Ending a Call During a call with the audio in the
Press $ / i to end a call. vehicle:
. Press b / g again to return to
the original call. Muting a Call 1. Press b / g.
. To ignore the incoming call, no During a call, all sounds from inside 2. Say Transfer Call.
action is required. the vehicle can be muted so that the To Transfer Audio to the Bluetooth
. Press $ / i to disconnect the person on the other end of the call System from a Cell Phone
current call and switch to the call cannot hear them.
During a call with the audio on the
on hold. To mute a call, press b / g , and cell phone, press b / g. The audio
then say Mute Call. transfers to the vehicle. If the audio
does not transfer to the vehicle, use Dual Tone Multi-Frequency previous sections on deleting a
the audio transfer feature on the cell (DTMF) Tones paired phone and deleting
phone. See the cell phone name tags.
manufacturer's user guide. The Bluetooth system can send
numbers and the numbers stored as
Voice Pass-Thru name tags during a call. You can
Hands-Free Phone
use this feature when calling a General Information With
Voice pass-thru allows access to the
menu-driven phone system. Touchscreen
voice recognition commands on the
Account numbers can also be
cell phone. See the cell phone
stored for use.
manufacturer's user guide to see if
the cell phone supports this feature. Sending a Number or Name Tag
To access contacts stored in the cell During a Call
phone: 1. Press b / g. The system
1. Press b / g. The system responds Ready, followed by
responds Ready, followed by a tone.
a tone. 2. Say Dial.
2. Say Bluetooth. This command 3. Say the number or name tag
can be skipped. to send.
3. Say Voice. The system Clearing the System
responds OK, accessing
Unless information is deleted out of Vehicles with a Hands-Free Phone
<phone name>.
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it system can use a Bluetooth-capable
The cell phone's normal prompt will be retained indefinitely. This cell phone with a hands-free profile
messages will go through their cycle includes all saved name tags in the to make and receive phone calls.
according to the phone's operating phone book and phone pairing The infotainment system and voice
instructions. information. For information on how control are used to operate the
to delete this information, see the
system. Not all phones support all $ / i (Mute/End Call): Press to Switching a Call to the Cell Phone
functions and not all phones work end a call, decline a call, or cancel (Private Mode)
with the Hands-Free Phone system. an operation. To switch the call from the cell
Hands-Free Phone Controls Making a Call by Entering a Phone phone to hands-free:
Use the buttons on the infotainment Number 1. Press 0.
system and the steering wheel to
operate the Hands-Free Phone 2. Press 0 again to switch back to
system. hands-free.
Steering Wheel Controls Turning the Microphone On
and Off
Steering wheel controls can be
used to: Press 3 to turn the microphone on
. Answer incoming calls. or off.
. Confirm system information. Calling by Redial
. End a call. 1. Enter the phone number using To call by using redial:
the keypad on the telephone
. Decline a call. screen. . Press b / g on the steering
. Cancel an operation. wheel controls to display the
2. Press 5 on the screen or b / g redial guidance screen.
. Make outgoing calls using the on the steering wheel controls.
call list. . Press and hold 5 on the
If a wrong number is entered, press telephone screen.
b / g (Push to Talk): Press to } to delete the number one digit at
answer incoming calls and to a time, or press and hold } to Redialing is not possible when there
confirm system information. Press delete all digits of the number. is no call history.
and hold for two to three seconds to
access the call list.
Taking calls 2. Press 9 on the phone book To search for the name Alex:
When a phone call comes through screen. 1. Press (abc) to select the first
the connected Bluetooth cell phone, 3. Use the keypad to input the character.
the playing track will be cut off and name to search. For details, 2. Press (jkl) to select the second
the phone will ring with the relevant refer to the Searching for a character.
information displayed. Name later in this section.
3. Press (def) to select the third
Press b / g on the steering wheel 4. Select the phone book entry character.
controls or press Accept on the to call.
screen. 4. Press (wxy) to select the fourth
5. Press the number to dial. character.
To decline the call, press $ / i on When the Bluetooth device and Making a Call from Call History
the steering wheel controls or press infotainment system are
Reject on the screen. successfully paired, the phone book 1. Press Call History on the
will download. Some phones may telephone screen.
Using the Phone Book Menu
not download automatically. If this 2. Press one of the following for:
1. Press Phone Book on the happens, connect it again or
telephone screen. proceed with the phone book
. 2 Dialed calls.
download on the phone.
2. Press Q or R to scroll through . 4 Missed calls.
the list. Searching for a Name . 9 Received calls.
3. Select the phone book entry Select characters by using the
to call. keypad on the phone book screen. 3. Select the phone book entry
As characters are selected, the to call.
4. Press the number to dial.
names that include those characters
Searching for Phone Book Entries will display on the phone book
1. Press Phone Book on the screen. As more characters of the
telephone screen. name are entered, the list of
possible names is shortened.
Making a Call with Speed Dial Downloadable Stitcher SmartRadio is an Internet

Numbers radio service that streams news,
Press and hold the speed dial
Applications sports, and entertainment shows
number using the keypad on the through the audio system. Create
telephone screen. Smartphone Link personalized, on-demand stations or
discover new shows through
Only speed dial numbers already (Overview) Stitcher's preset stations. To set up
stored on the cell phone can be Before Using Smartphone Link an account, download the
used for speed dial calls. Up to application from the Android Market
two-digit speed dial numbers are If equipped, the vehicle can connect or iTunes Store, or go to
supported. to Pandora and Stitcher www.stitcher.com.
SmartRadio through the
For two-digit speed dial numbers, infotainment system. The A phone or tablet with Internet
press and hold the second digit to applications must be downloaded to connection and the Pandora and/or
make a call to the speed dial the device first. Stitcher application installed is
number. required. Personal cell phone data
Pandora is a free Internet radio plans are used. Make sure the latest
service that streams personalized version is installed on the device
radio stations based on artists, and the volume is turned up.
songs, genres, and comedians.
Create stations using the Pandora Supported Smartphone
website or smartphone application, Applications
then use - (thumbs up) or , Pandora
(thumbs down) to personalize . iPod/iPhone, through the USB
stations. To set up an account, or for
connection.
more information, go to
www.pandora.com. Pandora may . Android phone, through
not be available in Canada or Bluetooth wireless.
Mexico.

. BlackBerry phone, through iOS Version Error then press the desired
Bluetooth wireless. application menu on the
If the iOS version of the iPhone is
Stitcher less than 4.0, the error message is Infotainment system.
. iPod/iPhone, through the USB displayed as, Your iPhone does . When the application is stopped
connection. not allow this application to be on the smartphone, it usually
opened on a USB connection. takes time to return to normal
. Android phone, through Please refer to owners manual. operation. Try to activate the
Bluetooth wireless. application after 1020 seconds.
. Activate the application on your
iPod/iPhone Error Messages and iPhone, then press the desired To switch between Stitcher or
Solution application menu on the Pandora while playing the other on
If the infotainment system fails to infotainment system. the iPod/iPhone connected through
activate the application on your Connecting Application Error the USB port, press the D button
iPod/iPhone connected through the on the iPod/iPhone, then press
USB port, the error message is If the infotainment system fails to Stitcher or Pandora on the
displayed as, Unable to start activate the application on the smartphone link menu of the
application, possible reasons. smartphone connected through infotainment system.
Bluetooth wireless technology, the
. Your iPhone is locked. To error message is displayed as, Switching Between a USB
resolve, unlock the iPhone. Connecting application error. Connected Device and a
. You have another active Bluetooth Device
. Reset all settings related to the
application open. To resolve, phone, then press the desired When the iPhone is connected to
close the other active application menu on the the infotainment system through the
application. infotainment system. USB port, and the infotainment
. You have not installed the system is connected to another
. Reconnect the smartphone and phone through Bluetooth wireless
application on your iPhone. To Infotainment system through
resolve, install the application on technology, it is possible to switch
Bluetooth wireless technology, between the two applications, using
the iPhone.
the smartphone list menu.

. Press iPhone or bluetooth phone
on the smartphone list menu to
If the activated application is on the 5. Press ^ smartphone link.
smartphone link menu, the ^ is
switch to the desired device.
activated in the upper position of the
Displaying or Hiding Application HOME menu or playing screen.
Icons
To display or hide application icons Smartphone Link
on the smartphone link menu: (Pandora)
1. Press D. Some images and explanations may
vary by phone operating systems,
2. Press smartphone link.
versions, and/or application (App)
versions. 6. Press Pandora.
Using Pandora If the smartphone is not connected
1. Install the Pandora application to the infotainment system or the
on the smartphone. application is not installed on the
smartphone, the Pandora menu is
2. Connect the smartphone to the not activated.
infotainment system through the
USB port or Bluetooth wireless Thumbs Up and Thumbs Down
technology.
Rate tracks by using - (thumbs up)
3. Press SETTINGS. . iPhone: USB connection. or , (thumbs down).
4. Press the desired application . Android phone/BlackBerry
icon to hide or display it on the phone: Bluetooth wireless Pause
smartphone link screen. technology. . Press j to pause.
5. Press OK. 3. Activate the Pandora application. . Press r to resume.
4. Press D.
Changing Tracks Creating Stations by Searching 2. Press QuickMix Z to listen to a

by Artist or Track selection of tracks from your
Press l to change to the next
track. 1. Press MENU. The Pandora stations.
menu is displayed. Tone Settings
Bookmark
2. Press create station. 1. Press MENU. The Pandora
To bookmark a favorite artist or menu is displayed.
track: 3. Press enter artist/track. The
keypad is displayed. 2. Press tone settings. The tone
1. Press S on the screen. 4. Enter the artist or track name settings menu is displayed. See
2. Press Artist or Track. using the keypad, then press Tone Settings under Radio
Create. Controls with Touchscreen in
Pandora Menus Operation on page 78.
5. Press the desired station. The
Creating Stations from Currently station is added into the
Playing Music Pandora menu automatically. Smartphone Link
1. Press MENU. The Pandora Listening to Stations
(Stitcher)
menu is displayed. Some images and explanations may
1. Press MENU. The Pandora
2. Press create station. menu is displayed. vary by phone operating systems,
versions, and/or application (App)
3. Press from currently playing.
2. Press Q or R to scroll through versions.
4. Press Artist or Track. the list. Select the desired Using Stitcher
5. Press the desired station. The station.
1. Install the Stitcher application on
station is added into the QuickMix the smartphone.
Pandora menu automatically.
1. Press MENU. The Pandora
menu is displayed.
2. Connect the smartphone to the If the smartphone is not connected Stitcher Menus
infotainment system through the to the infotainment system or the The Stitcher Station menu displays
USB port or Bluetooth wireless application is not installed on the available station data from the
technology. smartphone, the Stitcher menu is Stitcher server.
. iPhone: USB connection. not activated.
1. Press MENU. The Stitcher
. Android phone/BlackBerry Thumbs Up and Thumbs Down Station menu is displayed.
phone: Bluetooth wireless Rate tracks by using - (thumbs up)
technology. 2. Press Q or R to scroll through
or , (thumbs down). the list. Select the desired
3. Activate the Stitcher application. station.
Pause
4. Press D. Tone Settings
. Press j to pause.
5. Press ^ smartphone link. 1. Press MENU. The Stitcher menu
. Press r to resume. is displayed.
Changing Stations 2. Press tone settings. The tone
settings menu is displayed. See
Press l to change to the next Tone Settings under Radio
station. Controls with Touchscreen in
Saving Favorites
To save a station as a favorite,
press q on the stitcher screen.
6. Press Stitcher.

. ID3 Tag information for MP3 . Only USB storage devices
Bluetooth Phone/ files, such as the album name formatted in FAT16/32, exFAT
Devices and the artist, can be played. file system are recognized.
. To display album title, track title, NTFS and other file systems are
Pictures and Movies and artist information, the file not recognized.
(Audio System) should be compatible with the . The time it takes to process files
ID3 Tag V1 and V2 formats. will depend on the USB storage
The infotainment system can play device type and capacity, and
the music files contained in the USB Using USB Storage Devices and
iPod/iPhone the type of files stored.
storage device or iPod/iPhone
products. . Use a USB or flash memory type
. Some USB storage device files
storage device. Do not connect may not be compatible.
Audio System Information
using a USB adaptor. . Up to two USB devices and one
Using MP3/WMA/OGG/WAV Files iPod can be played through a
. Do not connect and reconnect
. Music files with .mp3, .wma, the USB device repeatedly in a USB hub. All devices may not be
.ogg, and .wav file name short time, as this may cause supported, depending on the
extensions can be played. static electricity and problems performance of the USB hub.
using the device. If there is not enough power
. MP3 files that can be played are: supply, it may not operate
Bit rate: 8 kbps ~ 320 kbps - . Use a USB device with a metal normally.
Sampling frequency: 48 kHz, connecting terminal.
44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, 24 kHz,
. Do not disconnect the USB
. Connection with i-Stick Type storage device while it is playing.
22.05 kHz, and 16 kHz.
USB storage devices may be This may cause damage to the
. Files with a bit rate above faulty due to vehicle vibration. product or affect the
128 kbps will result in higher performance of the USB device.
. Do not to touch the USB
quality sound.
connecting terminal. . Disconnect the USB storage
device when the ignition is
turned off. If the ignition is turned
on while the USB device is

. USB storage device capacity . The iPod/iPhone may be
connected, the USB device may limit is 2,500 music files, damaged if the ignition is turned
be damaged or may not operate 2,500 photo files, 250 movie off when it is connected to the
normally. files, 2,500 folders, and vehicle. When not in use,
.
10 stages of folder structure. disconnect the iPod/iPhone.
USB storage devices can only The iPod/iPhone can play all
be connected for playing music/
. When the iPod/iPhone is
music files supported, but will connected to the USB port by
movies, viewing photo files, only display up to 2,500 files on
or upgrading. using the iPod/iPhone cable, the
the screen in alphabetical order. Bluetooth music is not
. Do not use the USB terminal to . The following iPod/iPhone supported.
charge USB accessory product models are supported:
equipment. The heat generated
. Connect the iPod/iPhone to the
may cause performance issues iPod 2G nano/iPod 3G nano/ USB port by using the iPod/
or damage. iPod 4G and 5G nano iPhone cable to play the music
iPod 120GB and 160GB files. When the iPod/iPhone is
. Store files in the top-level drive connected to the AUX input
of the USB storage device. classic
terminal, the music file will
When the logical drive is iPod 1G, 2G, and 3G touch not play.
separated from the device, only
the USB music files from the iPhone 3G and 3GS . The iPod/iPhone playback
top-level logical drive can be iPhone 4/4S functions and the information
played. Music files stored on displayed may be different when
. Only connect the iPod/iPhone played on the infotainment
USB storage devices may not
with connection cables system.
play normally if an application is
supported by iPod/iPhone
loaded by partitioning a separate
products. Other connection
drive.
cables cannot be used.
. Music files to which Digital Right
Management (DRM) is applied
cannot be played.
. Press r to resume.
Changing to Next/Previous Files
. Press l to change to the
next file.
. Press g within five seconds of
the playback time to play the
previous file.
. Refer to the table for the If the USB device is already Returning to the Beginning of the
classification items related to the connected: Current File
search function provided by the
iPod/iPhone. . Press D. Press g after five seconds of the
USB Player . Press audio. playback time.
Scanning Forward or Backward
Playing Music from a USB Device . Press SourceR.
. Connect the USB device to the . Press USB. Press and hold g or l during
USB port. playback to rewind or fast forward.
To stop the USB device and select Release the button to resume
. Play will start automatically after another media source, press playback at normal speed.
the system has finished reading SourceR, then select the other
the USB device. Playing a File Repeatedly
source.
. If a non-readable USB device is
To remove the USB device, select Press v during playback.
connected, an error message
another function, then remove the . 1: Plays the current file
displays and the system will
USB device. repeatedly.
switch to the previous audio
function. Pause . ALL: Plays all files repeatedly.
. Press j to pause.

. OFF: Returns to normal Using the USB Music Menu Playing Music Files
playback. . Press MENU during playback. . Connect the iPod/iPhone to the
Playing a File Randomly USB port.
Press u during playback. . Play will start from the previously
played point after the system
. NO: Plays all files randomly.
has finished reading the USB
. OFF: Returns to normal device.
playback. . If a non-readable USB device is
Viewing Information on the connected, an error message
Currently Playing File displays and the system will
Press the title during playback to switch to the previous audio
display information about the current . Press the play mode. function.
file playing. Tone Settings If the iPod/iPhone is already
. The information displayed connected:
includes the title, file name, 1. Press R.
1. Press D.
folder name, and artist/album 2. Press tone settings. The Tone
saved with the song. Settings menu is displayed. See 2. Press e audio.
. Incorrect information cannot be Tone Settings under Radio
Controls with Touchscreen in 3. Press SourceR.
modified or corrected on the
infotainment system. Operation on page 78. 4. Press iPod.
. The information for songs iPod/iPhone Player To stop the device and select
expressed in special symbols or another media source, press
This feature is limited to models
in unavailable languages may be supporting the iPod/iPhone SourceR, then select the other
displayed as u. connection. source.
To remove the device, select Playing a File Repeatedly

. Incorrect information cannot be
another function, then remove the modified or corrected on the
device. Press v during playback. infotainment system.
Pause
. 1: Plays the current file . The information for songs
repeatedly. expressed in special symbols or
. Press j to pause. . ALL: Plays all files repeatedly. in unavailable languages may be
. Press r to resume. displayed as u.
. OFF: Returns to normal
Changing to Next/Previous Song playback.
Playing a File Randomly
. Press l to change to the
next song. Press u during playback.
. Press g within two seconds of . NO: Plays all files randomly.
the playback time to play the . OFF: Returns to normal
previous file. playback.
Returning to the Beginning of the Viewing Information on the
Current File Currently Playing Song Using the iPod Menu
Press g after two seconds of the Press the title during playback to . Press MENU during playback.
playback time. display information about the current
song playing.
. Press the appropriate
Scanning Forward or Backward play mode.
. The information displayed
Press and hold g or l during includes the title, file name, Tone Settings
playback to rewind or fast forward. folder name, and artist/album
Release the button to resume 1. Press R on the iPod menu.
saved with the song.
playback at normal speed.
2. Press tone settings. The tone

. Some files may not operate due Some features are disabled while
settings menu is displayed. See to a different recording format or the vehicle is in motion.
Tone Settings under Radio the condition of the file.
Controls with Touchscreen in Viewing a Slide Show
Viewing Pictures
1. Connect the USB device to the
From the picture screen, press z.
Pictures and Movies USB port. . The slide show will start to play.
(Picture System) . Press the screen to cancel the
slide show during the slide show
The Infotainment system can view playback.
picture files stored on a USB device.
Viewing a Previous or Next
Picture System Information Picture
Caution for Using Picture Files Press t or u from the picture
. File size: screen.
JPG: Within 64 to 5,000 pixels Rotating a Picture
(Width) and 64 to 5,000 pixels 2. Press the screen to open to full
(Height). screen. Press the screen again Press y or w from the picture
to return to the previous screen. screen.
BMP, PNG, GIF: Within 64 to
1,024 pixels (Width) and 64 to If the USB device is already Enlarging a Picture
1,024 pixels (Height). connected:
Press x from the picture screen.
. File extensions: .jpg, .bmp, .png, 1. Press D.
.gif. Animated .gif files are not Using the USB Picture Menu
supported. 2. Press G picture & movie. 1. Press MENU from the picture
screen.
3. Press SourceR.
4. Press USB picture.
3. Press 4 to exit. mpeg-4 (mpg4, mp42, mp43):

4Mbps
Pictures and Movies wmv9: 3 Mbps
(Movie System) divx 3: 3 Mbps
The infotainment system can play divx 4/5/6: 4.8 Mbps
movie files stored on a USB device. xvid: 4.5 Mbps
Movie System Information . Max audio bitrate:
2. Press the appropriate menu: Caution for Using Movie Files mp3: 320 Kbps
. picture file list: lists all . Available resolution: Within 720 wma: 320 Kbps
picture files. x 576 (W x H) pixels.
ac-3: 640 Kbps
. sort by title: shows pictures . Frame rate: Less than 30 fps.
in title order. aac: 449 Kbps
. Playable movie file: .avi, .mpg,
. sort by date: shows pictures .mp4, .divx, .xvid, .wmv. The
. Movie files to which Digital Right
in date order. playable movie file may not be Management (DRM) is applied
played according to the codec may not be played.
. slide show time: allows
selection of the slide show format. Playing a Movie File
interval. . Playable codec format: divx, 1. Connect the USB device to the
. clock/temp display: allows xvid, mpeg-1, mpeg-4 (mpg4, USB port.
selection of On or Off to mp42, mp43), wmv9 (wmv3).
2. Press the screen to open to full
show the clock and . Playable Audio format: MP3, screen. Press the screen again
temperature on the full AC3, AAC, WMA. to return to the previous screen.
screen. . Max video bitrate:
. display setting: adjusts for
mpeg-1: 8Mbps
Brightness and Contrast.
If the USB device is already Changing to Next/Previous Movie

connected: . Press u to change to the
1. Press D. next file.
2. Press G picture & movie. . Press t within five seconds of
the playback time to play the
3. Press SourceR. previous file.
4. Press USB movie. Returning to the Beginning of the
Movie is not available while driving. Current Movie 2. Press the appropriate menu:
Viewing a Slide Show Press t after five seconds of the . movie file list: lists all movie
playback time. files.
From the picture screen, press z.
Scanning Forward or Backward
. clock/temp display: allows
. The slide show will start to play. selection of On or Off to
. Press the screen to cancel the Press and hold t or u during show the clock and
slide show during the slide show playback to rewind or fast forward. temperature on the full
playback. Release the button to resume screen.
playback at normal speed. . display settings: adjusts for
. The last played audio source will
play as background music Viewing Full Screen Brightness and Contrast.
during the slide show playback. . tone settings: shows the
Press t from the movie screen.
Pause sound setup. See Tone
Press t again to return to the Settings under Radio
. Press j to pause. previous screen. Controls with Touchscreen
Using the USB Movie Menu in Operation on page 78.
. Press r to resume.
1. Press MENU from the movie 3. Press 4 to exit.
screen.
Subtitle Language Trademarks and Covered by one or more of the

If the movie file has a subtitle following U.S. patents: 7,295,673;
language, it can be viewed.
License Agreements 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274.
FCC Information DivX, DivX Certified and
. Press q from the movie screen. associated logos are trademarks of
See Radio Frequency Statement on Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries
. Press S or T on the pop-up page 1315 regarding Part 15 of the
screen. and are used under license.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with
. Press r to close the pop-up
Industry Canada Standards
screen. RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
If there is only one subtitle
language, it can be set to On/Off. Bluetooth
The Bluetooth word mark and logos
Audio Language are owned by the Bluetooth SIG,
If the movie file has an audio Inc. and any use of such marks by Made for iPod and Made for
language, it can be used. General Motors is under license. iPhone mean that an electronic
Other trademarks and trade names accessory has been designed to
. Press q from the movie screen. are those of their respective owners. connect specifically to iPod or
. Press Z S or T on the pop-up iPhone and has been certified by
screen. the developer to meet Apple
performance standards.
. Press r to close the pop-up iPod and iPhone are trademarks of
screen. Apple Computer, Inc., registered in
If there is only one audio language, the U.S. and other countries.
it cannot be set. Audio language
can be set only when the movie file DivX Certified to play DivX video,
is the Divx File. including premium content.
Explicit Language Notice: Channels General Requirements:

with frequent explicit language are 1. A License Agreement from
indicated with an XL preceding the SiriusXM is required for any
channel name. Channel blocking is product that incorporates
available for SiriusXM Satellite SiriusXM Technology and/or for
Radio receivers by notifying use of any of the SiriusXM
Fees and Taxes: Subscription fee, SiriusXM: marks to be manufactured,
taxes, one time activation fee, and . USA: 866-635-2349 or see distributed, or marketed in the
other fees may apply. Subscription www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM Service Area.
fee is consumer only. All fees and . Canada: 877-209-0079 or see 2. For products to be distributed,
programming subject to change.
www.xmradio.ca. marketed, and/or sold in
Subscriptions subject to Customer
It is prohibited to copy, decompile, Canada, a separate agreement
Agreement available at
is required with Canadian
www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM disassemble, reverse engineer,
hack, manipulate, or otherwise Satellite Radio Inc. (operating as
service only available in the
make available any technology or XM Canada).
48 contiguous United States and
Canada. software incorporated in receivers FreeType 2
compatible with the SiriusXM Portions of this software are
In Canada: Some deterioration of
Satellite Radio System or that
service may occur in extreme copyright 2007-2012 The
support the SiriusXM website, the
northern latitudes. This is beyond FreeType Project
Online Service or any of its content.
the control of SiriusXM Satellite (www.freetype.org). All rights
Furthermore, the AMBER voice
Radio. reserved.
compression software included in
this product is protected by Libjpeg
intellectual property rights including
patent rights, copyrights, and trade The navigation software is based in
secrets of Digital Voice part on the work of the independent
Systems, Inc. JPEG Group.
2 NOTES
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control 5. Air Conditioning

6. Rear Window Defogger
Systems
7. Recirculation
Climate Control Systems For vehicles with these climate
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1 control systems, the heating,
cooling, and ventilation can be
Air Vents controlled for the vehicle.
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Maintenance
Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Climate Control System with

Heater Only
Climate Control System with 2. Fan Control
Heater and Air Conditioning
3. Air Delivery Mode Control
4. Rear Window Defogger
2. Fan Control
Temperature Control: Turn
3. Air Delivery Mode Control clockwise or counterclockwise to
4. Driver and Passenger Heated increase or decrease the
Seats temperature.
8-2 Climate Controls
A (Fan Control): Turn clockwise 1 (Defrost): This mode clears the For quick cool down on hot days, do
or counterclockwise to increase or windshield of fog or frost more the following:
decrease the fan speed. Turning the quickly. Air is directed to the 1. Open the windows to let hot air
fan control to 0 turns the fan off. The windshield and side window outlets. escape.
fan must be turned on to run the air Do not drive the vehicle until all
conditioning compressor. windows are clear.
2. Press M.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn In defrost or defog mode, excessive 3. Press #.
clockwise or counterclockwise to air conditioning use can cause the
change the current airflow mode. 4. Select the coolest temperature.
windows to fog. If this happens,
Select from the following air delivery change the air delivery mode to Y 5. Select the highest A speed.
modes: and reduce the fan speed. Using these settings together for
Y (Vent): Air is directed to the # (Air Conditioning): For long periods of time may cause the
instrument panel outlets. vehicles with air conditioning, follow air inside the vehicle to become too
dry. To prevent this from happening,
\ (Bi-Level): Air is divided these steps to use the system. Turn
after the air in the vehicle has
between the instrument panel and A to the desired speed. The air
conditioning does not operate when cooled, turn the recirculation
floor outlets.
the fan control knob is in the off mode off.
[ (Floor): Air is directed to the
M (Recirculation): This mode
floor outlets, with some air directed position. Press # to turn the air
conditioning on and off. When # is recirculates and helps to quickly
to the rear outlets.
cool the air inside the vehicle. It can
W (Defog): This mode clears the pressed, an indicator light comes on
be used to prevent outside air and
windows of fog or moisture. Air is to show that the air conditioning
odors from entering the vehicle.
directed to the floor, windshield, and is on.
side window outlets.
Climate Controls 8-3
Press the button to turn the ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF. Air Vents

recirculation mode on. An indicator If turned on again it runs for about
light comes on to show that the five minutes before turning off. Use the air vents located in the
recirculation is on. Press the button center and on the side of the
For vehicles with heated outside
again to return to outside air mode. instrument panel to direct the
rearview mirrors, they turn on with
airflow. Move the slats on the center
Using the recirculation mode for the rear window defogger and help
air vents to direct airflow.
extended periods may cause the to clear fog or frost from the surface
windows to fog. If this happens, of the mirror. See Heated Mirrors on Turn the knobs on the side air vents
select the defrost mode. page 213. counterclockwise or clockwise to
open or close off the airflow.
M / L (Heated Seats, If Notice: Do not use anything
Equipped): Press to heat the driver sharp on the inside of the rear Operation Tips
or passenger seat. See Heated window. If you do, you could cut . Clear away any ice, snow,
Front Seats on page 36. or damage the warming grid, and
or leaves from the air inlets at
the repairs would not be covered
Rear Window and Outside the base of the windshield that
by the vehicle warranty. Do not
Mirror Defogger may block the flow of air into the
attach a temporary vehicle
vehicle.
1 (Rear Window Defogger): license, tape, a decal, or anything
Press to turn the rear window and similar to the defogger grid. . Use of non-GM approved hood
outside mirror defogger on or off. An deflectors may adversely affect
indicator light comes on to show the performance of the system.
that the feature is on. . Keep the path under the front
The rear window defogger turns off seats clear of objects to help
after about 10 minutes. It can also circulate the air inside the
vehicle more effectively.
be turned off by pressing 1 again
or by turning the ignition to ACC/
8-4 Climate Controls
Maintenance
Air Intake
Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves
from the air intake at the base of the
windshield that can block the flow of
air into the vehicle.
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
The filter removes dust, pollen, and 1. Open the glove box completely 3. Install the new air filter.
other airborne irritants from outside and pull it to remove.
air that is pulled into the vehicle. 4. Reinstall the air filter cover and
2. Remove the filter cover by glove box in reverse order.
The filter should be replaced as part unscrewing both sides of the
of routine scheduled maintenance. See your dealer if additional
cover. assistance is needed.
See Maintenance Schedule on
page 112. To find out what type of
filter to use, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 1114.
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Shifting Into Park (Automatic Ride Control Systems

Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Traction Control
Operating Shifting out of Park (Automatic System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Driving Information Parking over Things Cruise Control
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Engine Exhaust Fuel
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Running the Vehicle While Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-34
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 California Fuel
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Automatic Transmission Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-21 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-34
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-6 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Manual Transmission Filling a Portable Fuel
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-24
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Brakes Towing
Antilock Brake General Towing
Starting and Operating System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-13 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 Conversions and Add-Ons
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-27 Add-On Electrical
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
9-2 Driving and Operating

. Designate a front seat
Driving Information passenger to handle potential { WARNING
distractions.
Distracted Driving . Become familiar with vehicle
Taking your eyes off the road too
long or too often could cause a
Distraction comes in many forms features before driving, such as
and can take your focus from the crash resulting in injury or death.
programming favorite radio
task of driving. Exercise good stations and adjusting climate Focus your attention on driving.
judgment and do not let other control and seat settings.
activities divert your attention away Program all trip information into Refer to the Infotainment section for
from the road. Many local any navigation device prior to more information on using that
governments have enacted laws driving. system, including pairing and using
regarding driver distraction. Become a cell phone.
. Wait until the vehicle is parked
familiar with the local laws in
to retrieve items that have fallen
your area. Defensive Driving
to the floor.
To avoid distracted driving, always Defensive driving means always
. Stop or park the vehicle to tend
keep your eyes on the road, hands expect the unexpected. The first
to children.
on the wheel, and mind on the drive. step in driving defensively is to wear
. Keep pets in an appropriate the safety belt. See Safety Belts on
. Do not use a phone in
carrier or restraint. page 38.
demanding driving situations.
Use a hands-free method to . Avoid stressful conversations . Assume that other road users
place or receive necessary while driving, whether with a (pedestrians, bicyclists, and
phone calls. passenger or on a cell phone. other drivers) are going to be
. Watch the road. Do not read, careless and make mistakes.
take notes, or look up Anticipate what they might do
information on phones or other and be ready.
electronic devices.

. Allow enough following distance
between you and the driver in
Control of a Vehicle If the engine ever stops while the
vehicle is being driven, brake
front of you. Braking, steering, and accelerating normally but do not pump the
are important factors in helping to brakes. Doing so could make the
. Focus on the task of driving.
control a vehicle while driving. pedal harder to push down. If the
Drunk Driving engine stops, there will be some
Braking power brake assist but it will be
Death and injury associated with used when the brake is applied.
Braking action involves perception
drinking and driving is a global Once the power assist is used up, it
time and reaction time. Deciding to
tragedy. can take longer to stop and the
push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is brake pedal will be harder to push.
{ WARNING reaction time.
Steering
Drinking and then driving is very Average driver reaction time is
dangerous. Your reflexes, about three-quarters of a second. In Electric Power Steering
perceptions, attentiveness, and that time, a vehicle moving at
The vehicle has electric power
judgment can be affected by even 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
steering. It does not have power
a small amount of alcohol. You (66 ft), which could be a lot of
steering fluid. Regular maintenance
can have a serious or even distance in an emergency.
is not required.
fatal collision if you drive after Helpful braking tips to keep in mind
If power steering assist is lost due
drinking. include:
to a system malfunction, the vehicle
Do not drink and drive or ride with . Keep enough distance between can be steered, but may require
a driver who has been drinking. you and the vehicle in front increased effort. See your dealer if
Ride home in a cab; or if you are of you. there is a problem.
with a group, designate a driver . Avoid needless heavy braking.
who will not drink. . Keep pace with traffic.
If the steering wheel is turned until it

. Holding both sides of the The vehicle's right wheels can drop
reaches the end of its travel and is steering wheel allows you to turn off the edge of a road onto the
held against that position for an 180 degrees without removing shoulder while driving. Follow
extended period of time, power a hand. these tips:
steering assist may be reduced. . The Antilock Brake System 1. Ease off the accelerator and
Normal use of the power steering (ABS) allows steering while then, if there is nothing in the
assist should return when the braking. way, steer the vehicle so that it
system cools down. straddles the edge of the
See your dealer if there is a
Off-Road Recovery pavement.
problem. 2. Turn the steering wheel about
one-eighth of a turn, until the
Curve Tips right front tire contacts the
. Take curves at a reasonable pavement edge.
speed. 3. Turn the steering wheel to go
. Reduce speed before entering a straight down the roadway.
curve.
. Maintain a reasonable steady Loss of Control
speed through the curve. Skidding
. Wait until the vehicle is out of There are three types of skids that
the curve before accelerating correspond to the vehicle's three
gently into the straightaway. control systems:
Steering in Emergencies . Braking Skid wheels are not
. There are some situations when rolling.
steering around a problem may
be more effective than braking.

. Steering or Cornering material on the road. Learn to
Skid too much speed or recognize warning clues such { WARNING
steering in a curve causes tires as enough water, ice, or packed
to slip and lose cornering force. snow on the road to make a Wet brakes can cause crashes.
mirrored surface and slow They might not work as well in a
. Acceleration Skid too much
down when you have any doubt. quick stop and could cause
throttle causes the driving
wheels to spin. pulling to one side. You could
. Try to avoid sudden steering, lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids acceleration, or braking,
by taking reasonable care suited to including reducing vehicle speed After driving through a large
existing conditions, and by not by shifting to a lower gear. Any puddle of water or a car/vehicle
overdriving those conditions. But sudden changes could cause wash, lightly apply the brake
skids are always possible. the tires to slide. pedal until the brakes work
Remember: Antilock brakes help normally.
If the vehicle starts to slide, follow
these suggestions: avoid only the braking skid. Flowing or rushing water creates
strong forces. Driving through
. Ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and steer the
Driving on Wet Roads flowing water could cause the
way you want the vehicle to go. Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle to be carried away. If this
The vehicle may straighten out. vehicle traction and affect your happens, you and other vehicle
Be ready for a second skid if it ability to stop and accelerate. occupants could drown. Do not
occurs. Always drive slower in these types ignore police warnings and be
of driving conditions and avoid very cautious about trying to drive
. Slow down and adjust your
driving through large puddles and through flowing water.
driving according to weather
conditions. Stopping distance deepstanding or flowing water.
can be longer and vehicle
control can be affected when
traction is reduced by water,
snow, ice, gravel, or other
Hydroplaning
. Turn off cruise control. . Check all fluid levels and brakes,
tires, cooling system, and
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water Highway Hypnosis transmission.
can build up under the vehicle's
tires so they actually ride on the Always be alert and pay attention to . Shift to a lower gear when going
water. This can happen if the road is your surroundings while driving. down steep or long hills.
wet enough and you are going fast If you become tired or sleepy, find a
enough. When the vehicle is safe place to park the vehicle { WARNING
hydroplaning, it has little or no and rest.
contact with the road. If you do not shift down, the
Other driving tips include:
brakes could get so hot that they
There is no hard and fast rule about . Keep the vehicle well ventilated. would not work well. You would
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
. Keep the interior then have poor braking or even
slow down when the road is wet.
temperature cool. none going down a hill. You could
Other Rainy Weather Tips crash. Shift down to let the engine
. Keep your eyes moving scan
assist the brakes on a steep
Besides slowing down, other wet the road ahead and to the sides.
weather driving tips include: downhill slope.
. Check the rearview mirror and
. Allow extra following distance. vehicle instruments often.
. Pass with caution.
Hill and Mountain Roads { WARNING
. Keep windshield wiping
equipment in good shape. Driving on steep hills or through Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
mountains is different than driving or with the ignition off is
. Keep the windshield washer fluid on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
reservoir filled. dangerous. The brakes will have
driving in these conditions include: to do all the work of slowing down
. Have good tires with proper . Keep the vehicle serviced and in and they could get so hot that
tread depth. See Tires on good shape.
page 1039. (Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Winter Driving apply the brakes sooner than when
on dry pavement. See Antilock
Driving on Snow or Ice Brake System (ABS) on page 925.
they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or Drive carefully when there is snow Allow greater following distance on
even none going down a hill. or ice between the tires and the any slippery road and watch for
Steering may also be affected road, creating less traction or grip. slippery spots. Icy patches can
when ignition is off. You could Wet ice can occur at about 0C occur on otherwise clear roads in
(32F) when freezing rain begins to shaded areas. The surface of a
crash. Always have the engine
fall, resulting in even less traction. curve or an overpass can remain icy
running and the vehicle in gear
Avoid driving on wet ice or in when the surrounding roads are
when going downhill. freezing rain until roads can be clear. Avoid sudden steering
treated with salt or sand. maneuvers and braking while
. Stay in your own lane. Do not Drive with caution, whatever the on ice.
swing wide or cut across the condition. Accelerate gently so Turn off cruise control on slippery
center of the road. Drive at traction is not lost. Accelerating too surfaces.
speeds that let you stay in your quickly causes the wheels to spin
own lane. and makes the surface under the Blizzard Conditions
. Be alert on top of hills; tires slick, so there is even less Being stuck in snow can be a
something could be in your lane traction. serious situation. Stay with the
(stalled car, accident). Try not to break the fragile traction. vehicle unless there is help nearby.
. Pay attention to special road If you accelerate too fast, the drive If possible, use Roadside
signs (falling rocks area, winding wheels will spin and polish the Assistance. See Roadside
roads, long grades, passing or surface under the tires even more. Assistance Program on page 135.
no-passing zones) and take To get help and keep everyone in
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) the vehicle safe:
appropriate action. improves vehicle stability during
hard stops on slippery roads, but
flashers.

. Tie a red cloth to an outside If it takes some time for help to
mirror. WARNING (Continued) arrive, now and then when you run
the engine, push the accelerator
. Fully open the air outlets on
{ WARNING or under the instrument
pedal slightly so the engine runs
faster than the idle speed. This
Snow can trap engine exhaust panel. keeps the battery charged to restart
under the vehicle. This may . Adjust the climate control the vehicle and to signal for help
cause exhaust gases to get system to a setting that with the headlamps. Do this as little
inside. Engine exhaust contains circulates the air inside the as possible to save fuel.
carbon monoxide (CO) which vehicle and set the fan speed
cannot be seen or smelled. It can to the highest setting. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck
cause unconsciousness and even Climate Control Systems in
the Index. Slowly and cautiously spin the
death. wheels to free the vehicle when
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: For more information about stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
carbon monoxide, see Engine
. Clear away snow from around If stuck too severely for the traction
Exhaust on page 920.
the base of your vehicle, system to free the vehicle, turn the
especially any that is blocking traction system off and use the
the exhaust pipe. To save fuel, run the engine for only rocking method. See Traction
short periods as needed to warm Control System (TCS) on
. Check again from time to
the vehicle and then shut the engine page 928.
time to be sure snow does
off and close the window most of
not collect there.
. Open a window about 5 cm
the way to save heat. Repeat this
until help arrives but only when you
{ WARNING
(2 in) on the side of the feel really uncomfortable from the If the vehicle's tires spin at high
vehicle that is away from the cold. Moving about to keep warm speed, they can explode, and you
wind to bring in fresh air. also helps. or others could be injured. The
(Continued) (Continued)
the vehicle out after a few tries, it

WARNING (Continued) might need to be towed out. If the { WARNING
vehicle does need to be towed out,
vehicle can overheat, causing an see Towing the Vehicle on Do not load the vehicle any
engine compartment fire or other page 1077. heavier than the Gross
damage. Spin the wheels as little Vehicle Weight Rating
as possible and avoid going Vehicle Load Limits (GVWR), or either the
above 56 km/h (35 mph). maximum front or rear Gross
It is very important to know how Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
much weight the vehicle can This can cause systems to
Rocking the Vehicle to Get
carry. This weight is called the break and change the way the
it Out
vehicle capacity weight and vehicle handles. This could
Turn the steering wheel left and includes the weight of all
right to clear the area around the cause loss of control and a
occupants, cargo, and all crash. Overloading can also
front wheels. Turn off any traction nonfactory-installed options.
system. Shift back and forth shorten the life of the vehicle.
Two labels on the vehicle show
between R (Reverse) and a low
forward gear, spinning the wheels how much weight it may
as little as possible. To prevent properly carry: the Tire and
transmission wear, wait until the Loading Information label and
wheels stop spinning before shifting the Certification label.
gears. Release the accelerator
pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transmission is in gear.
Slowly spinning the wheels in the
forward and reverse directions
causes a rocking motion that could
free the vehicle. If that does not get
Tire and Loading Information The Tire and Loading 2. Determine the combined
Label Information label also shows the weight of the driver and
tire size of the original passengers that will be riding
equipment tires (3) and the in your vehicle.
recommended cold tire inflation 3. Subtract the combined
pressures (4). For more weight of the driver and
information on tires and inflation passengers from XXX kg or
see Tires on page 1039 and XXX lbs.
Tire Pressure on page 1047.
4. The resulting figure equals
There is also important loading
the available amount of cargo
information on the Certification
and luggage load capacity.
label. It tells you the Gross
For example, if the XXX
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
amount equals 1400 lbs and
Label Example and the Gross Axle Weight
there will be five 150 lb
Rating (GAWR) for the front and
A vehicle-specific Tire and passengers in your vehicle,
rear axle. See Certification
Loading Information label is the amount of available cargo
Label later in this section.
attached to the vehicle's center and luggage load capacity is
pillar (B-pillar). The Tire and Steps for Determining Correct 650 lbs (1400 750 (5 x 150)
Loading Information label shows Load Limit = 650 lbs).
the number of occupant seating 1. Locate the statement The 5. Determine the combined
positions (1), and the maximum combined weight of weight of luggage and cargo
vehicle capacity weight (2) in occupants and cargo should being loaded on the vehicle.
kilograms and pounds. never exceed XXX kg or That weight may not safely
XXX lbs on your vehicle's
placard.
exceed the available cargo

and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing
a trailer, the load from your
trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
Example 1 Example 2
This vehicle is neither designed
nor intended to tow a trailer. 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 1 = 453 kg Example 2 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs).
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @
68 kg (150 lbs) 2 = 136 kg 68 kg (150 lbs) 5 = 340 kg
(300 lbs). (750 lbs).
3. Available Occupant and 3. Available Cargo Weight =
Cargo Weight = 317 kg 113 kg (250 lbs).
(700 lbs).
seating positions. The combined fuel, and cargo. Never exceed

weight of the driver, passengers, the GVWR for the vehicle, or the
and cargo should never exceed Gross Axle Weight Rating
the vehicle's capacity weight. (GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.
Certification Label
And, if there is a heavy load, it
should be spread out. See
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit earlier in this
section.
Example 3 { WARNING
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 3 = 453 kg Do not load the vehicle any
(1,000 lbs). heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ (GVWR), or either the
91 kg (200 lbs) 5 = 453 kg Label Example maximum front or rear Gross
(1,000 lbs). A vehicle-specific Certification Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
3. Available Cargo Weight = label is attached to the vehicle's This can cause systems to
0 kg (0 lbs). center pillar (B-pillar). The label break and change the way the
tells the gross weight capacity of vehicle handles. This could
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and cause loss of control and a
Loading Information label for the vehicle, called the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). crash. Overloading can also
specific information about the shorten the life of the vehicle.
vehicle's capacity weight and The GVWR includes the weight
of the vehicle, all occupants,
If you put things inside the Starting and

vehicle like suitcases, tools, WARNING (Continued)
packages, or anything Operating
. Never stack heavier
else they will go as fast as the things, like suitcases,
vehicle goes. If you have to stop New Vehicle Break-In
inside the vehicle so that
or turn quickly, or if there is a some of them are above Notice: The vehicle does not
crash, they will keep going. the tops of the seats. need an elaborate break-in. But it
will perform better in the long run
{ WARNING . Do not leave an
unsecured child restraint
if you follow these guidelines:
. Do not drive at any one
Things inside the vehicle can in the vehicle. constant speed, fast or slow,
strike and injure people in a . Secure loose items in the for the first 805 km (500 mi).
sudden stop or turn, or in a vehicle. Do not make full-throttle
crash. starts. Avoid downshifting to
. Do not leave a seat folded brake or slow the vehicle.
. Put things in the cargo down unless needed.
area of the vehicle. In the . Avoid making hard stops for
cargo area, put them as the first 322 km (200 mi) or
far forward as possible. so. During this time the new
brake linings are not yet
Try to spread the weight broken in. Hard stops with
evenly. new linings can mean
(Continued) premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this
breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake
linings.
Following breakin, engine speed This position locks the steering 4. Set the parking brake. See
and load can be gradually wheel, ignition, and transmission. Parking Brake on page 926.
increased. Do not turn the engine off when the
Ignition Positions
vehicle is moving. This will cause a { WARNING
loss of power assist in the brake
and steering systems and disable Turning off the vehicle while
the airbags. moving may cause loss of power
assist in the brake and steering
If the vehicle must be shut off in an systems and disable the airbags.
emergency: While driving, only shut the
1. Brake using a firm and steady vehicle off in an emergency.
pressure. Do not pump the
brakes repeatedly. This may
deplete power assist, requiring If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,
increased brake pedal force. and must be shut off while driving,
turn the ignition to ACC/
2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral). ACCESSORY.
This can be done while the
vehicle is moving. After shifting Notice: Using a tool to force the
to N (Neutral), firmly apply the key to turn in the ignition could
The ignition switch has four different cause damage to the switch or
positions. brakes and steer the vehicle to a
safe location. break the key. Use the correct
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition key, make sure it is all the way in,
must be in ON/RUN and the regular 3. Come to a complete stop. Shift and turn it only with your hand.
brake pedal applied. to P (Park) with an automatic If the key cannot be turned by
transmission, or Neutral with a hand, see your dealer.
1 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/ manual transmission. Turn the
OFF): When the vehicle is stopped, ignition to LOCK/OFF.
turn the ignition switch to LOCK/
OFF to turn the engine off.
2 (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is the 4 (START): This is the position that Vehicles with an automatic
position in which things like the starts the engine. When the engine transmission are equipped with an
radio and the windshield wipers can starts, release the key. The ignition electronic key lock release system.
be operated when the engine is off. switch returns to ON/RUN for This system is to prevent ignition
3 (ON/RUN): This position can be driving. key removal unless the shift lever is
used to operate the electrical A warning tone will sound when the in P (Park).
accessories and to display some driver door is opened, the ignition is The key lock release will not work if
instrument cluster warning and in ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/ the battery is charged less than
indicator lights. This position can OFF, and the key is in the ignition. 9 volts, or uncharged. Try charging
also be used for service and If the ignition becomes difficult to or jump starting the battery. See
diagnostics, and to verify the proper turn, see Keys on page 21. Jump Starting on page 1074.
operation of the malfunction If charging or jump starting the
indicator lamp as may be required Key Lock Release
battery does not work, there is a
for emission inspection purposes. manual key lock release. Locate the
The switch stays in this position hole below the ignition lock. Insert a
when the engine is running. tool or key into the opening. Locate
If you leave the key in the ACC/ the lever, and press it toward the
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position steering wheel while removing the
with the engine off, the battery could key from the ignition.
be drained. You may not be able to
start the vehicle if the battery is
allowed to drain for an extended
period of time.
Starting the Engine Starting Procedure Notice: Holding the key in START
for longer than 15 seconds at a
Automatic Transmission 1. With your foot off the accelerator
time will cause the battery to be
pedal, turn the ignition to START.
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or drained much sooner. And the
When the engine cranks, let go
N (Neutral). The engine will not start excessive heat can damage the
of the key. The idle speed will go
in any other position. To restart the starter motor. Wait about
down as the engine gets warm.
engine when the vehicle is already 15 seconds between each try to
moving, use N (Neutral) only. The vehicle has a help avoid draining the battery or
Computer-Controlled Cranking damaging the starter.
Notice: Do not try to shift to System. It assists in starting the
P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. 2. If the engine does not start, wait
engine and protects
If you do, you could damage the about 15 seconds and try again.
components. If the ignition key is
transmission. Shift to P (Park) Wait about 15 seconds between
turned to START and then
only when the vehicle is stopped. each try.
released when the engine
begins cranking, the engine will When the engine has run about
Manual Transmission continue cranking for a 10 seconds to warm up, the
The shift lever should be in Neutral few seconds or until the engine vehicle is ready to be driven. Do
and the parking brake engaged. starts. If the engine does not not run the engine at high speed
Hold the clutch pedal to the floor start and the key is held in when it is cold.
and start the engine. The vehicle START, cranking will be stopped If the weather is below freezing
will not start if the clutch pedal is not after 15 seconds to prevent (0C or 32F), let the engine run
all the way down. damage. To prevent gear for a few minutes to warm up.
damage, cranking is not allowed
if the engine is running. Engine 3. If the engine still will not start,
cranking can be stopped by or starts but then stops, it could
turning the ignition key to ACC/ be flooded with too much
ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF. gasoline. Try pushing the
accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and holding it there as
you hold the key in START for

about three seconds. If the { WARNING
vehicle starts briefly but then
stops again, do the same thing, Plugging the cord into an
but this time keep the pedal ungrounded outlet could cause an
down for five or six seconds. electrical shock. Also, the wrong
This clears the extra gasoline kind of extension cord could
from the engine. overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug
Notice: If you add electrical parts
the cord into a properly grounded
or accessories, you could change
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
the way the engine operates. Any
resulting damage would not be If the cord will not reach, use a
covered by the vehicle warranty. heavy-duty three-prong extension
2. Open the hood and unwrap the
See Add-On Electrical Equipment cord rated for at least 15 amps.
electrical cord. The cord is
on page 938. located in the driver side of the
engine compartment, near the 4. Before starting the engine, be
Engine Heater battery. It is shipped from the sure to unplug and store the
factory with a tie holding it in cord as it was before to keep it
The engine heater can provide
place. Use care in removing the away from moving engine parts.
easier starting and better fuel
tie so that the cord is not If you do not it could be
economy during engine warm-up in
damaged. damaged.
cold weather conditions at or below
18C (0F). Vehicles with an 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded The length of time the heater should
engine heater should be plugged in 110-volt AC outlet. remain plugged in depends on
at least four hours before starting. several factors. Ask a dealer in the
area where you will be parking the
1. Turn off the engine.
vehicle for the best advice on this.
Retained Accessory Shifting Into Park Leaving the Vehicle with the
Power (RAP) (Automatic Transmission) Engine Running (Automatic
Transmission)
These vehicle accessories may be 1. Hold the brake pedal down and
used for up to 10 minutes after the set the parking brake. See
engine is turned off: Parking Brake on page 926. { WARNING
. Audio System 2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) It can be dangerous to leave the
by pressing the button on the vehicle with the engine running.
. Power Windows
shift lever and pushing the lever It could overheat and catch fire.
. Sunroof all the way toward the front of
It is dangerous to get out of the
The power windows and sunroof will the vehicle.
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
continue to work for up to 3. Turn the ignition key to in P (Park) with the parking brake
10 minutes or until any door is LOCK/OFF. firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
opened.
4. Remove the key and take it with Do not leave the vehicle when the
The radio will work when the key is you. If you can leave the vehicle engine is running. If you have left
in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. with the ignition key in your the engine running, the vehicle
Once the key is turned from ON/ hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
RUN to LOCK/OFF, the radio will can move suddenly. You or others
continue to work for 10 minutes after could be injured. To be sure the
the last input (button press, knob vehicle will not move, even when
turn) to the radio is detected. you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
It is possible to turn the radio back move the shift lever to P (Park).
on at any time after it has timed out See Shifting Into Park (Automatic
using the Power knob. The radio will
Transmission) on page 918.
be functional for 10 minutes after the
last input (button press, knob turn)
to the radio is detected.
If you have to leave the vehicle with the driver seat. To find out how, see The shift lock control is always
the engine running, be sure the Shifting Into Park (Automatic functional except in the case of an
vehicle is in P (Park) and the Transmission) in this section. uncharged or low voltage (less than
parking brake is firmly set before When you are ready to drive, move 9volt) battery.
you leave it. After you have moved the shift lever out of P (Park) before If the vehicle has an uncharged
the shift lever into P (Park), hold the you release the parking brake. battery or a battery with low voltage,
brake pedal down. Then see if you try charging or jump starting the
can move the shift lever away from If torque lock does occur, you may
need to have another vehicle push battery. See Jump Starting on
P (Park) without first pushing the page 1074.
button on the shift lever. If you can, yours a little uphill to take some of
it means that the shift lever was not the pressure from the parking pawl To shift out of P (Park):
fully locked into P (Park). in the transmission, so you can pull 1. Apply the brake pedal.
the shift lever out of P (Park).
Torque Lock (Automatic 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
Transmission) Shifting out of Park 3. Press the shift lever button.
If you are parking on a hill and you (Automatic Transmission) 4. Move the shift lever to the
do not shift your transmission into desired position.
P (Park) properly, the weight of the This vehicle is equipped with a shift
vehicle may put too much force on lock control. The shift lock control is If still unable to shift out of P (Park):
the parking pawl in the designed to:
1. Fully release the shift lever
transmission. You may find it difficult . Prevent ignition key removal button.
to pull the shift lever out of P (Park). unless the shift lever is in
This is called torque lock. P (Park) with the shift lever 2. Hold the brake pedal down and
To prevent torque lock, set the button fully released. press the shift lever button
parking brake and then shift into again.
. Prevent movement of the shift
P (Park) properly before you leave 3. Move the shift lever to the
lever out of P (Park) unless the
ignition is in ON/RUN and the desired position.
brake pedal is applied.
If you still cannot move the shift Parking over Things Engine Exhaust
lever from P (Park), consult your
dealer or a professional towing
That Burn
service. { WARNING
The doors may lock when shifting
{ WARNING Engine exhaust contains carbon
from P (Park). See Automatic Door Things that can burn could touch monoxide (CO) which cannot be
Locks on page 27. hot exhaust parts under the seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
vehicle and ignite. Do not park can cause unconsciousness and
Parking over papers, leaves, dry grass, even death.
If the vehicle has a manual or other things that can burn. Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
transmission, before getting out of
the vehicle, move the shift lever into
. The vehicle idles in areas
R (Reverse) if parking on a downhill with poor ventilation (parking
slope. On a level surface or an garages, tunnels, deep snow
uphill slope, use 1 (First) gear. that may block underbody
Firmly apply the parking brake. Turn airflow or tail pipes).
the wheels toward the curb for a . The exhaust smells or
downhill slope, or away from the sounds strange or different.
curb for an uphill slope. Once the . The exhaust system leaks
shift lever has been placed into gear
due to corrosion or damage.
with the clutch pedal pressed in,
turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF, . The vehicle exhaust system
remove the key, and release the has been modified, damaged,
clutch. or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Running the Vehicle Automatic
While Parked Transmission
. There are holes or openings
It is better not to park with the
in the vehicle body from
engine running.
damage or aftermarket
modifications that are not If the vehicle is left with the engine
completely sealed. running, follow the proper steps to
be sure the vehicle will not move.
If unusual fumes are detected or
See Shifting Into Park (Automatic
if it is suspected that exhaust is Transmission) on page 918 and
coming into the vehicle: Engine Exhaust on page 920. If the
. Drive it only with the windows vehicle has a manual transmission,
completely down. see Parking on page 920.
. Have the vehicle repaired
immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed P (Park): This position locks the
area such as a garage or a front wheels. It is the best position
building that has no fresh air to use when you start the engine
ventilation. because the vehicle cannot move
easily.
ease pressure on the shift lever and

{ WARNING push the shift lever all the way into { WARNING
P (Park) as you maintain brake
It is dangerous to get out of the application. Then move the shift Shifting into a drive gear while the
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully lever into another gear. See Shifting engine is running at high speed is
in P (Park) with the parking brake out of Park (Automatic dangerous. Unless your foot is
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Transmission) on page 919. firmly on the brake pedal, the
Do not leave the vehicle when the vehicle could move very rapidly.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to You could lose control and hit
engine is running. If you have left back up.
the engine running, the vehicle people or objects. Do not shift
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) into a drive gear while the engine
can move suddenly. You or others
while the vehicle is moving is running at high speed.
could be injured. To be sure the forward could damage the
vehicle will not move, even when transmission. The repairs would
you are on fairly level ground, not be covered by the vehicle Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or
always set the parking brake and warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only N (Neutral) with the engine
move the shift lever to P (Park). after the vehicle is stopped. running at high speed may
See Shifting Into Park (Automatic damage the transmission. The
To rock the vehicle back and forth to repairs would not be covered by
Transmission) on page 918.
get out of snow, ice, or sand without the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
damaging the transmission, see If engine is not running at high
Make sure the shift lever is fully in the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 98. speed when shifting the vehicle.
P (Park) before starting the engine.
N (Neutral): In this position, the
The vehicle has a shift lock control.
engine does not connect with the
You must fully apply the brake pedal
wheels. To restart the engine when
then press the shift lever button
the vehicle is already moving, use
before you can shift from P (Park)
N (Neutral) only. Also, use
while the ignition key is in ON/RUN.
N (Neutral) when the vehicle is
If you cannot shift out of P (Park),
being towed.
D (Drive): This position is for position, the vehicle will While using manual mode, the
normal driving. It provides the best automatically shift into transmission will have firmer shifting
fuel economy. If you need more 1 (First) gear. and sportier performance. You can
power for passing, and you are: use this for sport driving or when
. Going less than 56 km/h climbing hills to stay in gear longer
(35 mph), push the accelerator or to downshift for more power or
pedal about halfway down. engine braking.
. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) or The transmission will only allow you
more, push the accelerator all to shift into gears appropriate for the
the way down. vehicle speed and engine
revolutions per minute (rpm):
M (Manual Mode): This position,
allows you to change gears similar
. The transmission will not
to a manual transmission. If the automatically shift to the next
vehicle has this feature, see higher gear if the vehicle speed
Manual Mode following. or engine rpm is too low.
. The transmission will not allow
2. Press the + (plus) end of the
Manual Mode button on the side of the shift shifting to the next lower gear if
lever to upshift, or push the the vehicle speed or engine rpm
To use this feature: is too high.
(minus) end of the button to
1. Move the shift lever from downshift.
D (Drive) rearward to
M (Manual Mode). The Driver Information Center (DIC)
in the instrument cluster will change
While driving in manual mode, from the currently displayed
the transmission will remain in message to the letter M, for
the driver selected gear. When Manual position, and a number
coming to a stop in the manual indicating the requested gear.
Manual Transmission 1 (First): Press the clutch pedal

and shift into 1 (First). Then, slowly
To stop, let up on the accelerator
pedal and press the brake pedal.
let up on the clutch pedal as you Just before the vehicle stops, press
press the accelerator pedal. the clutch pedal and the brake
You can shift into 1 (First) when pedal, and shift to Neutral.
going less than 32 km/h (20 mph). Neutral: Use this position when
If you have come to a complete stop you start or idle the engine.
and it is hard to shift into 1 (First),
put the shift lever in Neutral and let
up on the clutch. Press the clutch
pedal back down. Then shift into
1 (First).
2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal
as you let up on the accelerator
The vehicle may be equipped with a pedal and shift into 2 (Second).
fivespeed or sixspeed manual Then, slowly let up on the clutch
transmission. pedal as you press the accelerator
pedal.
Notice: Shifting the vehicle
initially into any gear other than 3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and
1 (First) or R (Reverse) can 6 (Sixth): Shift into 3 (Third),
damage the clutch. Shift the 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and 6 (Sixth) (if
R (Reverse): To back up, press
manual transmission in the equipped) the same way as for
down the clutch pedal, lift up the
proper sequence, and time the 2 (Second). Slowly let up on the
ring on the shift lever, and shift into
gear shifting with the accelerator clutch pedal as you press the
R (Reverse). Let up on the clutch
to avoid revving the engine and accelerator pedal.
pedal slowly while pressing the
damaging the clutch. accelerator pedal.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) UpShift Light Brakes

while the vehicle is moving
forward could damage the
transmission. The repairs would Antilock Brake
not be covered by the vehicle System (ABS)
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
after the vehicle is stopped.
System (ABS), an advanced
Shift Speeds electronic braking system that helps
Vehicles equipped with a manual prevent a braking skid.
transmission may have an up-shift
{ WARNING light. This light indicates when to
When the vehicle begins to drive
away, ABS checks itself.
If you skip a gear when you shift to the next higher gear for A momentary motor or clicking noise
downshift, you could lose control better fuel economy. might be heard while this test is
of the vehicle. You could injure For the best fuel economy, going on, and it might even be
yourself or others. Do not shift accelerate slowly and shift when the noticed that the brake pedal moves
down more than one gear at a light comes on, and if the weather, a little. This is normal.
time when you downshift. road, and traffic conditions allow.
It is normal for the light to go on and
off if the accelerator position
changes quickly. Ignore the light
during downshifts.
If there is a problem with ABS, this

warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 516.
If driving safely on a wet road and it suddenly slows or stops. Always Parking Brake
becomes necessary to slam on the leave enough room up ahead to
brakes and continue braking to stop, even with ABS.
avoid a sudden obstacle, a
computer senses that the wheels Using ABS
are slowing down. If one of the Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
wheels is about to stop rolling, the the brake pedal down firmly and let
computer will separately work the ABS work. You might hear the ABS
brakes at each wheel. pump or motor operating and feel
ABS can change the brake pressure the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
to each wheel, as required, faster normal.
than any driver could. This can help Braking in Emergencies
the driver steer around the obstacle
while braking hard. ABS allows the driver to steer and
brake at the same time. In many
As the brakes are applied, the emergencies, steering can help To set the parking brake, hold the
computer keeps receiving updates more than even the very best brake pedal down and pull up on the
on wheel speed and controls braking. parking brake lever. If the ignition is
braking pressure accordingly. on, the brake system warning light
Remember: ABS does not change will come on. See Brake System
the time needed to get a foot up to Warning Light on page 515.
the brake pedal or always decrease To release the parking brake, hold
stopping distance. If you get too the brake pedal down. Pull the
close to the vehicle in front of you, parking brake lever up until you can
there will not be enough time to press the release button. Hold the
apply the brakes if that vehicle release button in as you move the
brake lever all the way down.
Notice: Driving with the parking Minor brake pedal pulsation or HSA holds the braking pressure to
brake on can overheat the brake pedal movement during this time is ensure that there is no rolling. The
system and cause premature normal and the driver should brakes will automatically release
wear or damage to brake system continue to apply the brake pedal as when the accelerator pedal is
parts. Make sure that the parking the driving situation dictates. The applied within the two-second
brake is fully released and the brake assist feature will window. It will not activate if the
brake warning light is off before automatically disengage when the vehicle is in a drive gear and facing
driving. brake pedal is released or brake downhill, or if the vehicle is facing
pedal pressure is quickly uphill and in R (Reverse).
Brake Assist decreased.
This vehicle has a brake assist
feature designed to assist the driver
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
in stopping or decreasing vehicle This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist
speed in emergency driving (HSA) feature, which may be useful
conditions. This feature uses the when the vehicle is stopped on a
stability system hydraulic brake grade. This feature is designed to
control module to supplement the prevent the vehicle from rolling,
power brake system under either forward or rearward, during
conditions where the driver has vehicle drive off. After the driver
quickly and forcefully applied the completely stops and holds the
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly vehicle in a complete standstill on a
stop or slow down the vehicle. The grade, HSA will be automatically
stability system hydraulic brake activated. During the transition
control module increases brake period between when the driver
pressure at each corner of the releases the brake pedal and starts
vehicle until the ABS activates. to accelerate to drive off on a grade,
Ride Control Systems If d still comes on and stays on at a

speed above 20 km/h (13 mph), see
Traction Control your dealer for service.
System (TCS) A chime may also sound when the
light comes on steady.
The vehicle has a Traction Control
System (TCS) that limits wheel spin. TCS/StabiliTrak Light Notice: Do not repeatedly brake
On a front-wheel-drive vehicle, the d flashes to indicate that the or accelerate heavily when TCS is
system operates if it senses that traction control system is active. off. The vehicle's driveline could
one or both of the front wheels are be damaged.
If there is a problem detected with
spinning or beginning to lose
TCS, a message may be displayed
traction. When this happens, the
on the Driver Information Center
system brakes the spinning
(DIC). See Vehicle Messages on
wheel(s), and/or reduces engine
page 525. When this message is
power to limit wheel spin.
displayed and d comes on and
The system may be heard or felt stays on, the vehicle is safe to drive
while it is working, but this is but the system is not operational.
normal. Driving should be adjusted
TCS is on whenever the vehicle is accordingly.
started. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road If d comes on and stays on, reset
conditions, the system should the system:
always be left on. But, TCS can be 1. Stop the vehicle.
turned off if needed.
2. Turn the engine off and wait
15 seconds.
3. Start the engine.
accordingly. Press and release the computer controlled system that

TCS/StabiliTrak button again to turn assists with directional control of the
the system back on. vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
It may be necessary to turn the StabiliTrak activates when the
system off if the vehicle gets stuck computer senses a difference
in sand, mud, or snow and rocking between the intended path, and the
the vehicle is required. See If the direction the vehicle is actually
Vehicle Is Stuck on page 98. See traveling. StabiliTrak selectively
Winter Driving on page 97 for applies braking pressure at any one
information on using TCS when of the vehicle's brakes to help steer
driving in snowy or icy conditions. the vehicle in the intended direction.
If cruise control is being used when StabiliTrak is on automatically
TCS/StabiliTrak Button
TCS activates, cruise control will whenever the vehicle is started. To
automatically disengage. Press the assist with directional control of the
appropriate cruise control button to vehicle, the system should always
reengage when road conditions be left on.
allow. See Cruise Control on
page 931.
Adding accessories can affect the
TCS Off Light
vehicle performance. See
TCS can be turned off by pressing Accessories and Modifications on
and releasing the TCS/StabiliTrak page 103.
button g. When TCS is turned off, TCS/StabiliTrak Light
the TCS Off light i comes on and StabiliTrak System When the stability control system
the system will not limit wheel spin. The vehicle has a vehicle stability activates, d flashes on the
Driving should be adjusted enhancement system called instrument panel. This also occurs
StabiliTrak. It is an advanced when traction control is activated.
A noise may be heard or vibration the instrument panel. TCS will also
may be felt in the brake pedal. This be turned off. When StabiliTrak is
is normal. Continue to steer the turned off, the system will not assist
vehicle in the intended direction. with directional control of the vehicle
If there is a problem detected with or limit wheel spin. Driving should
StabiliTrak, a message is displayed be adjusted accordingly. Press and
on the Driver Information Center release the TCS/StabiliTrak button
(DIC). See Vehicle Messages on again to turn both systems back on.
page 525. When this message is If cruise control is being used when
displayed and/or d comes on and StabiliTrak activates, cruise control
stays on, the vehicle is safe to drive will automatically disengage. Press
but the system is not operational. the appropriate cruise control button
Driving should be adjusted TCS/StabiliTrak Button to reengage when road conditions
accordingly. allow. See Cruise Control on
page 931.
If d comes on and stays on, reset
the system:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and wait StabiliTrak Off TCS Off Light
15 seconds. Light
3. Start the engine.
StabiliTrak can be turned off if
If d still comes on and stays on at a needed by pressing and holding the
speed above 20 km/h (13 mph), see TCS/StabiliTrak button g until the
your dealer for service. Traction Off light i and the
StabiliTrak Off light g come on in
Cruise Control { WARNING

For vehicles with cruise control, the
vehicle can maintain a speed of Cruise control can be dangerous
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more where you cannot drive safely at
without keeping your foot on the a steady speed. So, do not use
accelerator. Cruise control does not the cruise control on winding
work at speeds below 40 km/h roads or in heavy traffic.
(25 mph). Cruise control can be dangerous
If the brakes are applied, the cruise on slippery roads. On such roads,
control shuts off. fast changes in tire traction can
If the vehicle's Traction Control cause excessive wheel slip, and
System (TCS) or StabiliTrak system you could lose control. Do not use
begins to limit wheel spin while cruise control on slippery roads. 1 (On/Off): Press to turn the
cruise control system on and off.
using cruise control, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. RES/+ (Resume/Accelerate):
See Traction Control System (TCS) Move the thumbwheel up to resume
on page 928 or StabiliTrak System a previously set speed or to
on page 929. When road conditions accelerate.
allow you to safely use it again, the SET/ (Set/Coast): Move the
cruise control can be turned thumbwheel down to set a speed or
back on. to make the vehicle decelerate.
* (Cancel): Press to disengage
cruise control without erasing the
set speed from memory.
Setting Cruise Control briefly. The vehicle returns to the

. To slow down in small amounts,
speed selected previously and stays move the thumbwheel toward
If 1 is on when not in use, it could there. SET/ briefly. Each time this is
get bumped and go into cruise when done, the vehicle goes about
not desired. Keep 1 off when cruise Increasing Speed While Using 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.
Cruise Control
control is not being used. Passing Another Vehicle While
If the cruise control system is Using Cruise Control
To set cruise control:
already activated:
1. Press 1. Use the accelerator pedal to
. Move the thumbwheel up toward increase the vehicle speed. When
2. Get to the speed desired. RES/+ and hold it until the you take your foot off the pedal, the
desired speed is reached, then vehicle slows down to the previous
3. Move the thumbwheel down to release it.
SET/- and release it. set cruise control speed.
. To increase the speed in small
4. Take your foot off the accelerator Using Cruise Control on Hills
amounts, move the thumbwheel
pedal. up toward RES/+ briefly and How well cruise control works on
Resuming a Set Speed then release it. Each time this is hills depends on the vehicle speed,
done, the vehicle goes about load, and the steepness of the hills.
If the cruise control is set at a 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster. When going up steep hills, you
desired speed and then the brakes might have to step on the
or clutch for manual transmissions Reducing Speed While Using accelerator pedal to maintain the
are applied, the cruise control is Cruise Control vehicle speed. When going
disengaged without erasing the set If the cruise control system is downhill, you might have to brake or
speed from memory. already activated: shift to a lower gear to maintain the
Once the vehicle reaches about vehicle speed. When the brakes are
. Move the thumbwheel toward
40 km/h (25 mph) or more, move the applied, cruise control is
SET/ and hold until the desired
thumbwheel up toward RES/+ disengaged.
lower speed is reached, then
release it.
Ending Cruise Control Fuel

There are three ways to end cruise
Use of the recommended fuel is an
control:
important part of the proper
. To disengage cruise control, maintenance of this vehicle. To help
step lightly on the brake pedal or keep the engine clean and maintain
clutch for manual transmission. optimum vehicle performance, we
recommend the use of gasoline
. Press * on the steering wheel. advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
. To turn off cruise control, press Gasoline.
1 on the steering wheel. Look for the TOP TIER label on the
Erasing Speed Memory fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets
enhanced detergency standards
The cruise control set speed is developed by auto companies. A list Recommended Fuel
erased from memory if the 1 button of marketers providing TOP TIER Use regular unleaded gasoline with
is pressed or if the ignition is Detergent Gasoline can be found at a posted octane rating of 87 or
turned off. www.toptiergas.com. TOP TIER higher. If the octane rating is less
gasoline is only available in the U.S. than 87, an audible knocking noise,
and Canada. commonly referred to as spark
knock, might be heard when driving.
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated
at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. If heavy knocking is heard
when using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher, the engine
needs service.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, gasolines with MMT as they can Standards, the vehicle will operate
such as ethers and ethanol, as well reduce spark plug life and affect satisfactorily on fuels meeting
as reformulated gasolines are emission control system federal specifications, but emission
available in some cities. If these performance. The malfunction control system performance might
gasolines comply with the indicator lamp may turn on. If this be affected. The malfunction
previousely described specification, occurs, see your dealer for service. indicator lamp could turn on and the
then they are acceptable to use. vehicle might fail a smogcheck test.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and Gasoline Specifications See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
other fuels containing more than page 512. If this occurs, return to
15% ethanol must be used only in At a minimum, gasoline should meet your authorized dealer for diagnosis.
flex fuel vehicles. ASTM specification D 4814. Some If it is determined that the condition
gasolines contain an is caused by the type of fuel used,
octane-enhancing additive called
{ CAUTION methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
repairs might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
Do not use fuel containing
against the use of gasolines
methanol. It can corrode metal
containing MMT. See Fuel Additives
Fuels in Foreign
parts in the fuel system and also on page 935. Countries
damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be If planning to drive in countries
covered under the vehicle
California Fuel outside the U.S. or Canada, the
warranty. Requirements proper fuel might be hard to find.
Check regional auto club or fuel
If the vehicle is certified to meet retail brand websites for availability
Some gasolines that are not California Emissions Standards, it is in the country where driving. Never
reformulated for low emissions can designed to operate on fuels that use leaded gasoline, fuel containing
contain an octane-enhancing meet California specifications. See methanol, or any other fuel not
additive called the underhood emission control recommended. Costly repairs
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese label. If this fuel is not available in
tricarbonyl (MMT). Do not use states adopting California Emissions
caused by use of improper fuel marketers providing TOP TIER Notice: This vehicle was not
would not be covered by the vehicle Detergent Gasoline can be found at designed for fuel that contains
warranty. www.toptiergas.com. methanol. Do not use fuel
For customers who do not use TOP containing methanol. It can
Fuel Additives TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, corrode metal parts in the fuel
one bottle of Fuel System Treatment system and also damage plastic
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines and rubber parts. That damage
in the United States are now PLUS, part number 88861013,
added to the fuel tank at every would not be covered under the
required to contain additives that vehicle warranty.
help prevent engine and fuel system engine oil change, can help clean
deposits from forming, allowing the deposits from fuel injectors and Some gasolines that are not
emission control system to work intake valves. GM Fuel System reformulated for low emissions can
properly. In most cases, nothing Treatment PLUS is the only contain an octane-enhancing
should have to be added to the fuel. gasoline additive recommended by additive called
However, some gasolines contain General Motors. It is available at methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
only the minimum amount of your dealer. tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
additive required to meet U.S. Gasolines containing oxygenates, where you buy gasoline whether the
Environmental Protection Agency such as ethers and ethanol, and fuel contains MMT. We recommend
regulations. To help keep fuel reformulated gasolines might be against the use of such gasolines.
injectors and intake valves clean available in your area. We Fuels containing MMT can reduce
and avoid problems due to dirty recommend that you use these spark plug life and affect emission
injectors or valves, look for gasoline gasolines, if they comply with the control system performance. The
that is advertised as TOP TIER specifications described earlier. malfunction indicator lamp might
Detergent Gasoline. Look for the However, E85 (85% ethanol) and turn on. If this occurs, return to your
TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to other fuels containing more than dealer for service.
ensure gasoline meets enhanced 15% ethanol must not be used in
detergency standards developed by vehicles that were not designed for
the auto companies. A list of those fuels.
Filling the Tank WARNING (Continued)

surfaces as soon as possible. See
Washing the Vehicle in Exterior
Care on page 1080.
{ WARNING . Fuel can spray out if the fuel
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it
cap is opened too quickly.
Fuel vapors and fuel fires burn This spray can happen if the clockwise until it clicks. Make sure
violently and can cause injury or tank is nearly full, and is the cap is fully installed. The
death. more likely in hot weather. diagnostic system can determine if
Open the fuel cap slowly and the fuel cap has been left off or
. To help avoid injuries to you
wait for any hiss noise to stop improperly installed. This would
and others, read and follow
then unscrew the cap all allow fuel to evaporate into the
all the instructions on the fuel
the way atmosphere. See Malfunction
pump island.
Indicator Lamp on page 512.
. Turn off the engine when
The tethered fuel cap is located
refueling.
behind a hinged fuel door on the { WARNING
. Keep sparks, flames, and passenger side of the vehicle.
smoking materials away If a fire starts while you are
from fuel. To remove the fuel cap, turn it refueling, do not remove the
slowly counterclockwise. The fuel nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
. Do not leave the fuel pump cap has a spring in it; if the cap is shutting off the pump or by
unattended. released too soon, it will spring back notifying the station attendant.
. Do not reenter the vehicle to the right. Leave the area immediately.
while pumping fuel. Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not
. Keep children away from the top off or overfill the tank. Wait a Notice: If a new fuel cap is
fuel pump and never let few seconds after you have finished needed, be sure to get the right
children pump fuel. pumping before removing the type of cap from your dealer. The
nozzle. Clean fuel from painted wrong type of fuel cap might not
(Continued)
fit properly, might cause the
malfunction indicator lamp to Towing

light, and could damage the fuel WARNING (Continued)
tank and emissions system. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
. Place the nozzle inside the fill General Towing
page 512. opening of the container Information
before dispensing fuel, and
keep it in contact with the fill The vehicle is neither designed nor
Filling a Portable Fuel opening until filling is intended to tow a trailer.
Container complete.
. Fill the container no more
{ WARNING than 95% full to allow for
expansion.
Filling a portable fuel container
while it is in the vehicle can cause
. Do not smoke, light matches,
fuel vapors that can ignite either or use lighters while
by static electricity or other pumping fuel.
means. You or others could be . Avoid using cell phones or
badly burned and the vehicle other electronic devices.
could be damaged. Always:
. Use approved fuel
containers.
. Remove the container from
the vehicle, trunk, or pickup
bed before filling.
. Place the container on the
ground.
(Continued)
Conversions and
Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical
Equipment
Notice: Some electrical
equipment can damage the
vehicle or cause components to
not work and would not be
covered by the warranty. Always
check with your dealer before
adding electrical equipment.
Add-on equipment can drain the
vehicle's 12-volt battery, even if the
vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to add anything
electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 328 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 328.
Vehicle Care 10-1
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Vehicle Care Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Stoplamps, and Back-Up
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-31
General Information Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-24 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-31
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Automatic Transmission Shift
California Proposition Lock Control Function Electrical System
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Electrical System
California Perchlorate Ignition Transmission Lock Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Fuses and Circuit
Accessories and Park Brake and P (Park) Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-25 Engine Compartment Fuse
Wiper Blade Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Vehicle Checks Instrument Panel Fuse
Doing Your Own Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Headlamp Aiming
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Wheels and Tires
Engine Compartment Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Bulb Replacement All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-11 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Automatic Transmission Headlamps, Front Turn Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-41
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Signal and Parking Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Manual Transmission Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Tire Terminology and
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Fog Lamps (LS, LT, Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 and LTZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-13 Fog Lamps (RS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Tire Pressure Monitor
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-19
10-2 Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure Monitor Towing General Information

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49 Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Recreational Vehicle For service and parts needs, visit
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77 your dealer. You will receive
When It Is Time for New genuine GM parts and GM-trained
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 Appearance Care and supported service people.
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83 Genuine GM parts have one of
Different Size Tires and these marks:
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-58
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Storing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-73
Jump Starting California Proposition 65
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this
one, contain and/or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
Vehicle Care 10-3
cause cancer and birth defects or handling, emissions systems, Vehicle Checks
other reproductive harm. Engine aerodynamics, durability, and
exhaust, many parts and systems, electronic systems like antilock
many fluids, and some component brakes, traction control, and stability Doing Your Own
wear by-products contain and/or control. These accessories or Service Work
emit these chemicals. modifications could even cause
California Perchlorate
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
{ WARNING
Materials Requirements Damage to vehicle components It can be dangerous to work on
resulting from modifications or the your vehicle if you do not have
Certain types of automotive the proper knowledge, service
installation or use of nonGM
applications, such as airbag manual, tools, or parts. Always
certified parts, including control
initiators, safety belt pretensioners, follow owner manual procedures
module or software modifications, is
and lithium batteries contained in and consult the service manual
not covered under the terms of the
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters,
vehicle warranty and may affect for your vehicle before doing any
may contain perchlorate materials.
remaining warranty coverage for service work.
Special handling may be necessary.
affected parts.
For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ GM Accessories are designed to If doing some of your own service
perchlorate. complement and function with other work, use the proper service
systems on the vehicle. See your manual. It tells you much more
Accessories and dealer to accessorize the vehicle about how to service the vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories than this manual can. To order the
Modifications installed by a dealer technician. proper service manual, see Service
Adding nondealer accessories or Also, see Adding Equipment to the Publications Ordering Information
making modifications to the vehicle Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on on page 1311.
can affect vehicle performance and page 328.
safety, including such things as
airbags, braking, stability, ride and
10-4 Vehicle Care
This vehicle has an airbag system. Hood

Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Servicing the To open the hood:
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 328.
Keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date of
any service work performed. See
Maintenance Records on
page 1115.
Notice: Even small amounts of
contamination can cause damage
to vehicle systems. Do not allow 2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
contaminants to contact the move the secondary hood
fluids, reservoir caps, release lever toward the right
or dipsticks. side of the vehicle.
1. Pull the hood release handle
inside the vehicle. It is located
on the lower left side of the
instrument panel.
Vehicle Care 10-5
To close the hood:

1. Before closing the hood, be sure
all filler caps are on properly.
Then, lift the hood to relieve
pressure on the hood prop.
Remove the hood prop from the
slot in the underside of the hood
and return the prop to its
retainer. The prop rod must click
into place when returning it to
the retainer to prevent hood
damage.
3. Lift the hood and release the 2. Lower the hood 30 cm (12 in)
hood prop from its retainer, above the vehicle and release it
located in front of the engine so it fully latches. Check to
compartment. Securely place the make sure the hood is closed
hood prop into the slot on the and repeat the process if
underside of the hood. necessary.
10-6 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
1.4L L4 Engine
Vehicle Care 10-7
1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on

page 1013.
2. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine
Oil on page 109.
3. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of
View). See Cooling System on
page 1015.
4. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine
Oil on page 109.
5. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap. See Cooling
System on page 1015.
6. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir.
See Brakes on page 1021 and
Hydraulic Clutch on page 1013.
7. Battery on page 1023.
8. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on
page 1020.
9. Engine Compartment Fuse
Block on page 1033.
10-8 Vehicle Care
1.8L L4 Engine
Vehicle Care 10-9
1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on Engine Oil

page 1013.
To ensure proper engine
2. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine performance and long life, careful
Oil on page 109. attention must be paid to engine oil.
3. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of Following these simple, but
View). See Cooling System on important steps will help protect
your investment: If the engine oil pressure light
page 1015.
comes on, check the engine oil level
4. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine . Always use engine oil approved right away. The oil pressure light is
Oil on page 109. to the proper specification and of on the instrument cluster. See
the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil Pressure Light on
5. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Selecting the Right Engine Oil page 519. Check the engine oil
Pressure Cap. See Cooling
in this section. level regularly; this is an added
System on page 1015.
. Check the engine oil level reminder.
6. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir.
regularly and maintain the Checking Engine Oil
See Brakes on page 1021 and proper oil level. See Checking
Hydraulic Clutch on page 1013. Engine Oil and When to Add It is a good idea to check the engine
7. Battery on page 1023. Engine Oil in this section. oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
get an accurate reading, the oil
8. Engine Compartment Fuse . Change the engine oil at the must be warm and the vehicle must
Block on page 1033. appropriate time. See Engine Oil be on level ground. The engine oil
9. Windshield Washer Fluid Life System on page 1011. dipstick handle is a loop. See
Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on . Always dispose of engine oil Engine Compartment Overview on
page 1020. properly. See What to Do with page 106 for the location of the
Used Oil in this section. engine oil dipstick.
1. If the engine has been running
recently, turn off the engine and
allow several minutes for the oil
10-10 Vehicle Care
to drain back into the oil pan. If the oil is below the MIN See Engine Compartment Overview
Checking the oil level too soon (minimum) mark on the dipstick, add on page 106 for the location of the
after engine shutoff will not 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil engine oil fill cap.
provide an accurate oil level and then recheck the level. See Add enough oil to put the level
reading. Selecting the Right Engine Oil in somewhere in the proper operating
this section for an explanation of range. Push the dipstick all the way
{ WARNING what kind of oil to use. For engine
oil crankcase capacity, see
back in when through.
The engine oil dipstick handle Capacities and Specifications on Selecting the Right Engine Oil
may be hot; it could burn you. page 122.
Selecting the right engine oil
Use a towel or glove to touch the Notice: Do not add too much oil. depends on both the proper oil
dipstick handle. Oil levels above or below the specification and viscosity grade.
acceptable operating range See Recommended Fluids and
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it shown on the dipstick are harmful Lubricants on page 1112.
with a paper towel or cloth, then to the engine. If you find that you
have an oil level above the Specification
push it back in all the way.
Remove it again, keeping the tip operating range, i.e., the engine Use and ask for licensed engine oils
down, and check the level. has so much oil that the oil level with the dexos1 approved
gets above the upper mark that certification mark. Engine oils
When to Add Engine Oil shows the proper operating meeting the requirements for the
range, the engine could be vehicle should have the dexos1
damaged. You should drain out approved certification mark. This
the excess oil or limit driving of certification mark indicates that the
the vehicle and seek a service oil has been approved to the dexos1
professional to remove the specification.
excess amount of oil.
Vehicle Care 10-11
of the appropriate viscosity grade, containing used engine oil. See the
always select an oil of the correct manufacturer's warnings about the
specification. See Specification use and disposal of oil products.
earlier in this section for more Used oil can be a threat to the
information. environment. If you change your
Engine Oil Additives/Engine own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
Notice: Failure to use the Oil Flushes from the filter before disposal. Never
recommended engine oil or dispose of oil by putting it in the
equivalent can result in engine Do not add anything to the oil. The trash or pouring it on the ground,
damage not covered by the recommended oils with the dexos into sewers, or into streams or
vehicle warranty. Check with your specification and displaying the bodies of water. Recycle it by taking
dealer or service provider on dexos certification mark are all that it to a place that collects used oil.
whether the oil is approved to the is needed for good performance and
dexos1 specification. engine protection. Engine Oil Life System
Viscosity Grade Engine oil system flushes are not
recommended and could cause When to Change Engine Oil
SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity engine damage not covered by the This vehicle has a computer system
grade for the vehicle. Do not use vehicle warranty. that indicates when to change the
other viscosity grade oils such as engine oil and filter. This is based
SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50. What to Do with Used Oil on a combination of factors which
Cold Temperature Operation: In an Used engine oil contains certain include engine revolutions, engine
area of extreme cold, where the elements that can be unhealthy for temperature, and miles driven.
temperature falls below 29C your skin and could even cause Based on driving conditions, the
(20F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may be cancer. Do not let used oil stay on mileage at which an oil change is
used. An oil of this viscosity grade your skin for very long. Clean your indicated can vary considerably. For
will provide easier cold starting for skin and nails with soap and water, the oil life system to work properly,
the engine at extremely low or a good hand cleaner. Wash or the system must be reset every time
temperatures. When selecting an oil properly dispose of clothing or rags the oil is changed.
10-12 Vehicle Care
When the system has calculated How to Reset the Engine Oil
that oil life has been diminished, it Life System
indicates that an oil change is
necessary. A Code 82 (Change Reset the system whenever the
Engine Oil Soon) DIC message engine oil is changed so that the
comes on. See Vehicle Messages system can calculate the next
on page 525. Change the oil as engine oil change. To reset the
soon as possible within the next system:
1 000 km (600 mi). It is possible that, 1. Press the MENU button to show
if driving under the best conditions, Remaining Oil Life on the
the oil life system might indicate that display. This display shows an
an oil change is not necessary for estimate of the oils remaining
up to a year. The engine oil and useful life. If 99% is displayed,
filter must be changed at least once Be careful not to reset the oil life
that means that 99% of the
a year and, at this time, the system display accidentally at any time
current oil life remains.
must be reset. Your dealer has other than after the oil is changed.
2. To reset the engine oil life It cannot be reset accurately.
trained service people who will
system, press the SET/CLR
perform this work and reset the If the Code 82 (Change Engine Oil
button while the oil life display is
system. It is also important to check Soon) DIC message comes back on
active. After a few seconds,
the oil regularly over the course of when the vehicle is started, the
there will be a single chime and
an oil drain interval and keep it at engine oil life system has not reset.
the oil life will be reset to 100%.
the proper level. Repeat the procedure.
If the system is ever reset
accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)
since the last oil change.
Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.
Vehicle Care 10-13
Automatic Transmission Manual Transmission indicated on the reservoir cap. See

Engine Compartment Overview on
Fluid Fluid page 106 for reservoir location.
How to Check Automatic It is not necessary to check the
manual transmission fluid level. How to Check and Add Fluid
Transmission Fluid
A transmission fluid leak is the only Visually check the brake/clutch fluid
It is not necessary to check the reason for fluid loss. If a leak reservoir to make sure the fluid level
transmission fluid level. occurs, take the vehicle to your is at the MIN (minimum) line on the
A transmission fluid leak is the only dealer and have it repaired as soon side of the reservoir. The brake/
reason for fluid loss. If a leak as possible. See Recommended hydraulic clutch fluid system should
occurs, take the vehicle to your Fluids and Lubricants on page 1112 be closed and sealed.
dealer and have it repaired as soon for the proper fluid to use.
as possible. Do not remove the cap to check the
fluid level or to topoff the fluid level.
There is a special procedure for Hydraulic Clutch Remove the cap only when
checking and changing the necessary to add the proper fluid
For vehicles with a manual
transmission fluid. Because this until the level reaches the MIN line.
transmission, it is not necessary to
procedure is difficult, you should regularly check brake/clutch fluid
have this done at your dealer. unless there is a leak suspected. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Change the fluid and filter at the Adding fluid will not correct a leak.
The engine air cleaner/filter is
intervals listed in Maintenance A fluid loss in this system could
located in the engine compartment
Schedule on page 112, and be sure indicate a problem. Have the
on the passenger side of the
to use the fluid listed in system inspected and repaired.
vehicle. See Engine Compartment
Recommended Fluids and
When to Check and What Overview on page 106 for more
Lubricants on page 1112.
to Use information on location.
The common hydraulic clutch and
brake master cylinder fluid reservoir
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as
10-14 Vehicle Care
When to Inspect the Engine Air To inspect or replace the air cleaner/
Cleaner/Filter filter:
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
scheduled maintenance intervals.
page 112 for more information.
If you are driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at each
engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
1.8L L4 Engine
To inspect the engine air cleaner/
filter, remove the filter from the 1. Remove the two screws, tilt the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to 1.4L L4 Engine cover, and slide it out of the
release loose dust and dirt. If the assembly.
filter remains covered with dirt, a 2. Inspect or replace the engine air
new filter is required. cleaner/filter.
3. Lower the cover, slide it into the
assembly, then secure with the
two screws.
page 112 for replacement intervals.
Vehicle Care 10-15
Cooling System
{ WARNING
The cooling system allows the
Operating the engine with the air engine to maintain the correct
cleaner/filter off can cause you or working temperature.
others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is 1.8L L4 Engine

off, dirt can easily get into the 1. Engine Cooling Fan (Out
engine, which could damage it. of View)
Always have the air cleaner/filter
in place when you are driving. 2. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
1.4L L4 Engine Pressure Cap
1. Engine Cooling Fan (Out
of View) { WARNING
2. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and An electric engine cooling fan
Pressure Cap under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
10-16 Vehicle Care
Engine Coolant
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)
The cooling system in the vehicle is
Heater and radiator hoses, and filled with DEX-COOL engine mixture, the engine could get too
other engine parts, can be very coolant. This coolant is designed to hot but you would not get the
hot. Do not touch them. If you do, remain in the vehicle for 5 years or overheat warning. The engine
you can be burned. 240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever could catch fire and you or
occurs first. others could be burned. Use
Do not run the engine if there is a
leak. If you run the engine, it The following explains the cooling a 50/50 mixture of clean,
could lose all coolant. That could system and how to check and add drinkable water and DEX-COOL
cause an engine fire, and you coolant when it is low. If there is a coolant.
could be burned. Get any leak problem with engine overheating,
fixed before you drive the vehicle. see Engine Overheating on Use a 50/50 mixture of clean
page 1019. drinkable water and DEX-COOL
What to Use coolant. This mixture:
Notice: Using coolant other than
DEXCOOL can cause premature . Gives freezing protection down
engine, heater core, or radiator { WARNING to 37C (34F), outside
temperature.
corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant may require changing Adding only plain water or some . Gives boiling protection up to
sooner, at the first maintenance other liquid to the cooling system 129C (265F), engine
service after each 30,000 miles can be dangerous. Plain water temperature.
(50 000 km) or 24 months, and other liquids, can boil before
whichever occurs first. Any the proper coolant mixture will.
. Protects against rust and
repairs would not be covered by The coolant warning system is set corrosion.
the vehicle warranty. Always use for the proper coolant mixture. . Will not damage aluminum parts.
DEXCOOL (silicatefree) coolant With plain water or the wrong
in the vehicle.
. Helps keep the proper engine
(Continued) temperature.
Vehicle Care 10-17
Notice: If improper coolant It is normal to see coolant moving in If no problem is found, check to see
mixture, inhibitors, or additives the upper coolant hose return line if coolant is visible in the coolant
are used in the vehicle cooling when the engine is running. surge tank. If coolant is visible but
system, the engine could Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant level is not at the
overheat and be damaged. Too the coolant surge tank. If the coolant indicated level mark, add a
much water in the mixture can inside the coolant surge tank is 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
freeze and crack engine cooling boiling, do not do anything else until water and DEX-COOL coolant at the
parts. The repairs would not be it cools down. coolant surge tank, but be sure the
covered by the warranty. Use only cooling system, including the
the proper mixture of engine If coolant is visible but the coolant coolant surge tank pressure cap, is
coolant for the cooling system. level is not at or above the mark cool before you do it.
See Recommended Fluids and pointed to, add a 50/50 mixture of
Lubricants on page 1112. clean drinkable water and
DEX-COOL coolant.
{ WARNING
Never dispose of engine coolant by
putting it in the trash, pouring it on Be sure the cooling system is cool Steam and scalding liquids from a
the ground, or into sewers, streams, before this is done. hot cooling system can blow out
or bodies of water. Have the coolant and burn you badly. Never turn
If no coolant is visible in the coolant
changed by an authorized service the cap when the cooling system,
surge tank, add coolant as follows:
center, familiar with legal including the surge tank pressure
requirements regarding used How to Add Coolant to the cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling
coolant disposal. This will help Coolant Surge Tank system and surge tank pressure
protect the environment and your cap to cool.
Notice: This vehicle has a
health.
specific coolant fill procedure.
Checking Coolant Failure to follow this procedure
could cause the engine to
The vehicle must be on a level overheat and be severely
surface when checking the coolant damaged.
level.
10-18 Vehicle Care
a hiss, wait for that to stop. This

{ WARNING { WARNING will allow any pressure still left to
be vented out the
Adding only plain water or some You can be burned if you spill discharge hose.
other liquid to the cooling system coolant on hot engine parts.
can be dangerous. Plain water Coolant contains ethylene glycol 2. Keep turning the pressure cap
and other liquids, can boil before and it will burn if the engine parts slowly and remove it.
the proper coolant mixture will. are hot enough. Do not spill
The coolant warning system is set coolant on a hot engine.
for the proper coolant mixture.
With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too
hot but you would not get the
overheat warning. The engine
could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable 1.4L Engine Shown, 1.8L Engine
water and DEX-COOL coolant. Similar
1. Remove the coolant surge tank
Notice: In cold weather, water pressure cap when the cooling 3. Fill the coolant surge tank with
can freeze and crack the engine, system, including the coolant the proper DEX-COOL coolant
radiator, heater core and other surge tank pressure cap and mixture to the indicated
parts. Use the recommended upper radiator hose, is no level mark.
coolant and the proper coolant longer hot.
mixture.
Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise about
one-quarter of a turn. If you hear
Vehicle Care 10-19
4. With the coolant surge tank Engine Overheating If Steam Is Coming from the
pressure cap off, start the Engine Compartment
engine and let it run until you The vehicle has an indicator to warn
can feel the upper radiator hose of the engine overheating.
getting hot. Watch out for the If the decision is made not to lift the
{ WARNING
engine cooling fan. hood when this warning appears, Steam from an overheated engine
By this time, the coolant level get service help right away. See can burn you badly, even if you
inside the coolant surge tank Roadside Assistance Program on just open the hood. Stay away
may be lower. If the level is page 135. from the engine if you see or hear
lower, add more of the proper If the decision is made to lift the steam coming from it. Just turn it
DEX-COOL coolant mixture to hood, make sure the vehicle is off and get everyone away from
the coolant surge tank until the parked on a level surface. the vehicle until it cools down.
level reaches the indicated Wait until there is no sign of
level mark. Then check to see if the engine
cooling fan is running. If the engine steam or coolant before you open
5. Replace the pressure cap tightly. is overheating, the fan should be the hood.
Check the level in the coolant surge running. If it is not, do not continue If you keep driving when the
tank when the cooling system has to run the engine. Have the vehicle engine is overheated, the liquids
cooled down. If the coolant is serviced. in it can catch fire. You or others
not at the proper level, repeat Notice: Running the engine could be badly burned. Stop the
Steps 13 and reinstall the pressure without coolant may cause engine if it overheats, and get out
cap. If the coolant still is not at the damage or a fire. Vehicle damage of the vehicle until the engine
proper level when the system cools would not be covered by the is cool.
down again, see your dealer. warranty.
10-20 Vehicle Care
If No Steam Is Coming from an automatic transmission or area where the temperature may fall
the Engine Compartment Neutral for a manual below freezing, use a fluid that has
transmission, and let the sufficient protection against
If an engine overheat warning is engine idle. freezing.
displayed but no steam can be seen
or heard, the problem may not be If the overheat warning no longer Adding Washer Fluid
too serious. Sometimes the engine displays, the vehicle can be driven.
can get a little too hot when the Continue to drive the vehicle slowly
vehicle: for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
.
vehicle distance from the vehicle in
Climbs a long hill on a hot day. front. If the warning does not come
. Stops after high-speed driving. back on, continue to drive normally.
. Idles for long periods in traffic. If the warning continues, pull over,
stop, and park the vehicle Open the cap with the washer
If the overheat warning is displayed
right away. symbol on it. Add washer fluid until
with no sign of steam:
If there is no sign of steam, idle the the tank is full. See Engine
1. Turn the air conditioning off. Compartment Overview on
engine for three minutes while
2. Turn the heater on to the highest parked. If the warning is still page 106 for reservoir location.
temperature and to the highest displayed, turn off the engine until it Notice
fan speed. Open the windows as cools down.
necessary.
. When using concentrated
washer fluid, follow the
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine Washer Fluid manufacturer instructions for
idle in N (Neutral) for an adding water.
automatic transmission or
What to Use
Neutral for a manual When the vehicle needs windshield
. Do not mix water with
transmission while stopped. If it washer fluid, be sure to read the ready-to-use washer fluid.
is safe to do so, pull off the road, manufacturer's instructions before Water can cause the solution
shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) for use. If operating the vehicle in an
Vehicle Care 10-21
to freeze and damage the The sound can come and go or be proper sequence to torque
washer fluid tank and other heard all the time the vehicle is specifications in Capacities and
parts of the washer system. moving, except when applying the Specifications on page 122.
. Fill the washer fluid tank only brake pedal firmly. If the vehicle has rear drum brakes,
three-quarters full when it is they do not have wear indicators,
very cold. This allows for { WARNING but if a rear brake rubbing noise is
fluid expansion if freezing heard, have the rear brake linings
occurs, which could damage The brake wear warning sound inspected immediately. Rear brake
the tank if it is means that soon the brakes will drums should be removed and
completely full. not work well. That could lead to inspected each time the tires are
a crash. When the brake wear removed for rotation or changing.
. Do not use engine coolant warning sound is heard, have the
(antifreeze) in the windshield Drum brakes have an inspection
vehicle serviced. hole to inspect lining wear during
washer. It can damage the
windshield washer system scheduled maintenance. When the
and paint. Notice: Continuing to drive with front brake pads are replaced, have
worn-out brake pads could result the rear brakes inspected, too.
Brakes in costly brake repair. Brake linings should always be
Some driving conditions or climates replaced as complete axle sets.
This vehicle has front disc brakes
and could have rear drum brakes or can cause a brake squeal when the Brake Pedal Travel
rear disc brakes. brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean See your dealer if the brake pedal
Disc brake pads have built-in wear something is wrong with the brakes. does not return to normal height,
indicators that make a high-pitched or if there is a rapid increase in
warning sound when the brake pads Properly torqued wheel nuts are pedal travel. This could be a sign
are worn and new pads are needed. necessary to help prevent brake that brake service might be
pulsation. When tires are rotated, required.
inspect brake pads for wear and
evenly tighten wheel nuts in the
10-22 Vehicle Care
Brake Adjustment If this is not done, the brakes might There are only two reasons why the
not work properly. For example, fluid level in the reservoir might
Every moderate brake stop, the disc
installing disc brake pads that are go down:
brakes adjust for wear. If rarely
wrong for the vehicle, can change . The fluid level goes down
making moderate or heavier brake
the balance between the front and because of normal brake lining
stops, the brakes might not adjust
rear brakes for the worse. The wear. When new linings are
correctly. Very carefully making a
braking performance expected can installed, the fluid level goes
few moderate brake stops about
change in many other ways if the back up.
every 1 600 km (1,000 miles) will
wrong replacement brake parts are
adjust the brakes properly. . A fluid leak in the brake/clutch
installed.
If the vehicle has rear drum brakes hydraulic system can also cause
and the brake pedal goes down Brake Fluid a low fluid level. Have the brake/
farther than normal, the rear drum clutch hydraulic system fixed,
brakes might need adjustment. since a leak means that sooner
Adjust them by backing up and or later the brakes and/or clutch
firmly applying the brakes a few will not work well.
times. Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid.
Replacing Brake System Parts Adding fluid does not correct a leak.
If fluid is added when the linings are
The braking system on a vehicle is worn, there will be too much fluid
The brake/clutch master cylinder
complex. Its many parts have to be when new brake linings are
reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake
of top quality and work well together installed. Add or remove brake fluid,
fluid as indicated on the reservoir
if the vehicle is to have really good as necessary, only when work is
cap. See Engine Compartment
braking. The vehicle was designed done on the brake/clutch hydraulic
Overview on page 106 for the
and tested with top-quality brake system.
location of the reservoir.
parts. When parts of the braking
system are replaced, be sure to get
new, approved replacement parts.
Vehicle Care 10-23
spill brake fluid on the

{ WARNING { WARNING vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately.
If too much brake fluid is added, it With the wrong kind of fluid in the
can spill on the engine and burn, brake/clutch hydraulic system, the
if the engine is hot enough. You brakes might not work well. This
Battery
or others could be burned, and could cause a crash. Always use Refer to the replacement number
the vehicle could be damaged. the proper brake/clutch fluid. shown on the original battery label
Add brake fluid only when work is when a new battery is needed. See
done on the brake/clutch Engine Compartment Overview on
Notice page 106 for battery location.
hydraulic system.
. Using the wrong fluid can
When the brake/clutch fluid falls to a
badly damage brake/clutch
hydraulic system parts. For
{ WARNING
low level, the brake warning light example, just a few drops of Battery posts, terminals, and
comes on. See Brake System mineral-based oil, such as related accessories contain lead
Warning Light on page 515. engine oil, in the brake and lead compounds, chemicals
What to Add hydraulic system can known to the State of California to
damage brake hydraulic cause cancer and reproductive
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid system parts so badly that
from a sealed container. See harm. Wash hands after handling.
they will have to be replaced.
Recommended Fluids and Do not let someone put in
Lubricants on page 1112. the wrong kind of fluid.
Always clean the brake/clutch fluid . If brake fluid is spilled on the
reservoir cap and the area around vehicle's painted surfaces,
the cap before removing it. This the paint finish can be
helps keep dirt from entering the damaged. Be careful not to
reservoir.
10-24 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Storage Starter Switch Check 3. For automatic transmission

vehicles, try to start the engine
{ WARNING { WARNING in each gear. The vehicle should
start only in P (Park) or
Batteries have acid that can burn When you are doing this N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts
you and gas that can explode. in any other position, contact
inspection, the vehicle could
You can be badly hurt if you are your dealer for service.
move suddenly. If the vehicle
not careful. See Jump Starting on moves, you or others could be For manual transmission
page 1074 for tips on working injured. vehicles, put the shift lever in
around a battery without Neutral, push the clutch pedal
getting hurt. down halfway, and try to start
1. Before starting this check, be the engine. The vehicle should
sure there is enough room start only when the clutch pedal
Infrequent Usage: Remove the around the vehicle. is pushed down all the way to
black, negative () cable from the the floor. If the vehicle starts
2. Firmly apply both the parking
battery to keep the battery from when the clutch pedal is not
brake and the regular brake.
running down. pushed all the way down,
See Parking Brake on
Extended Storage: Remove the page 926. contact your dealer for service.
black, negative () cable from the
Do not use the accelerator
battery or use a battery trickle
pedal, and be ready to turn off
charger.
the engine immediately if it
starts.
Vehicle Care 10-25
Automatic Transmission shift lever out of P (Park) with Park Brake and P (Park)
normal effort. If the shift lever
Shift Lock Control moves out of P (Park), contact
Mechanism Check
Function Check your dealer for service.
{ WARNING
{ WARNING Ignition Transmission When you are doing this check,
When you are doing this
Lock Check the vehicle could begin to move.
inspection, the vehicle could While parked, and with the parking You or others could be injured
move suddenly. If the vehicle brake set, try to turn the ignition to and property could be damaged.
moves, you or others could be LOCK/OFF in each shift lever Make sure there is room in front
injured. position. of the vehicle in case it begins to
. For automatic transmission roll. Be ready to apply the regular
vehicles, the ignition should turn brake at once should the vehicle
1. Before starting this check, be begin to move.
sure there is enough room to LOCK/OFF only when the
around the vehicle. It should be shift lever is in P (Park).
parked on a level surface. . For manual transmission Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
vehicles, the ignition should turn vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. your foot on the regular brake, set
See Parking Brake on to LOCK/OFF only when the
shift lever is in neutral. the parking brake.
page 926.
On all vehicles, the ignition key . To check the parking brake's
Be ready to apply the regular
should come out only in LOCK/OFF. holding ability: With the engine
brake immediately if the vehicle
running and the transmission in
begins to move. Contact your dealer if service is N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
3. With the engine off, turn the required. pressure from the regular brake
ignition on, but do not start the pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
engine. Without applying the held by the parking brake only.
regular brake, try to move the
10-26 Vehicle Care

. To check the P (Park) damage that occurs would not be 3. Install the new blade onto the
mechanism's holding ability: covered by your warranty. Do not arm and make sure the tabs are
With the engine running, shift to allow the wiper arm to touch the fully set in the locked position.
P (Park). Then release the windshield.
parking brake followed by the 4. Repeat the steps for the other
regular brake. To replace the windshield wiper wiper.
blade:
Contact your dealer if service is Rear Wiper Blade Replacement
required. 1. Pull the windshield wiper
assembly away from the
windshield.
Wiper Blade Replacement
Front Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be
inspected for wear or cracking. See
the Maintenance Schedule on
2. Squeeze the tabs on each side
Replacement blades come in of the wiper blade assembly and
different types and are removed in slide the assembly off the end of
different ways. For proper the wiper arm.
windshield wiper blade length and 1. Pull the wiper arm a short
type, see Maintenance distance away from the
Replacement Parts on page 1114. glass (1).
Notice: Allowing the wiper arm to 2. Pull the blade out from
touch the windshield when no the arm (2).
wiper blade is installed could It may require extra effort to
damage the windshield. Any remove the old blade.
Vehicle Care 10-27
Headlamp Aiming Bulb Replacement

Headlamp aim has been preset and For the proper type of replacement
should need no further adjustment. bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
If the vehicle is damaged in a crash, page 1031.
the headlamp aim may be affected. For any bulbchanging procedure
If adjustment to the headlamps is not listed in this section, contact
necessary, see your dealer. your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
3. Once the blade pin disengages

{ WARNING
from the wiper arm, remove the Halogen bulbs have pressurized
wiper blade by sliding the pin out gas inside and can burst if you
of the guide hole. drop or scratch the bulb. You or
4. Reverse the steps to install the others could be injured. Be sure
new blade. to read and follow the instructions
on the bulb package.
10-28 Vehicle Care
Headlamps, Front Turn High-Beam Headlamp/ 4. Turn the bulb counterclockwise

Low-Beam Headlamp and pull straight back.
Signal and Parking
Lamps 1. Open the hood. See Hood on 5. Disconnect the wiring harness
page 104. connector from the bulb.
2. For the driver side bulb, remove 6. Install the new bulb in the
the windshield washer bottle headlamp assembly by turning
filler neck by turning it clockwise.
one-quarter turn 7. Reconnect the wiring harness
counterclockwise and pulling it connector.
straight up and out of the bottle.
8. Install the headlamp bulb access
cover.
9. For the driver side bulb, replace
the windshield washer bottle
filler neck by turning it
one-quarter turn clockwise into
Passenger Side Shown, Driver the bottle.
Side Similar Parking/Turn Signal Lamp
1. High-Beam Headlamp 1. Open the hood. See Hood on
2. Low-Beam Headlamp page 104.
3. Parking/Turn Signal Lamps
3. Remove the headlamp bulb

access cover.
Vehicle Care 10-29
Fog Lamps (LS, LT, Fog Lamps (RS)

and LTZ)
To replace the front fog lamp bulb:
1. Locate the fog lamp located
under the front fascia.
2. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the fog lamp bulb
assembly.
3. Remove the bulb by turning it
counterclockwise and pulling it
2. Remove the parking/turn signal straight out of the assembly.
lamp bulb socket from the 4. Install the new bulb by turning it
headlamp assembly by turning clockwise into the assembly. To replace the front fog lamp bulb:
counterclockwise.
5. Reconnect the electrical 1. Locate the fog lamp located
3. Remove the bulb from the bulb connector. under the front fascia.
socket by pulling it straight out.
2. Remove the cap from the back
4. Install the new bulb in the bulb of the fog lamp assembly.
socket.
3. Disconnect the electrical
5. Install the bulb socket into the connector from the fog lamp bulb
headlamp assembly by turning assembly.
clockwise.
4. Remove the bulb by turning it
counterclockwise and pulling it
straight out of the assembly.
10-30 Vehicle Care
5. Install the new bulb by turning it 2. Turn Signal Lamp 4. Remove the bulb socket from
clockwise into the assembly. 3. Stop Lamp/Taillamp the taillamp assembly by turning
6. Reconnect the electrical it counterclockwise.
4. Sidemarker Lamp
connector. 5. Remove the bulb by pulling it
To replace one of these bulbs: straight out.
7. Replace the cap on the back of
the fog lamp assembly. 1. Open the trunk. 6. Install a new bulb into the bulb
socket.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, 7. Install the bulb socket into the
Stoplamps, and Back-Up taillamp assembly by turning it
Lamps clockwise.
8. Install the taillamp assembly and
tighten the two screws.
2. Remove the two screws, which

secure the taillamp assembly.
3. Remove the taillamp assembly
by pulling it straight back until
Sedan Taillamp Shown, Hatchback the two posts disengage from
Taillamp Similar the grommets.
1. Back-up Lamp
Vehicle Care 10-31
License Plate Lamp 1. Bulb Socket Replacement Bulbs

2. Bulb Bulb
Exterior Lamp
3. Lamp Assembly Number
To replace one of these bulbs: Back-Up Lamp 921
1. Push the left end of the lamp Front Fog Lamp H8
assembly toward the right. Front Parking/Turn 7444NA
2. Turn the lamp assembly down to Signal Lamp
remove it. High-Beam 9005LL
3. Turn the bulb socket (1) Headlamp
counterclockwise to remove it
License Plate Lamp W5W LL
from the lamp assembly (3).
4. Pull the bulb (2) straight out of Low-Beam H11
Lamp Assembly
the bulb socket (1). Headlamp
5. Push the replacement bulb Rear 194LL

straight into the bulb socket and Sidemarker Lamp
turn the bulb socket clockwise to Rear Turn 4157NAK
install it into the lamp assembly. Signal Lamp
6. Turn the lamp assembly into the Stop Lamp/Taillamp 7444LL
lamp assembly opening
engaging the clip side first. For replacement bulbs not listed
7. Push on the lamp side opposite here, contact your dealer.
the clip until the lamp assembly
snaps into place.
Bulb Assembly
10-32 Vehicle Care
Electrical System Headlamp Wiring Fuses and Circuit

An electrical overload may cause Breakers
Electrical System the lamps to go on and off, or in
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
Overload some cases to remain off. Have the
protected from short circuits by a
headlamp wiring checked right away
The vehicle has fuses and circuit combination of fuses, circuit
if the lamps go on and off or
breakers to protect against an breakers, and fusible thermal links.
remain off.
electrical system overload. This greatly reduces the chance of
Windshield Wipers fires caused by electrical problems.
When the current electrical load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens If the wiper motor overheats due to Look at the silver-colored band
and closes, protecting the circuit heavy snow or ice, the windshield inside the fuse. If the band is broken
until the current load returns to wipers will stop until the motor cools or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
normal or the problem is fixed. This and will then restart. you replace a bad fuse with a new
greatly reduces the chance of circuit one of the identical size and rating.
Although the circuit is protected
overload and fire caused by from electrical overload, overload Fuses of the same amperage can
electrical problems. due to heavy snow or ice may be temporarily borrowed from
Fuses and circuit breakers protect cause wiper linkage damage. another fuse location, if a fuse goes
power devices in the vehicle. Always clear ice and heavy snow out. Replace the fuse as soon as
from the windshield before using the you can.
Replace a bad fuse with a new one windshield wipers.
of the identical size and rating.
If the overload is caused by an
If there is a problem on the road and electrical problem and not snow or
a fuse needs to be replaced, the ice, be sure to get it fixed.
same amperage fuse can be
borrowed. Choose some feature of
the vehicle that is not needed to use
and replace it as soon as possible.
Vehicle Care 10-33
Engine Compartment Notice: Spilling liquid on any

electrical component on the
Fuse Block vehicle may damage it. Always
LUV and LUW Engines keep the covers on any electrical
component.
To access the fuses, press the clips
together, and lift the cover. To
reinstall the cover, push the cover
until it is secure.
The engine compartment fuse block

is on the driver side of the vehicle,
near the battery.
The vehicle may not be equipped

with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
10-34 Vehicle Care
Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage

1 Antilock Brake 16 Washer 27 Engine Control
System Valve Module
17 Fuel Pump (1.8L)
2 Sunroof 28 Air Conditioning
18 Engine Control
Compressor Clutch
4 Rear Wiper Module 5
29 Transmission
5 Regulated Voltage 19 Fuel System
Control Module
Control Control Module 2/
Leveling 30 Horn
6 Antilock Brake
System Fluid 20 Transmission 31 Front Fog Lamps
Control Module 1
7 Automatic 32 Left High Beam
Occupant 21 Engine Control
33 Right High Beam
Sensing/ROS Module 1
SPARE Spare
8 Outside Rearview 22 Coil
Mirror
23 Engine Control J-Case Usage
10 Rear Window Module 4 Fuses
Defogger
24 Engine Control 1 Antilock Brake
12 Heated Outside Module 3 System Pump
Rearview Mirror
25 Engine Control 2 Front Wiper
13 Heated Front Seat Module 2
3 Blower
14 Fuel System 26 Injector/
Control Module 1 Ignition Coil 4 Run/Crank IEC
15 Flex Fuel 6 Cooling Fan K5
Vehicle Care 10-35
J-Case Usage Relays Usage LWE Engine

Fuses
RLY 9 Powertrain Relay
7 Cooling Fan K4
RLY 10 Start High Current
8 EVP Relay
9 Start RLY 11 Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch
Relays Usage Relay
RLY 1 Front Wiper RLY 12 High-Beam Relay

Control Relay RLY 13 Cooling Fan K1
RLY 2 Front Wiper Speed Relay
Relay
RLY 3 Rear Window
Defogger Relay
RLY 4 Run/Crank Relay
RLY 6 Fuel Pump
Relay (1.8L)
RLY 7 Cooling Fan K2
Relay (1.4L)
RLY 8 Cooling Fan K3
Relay (1.8L),
Cooling Fan K3
High Current
Relay (1.4L)
10-36 Vehicle Care
The vehicle may not be equipped Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage
with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown. 16 Fuel System 27 Engine Control
Control Module 1 Module 3
Mini Fuses Usage
17 Canister Vent 28 Engine Control
1 Antilock Brake
System Valve Module 2
18 Washer
29 Injector/
2 Sunroof 19 Fuel Pump*
Ignition Coil
5 Outside Rearview 20 Engine Control
Mirror 30 Engine Control
Module 5
Module
6 AOS/ROS 21 Fuel System
31 Air Conditioning
7 ABS Oil Control Module 2/
Compressor Clutch
Leveling
8 Regulated Voltage 32 Transmission
Control 22 Transmission
Control Module
Control Module 1/
9 Rear Wiper DC-DC Converter 33 Horn
10 Not Used/IBS* 23 Auxiliary Water 34 Front Fog Lamps
11 Rear Window Pump Power
35 Left High Beam
Defogger 24 Engine Control
36 Right High Beam
13 Not Used/SAI Module 1
Valve* 25 Coil J-Case Usage
14 Heated Outside 26 Engine Control Fuses
Rearview Mirror Module 4 1 Front Wiper
15 Heated Seat Front
Vehicle Care 10-37
J-Case Usage HC-Micro Usage * = If equipped

Fuses Relays
Instrument Panel Fuse
2 Antilock Brake RLY 12 Start
System Pump Block
3 Blower U-Micro Usage
Relays
4 Run/Crank IEC
RLY 6 Not Used/SAI
6 Cooling Fan K4 Valve*
7 Cooling Fan K5 RLY 8 Fuel Pump*
8 SAI Pump* RLY 13 Air Conditioning
9 EVP Compressor Clutch
10 Start RLY 14 High-Beam
Headlamps
Micro Usage
Relays Mini Relays Usage
The instrument panel fuse block is
RLY 1 Front Wiper RLY 4 Rear Defogger on the underside of the driver side
Control RLY 5 Run/Crank instrument panel.
RLY 3 Front Wiper Speed Notice: Spilling liquid on any
RLY 9 SAI Pump*
electrical component on the
RLY 10 Cooling Fan K3 vehicle may damage it. Always
HC-Micro Usage
keep the covers on any electrical
Relays RLY 11 P/T
component.
RLY 7 Auxiliary Water RLY 15 Cooling Fan K1
Pump Power*
10-38 Vehicle Care
Number Usage Number Usage

1 DLIS 13 Body Control
Module 1
2 Data Link
Connector 14 Instrument Cluster
3 Airbag 15 OnStar
4 Liftgate 16 Ultrasonic Rear
Park Assist
5 Spare
17 Driver Information
6 Body Control
Center
Module 8
18 Audio
7 Body Control
Module 7 19 Trailer
8 Body Control 20 VLBS
Module 6
21 CHEVYSTAR
9 Body Control
22 Heating,
Module 5
Ventilation, Air
10 Body Control Conditioning
Module 4
23 HDLP ALC
11 Body Control
24 Clutch
Module 3
The vehicle may not be equipped 25 Instrument Cluster/
12 Body Control
with all of the fuses, relays, and Automatic
Module 2
features shown. Occupant Sensing
Vehicle Care 10-39
Number Usage Number Usage Wheels and Tires

26 Airbag Run/Crank 40 Driver Power
Window Express Tires
27 Run Relay
Up/Down Every new GM vehicle has
28 Liftgate Release
41 PTC2 high-quality tires made by a
29 Trailer Run/Crank leading tire manufacturer. See
42 PTC1
30 Clock Spring the warranty manual for
43 Battery Connector information regarding the tire
31 Heating, warranty and where to get
Ventilation, and Air
Conditioning
service. For additional
information refer to the tire
32 Spare manufacturer.
33 Sunroof
34 Cigarette Lighter { WARNING
35 Spare . Poorly maintained and
36 Rear Power improperly used tires are
Windows dangerous.
37 Front Power
. Overloading the tires can
Windows cause overheating as a
result of too much flexing.
38 RAP/ACCY
There could be a blowout
39 DC/DC Converter (Continued)
10-40 Vehicle Care
WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

All-Season Tires
This vehicle may come with
and a serious crash. See . Worn or old tires can all-season tires. These tires are
Vehicle Load Limits on cause a crash. If the tread designed to provide good overall
page 99. is badly worn, performance on most road surfaces
replace them. and weather conditions. Original
. Underinflated tires pose equipment tires designed to GM's
the same danger as . Replace any tires that specific tire performance criteria
overloaded tires. The have been damaged by have a TPC specification code
resulting crash could impacts with potholes, molded onto the sidewall. Original
cause serious injury. curbs, etc. equipment all-season tires can be
Check all tires frequently identified by the last two characters
. Improperly repaired tires of this TPC code, which will
to maintain the can cause a crash. Only
recommended pressure. be MS.
the dealer or an
Tire pressure should be authorized tire service
Consider installing winter tires on
checked when the tires the vehicle if frequent driving on
center should repair, snow or ice-covered roads is
are cold. replace, dismount, and expected. All-season tires provide
. Overinflated tires are more mount the tires. adequate performance for most
likely to be cut, punctured, . Do not spin the tires in winter driving conditions, but they
or broken by a sudden excess of 56 km/h may not offer the same level of
impact such as when traction or performance as winter
(35 mph) on slippery tires on snow or ice-covered roads.
hitting a pothole. Keep surfaces such as snow,
tires at the recommended See Winter Tires on page 1041.
mud, ice, etc. Excessive
pressure. spinning may cause the
(Continued) tires to explode.
Vehicle Care 10-41

. Use only radial ply tires of the
Winter Tires same size, load range, and
Tire Sidewall Labeling
This vehicle was not, originally, speed rating as the original Useful information about a tire is
equipped with winter tires. Winter equipment tires. molded into its sidewall. The
tires are designed for increased examples show a typical
Winter tires with the same speed
traction on snow and ice-covered passenger vehicle tire and a
rating as the original equipment tires
roads. Consider installing winter
may not be available for H, V, W, Y, compact spare tire sidewall.
tires on the vehicle if frequent
and ZR speed rated tires. If winter
driving on snow or ice-covered
tires with a lower speed rating are
roads is expected. See your dealer
chosen, never exceed the tire's
for details regarding winter tire
maximum speed capability.
availability and proper tire selection.
Also, see Buying New Tires on
page 1054. Summer Tires
With winter tires, there may be This vehicle may come with high
decreased dry road traction, performance summer tires. These
increased road noise, and shorter tires have a special tread and
tread life. After changing to winter compound that are optimized for
tires, be alert for changes in vehicle maximum dry and wet road
handling and braking. performance. This special tread and
compound will decrease Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
If using winter tires: performance in cold climates, and
on ice and snow. We recommend (1) Tire Size: The tire size is a
. Use tires of the same brand and
tread type on all four wheel installing winter tires on the vehicle combination of letters and
positions. if frequent driving in cold numbers used to define a
temperatures or on snow or ice particular tire's width, height,
covered roads is expected. See aspect ratio, construction type,
Winter Tires on page 1041.
10-42 Vehicle Care
and service description. See the digits represent the week performance factors: treadwear,
Tire Size illustration later in this (0152) and the last two digits, traction, and temperature
section. the year. For example, the third resistance. For more information
(2) TPC Spec (Tire week of the year 2010 would see Uniform Tire Quality
Performance Criteria have a four-digit DOT date Grading on page 1056.
Specification): Original of 0310. (7) Maximum Cold Inflation
equipment tires designed to (4) Tire Identification Number Load Limit: Maximum load that
GM's specific tire performance (TIN): The letters and numbers can be carried and the
criteria have a TPC specification following the DOT (Department maximum pressure needed to
code molded onto the sidewall. of Transportation) code are the support that load.
GM's TPC specifications meet or Tire Identification Number (TIN).
exceed all federal safety The TIN shows the
guidelines. manufacturer and plant code,
(3) DOT (Department of tire size, and date the tire was
Transportation): The manufactured. The TIN is
Department of Transportation molded onto both sides of the
(DOT) code indicates that the tire, although only one side may
tire is in compliance with the have the date of manufacture.
U.S. Department of (5) Tire Ply Material : The type
Transportation Motor Vehicle of cord and number of plies in
Safety Standards. the sidewall and under the tread.
DOT Tire Date of (6) Uniform Tire Quality Compact Spare Tire Example
Manufacture: The last four Grading (UTQG): Tire (1) Tire Ply Material : The type
digits of the TIN indicate the tire manufacturers are required to of cord and number of plies in
manufactured date. The first two grade tires based on three the sidewall and under the tread.
Vehicle Care 10-43
(2) Temporary Use Only: The (4) Maximum Cold Inflation criteria have a TPC specification
compact spare tire or temporary Load Limit: Maximum load that code molded onto the sidewall.
use tire should not be driven at can be carried and the GM's TPC specifications meet or
speeds over 80 km/h (50 mph). maximum pressure needed to exceed all federal safety
The compact spare tire is for support that load. guidelines.
emergency use when a regular (5) Tire Inflation: The
road tire has lost air and gone temporary use tire or compact Tire Designations
flat. If the vehicle has a compact spare tire should be inflated to Tire Size
spare tire, see Compact Spare 420 kPa (60 psi). For more
Tire on page 1073 and If a Tire The following is an example of a
information on tire pressure and
Goes Flat on page 1059. typical passenger vehicle
inflation see Tire Pressure on
tire size.
(3) Tire Identification Number page 1047.
(TIN): The letters and numbers (6) Tire Size: A combination of
following the DOT (Department letters and numbers define a
of Transportation) code are the tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
Tire Identification Number (TIN). construction type, and service
The TIN shows the description. The letter T as the
manufacturer and plant code, first character in the tire size
tire size, and date the tire was means the tire is for temporary (1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:
manufactured. The TIN is use only. The United States version of a
molded onto both sides of the metric tire sizing system. The
tire, although only one side may (7) TPC Spec (Tire letter P as the first character in
have the date of manufacture. Performance Criteria the tire size means a passenger
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
10-44 Vehicle Care
vehicle tire engineered to (5) Rim Diameter : Diameter of steering, power brakes, power
standards set by the U.S. Tire the wheel in inches. windows, power seats, and air
and Rim Association. (6) Service Description: These conditioning.
(2) Tire Width: The three-digit characters represent the load Aspect Ratio: The relationship
number indicates the tire section index and speed rating of the of a tire's height to its width.
width in millimeters from tire. The load index represents Belt: A rubber coated layer of
sidewall to sidewall. the load carrying capacity a tire cords between the plies and the
(3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit is certified to carry. The speed tread. Cords may be made from
number that indicates the tire rating is the maximum speed a steel or other reinforcing
height-to-width measurements. tire is certified to carry a load. materials.
For example, if the tire size Bead: The tire bead contains
aspect ratio is 60, as shown in Tire Terminology and
Definitions steel wires wrapped by steel
item 3 of the illustration, it would cords that hold the tire onto
mean that the tire's sidewall is Air Pressure: The amount of the rim.
60 percent as high as it is wide. air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire
(4) Construction Code: A letter in which the plies are laid at
code is used to indicate the type the tire. Air pressure is
expressed in kPa (kilopascal) alternate angles less than
of ply construction in the tire. 90 degrees to the centerline of
The letter R means radial ply or psi (pounds per square inch).
the tread.
construction; the letter D means Accessory Weight: The
diagonal or bias ply combined weight of optional Cold Tire Pressure: The
construction; and the letter B accessories. Some examples of amount of air pressure in a tire,
means belted-bias ply optional accessories are measured in kPa (kilopascal)
construction. automatic transmission, power or psi (pounds per square inch)
Vehicle Care 10-45
before a tire has built up heat GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Maximum Inflation Pressure:
from driving. See Tire Pressure Rating for the front axle. See The maximum air pressure to
on page 1047. Vehicle Load Limits on page 99. which a cold tire can be inflated.
Curb Weight: The weight of a GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight The maximum air pressure is
motor vehicle with standard and Rating for the rear axle. See molded onto the sidewall.
optional equipment including the Vehicle Load Limits on page 99. Maximum Load Rating: The
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, Intended Outboard Sidewall : load rating for a tire at the
and coolant, but without The side of an asymmetrical tire, maximum permissible inflation
passengers and cargo. that must always face outward pressure for that tire.
DOT Markings: A code molded when mounted on a vehicle. Maximum Loaded Vehicle
into the sidewall of a tire Kilopascal (kPa): The metric Weight: The sum of curb
signifying that the tire is in unit for air pressure. weight, accessory weight,
compliance with the U.S. vehicle capacity weight, and
Department of Transportation Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A production options weight.
(DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety tire used on light duty trucks and
some multipurpose passenger Normal Occupant Weight: The
Standards. The DOT code number of occupants a vehicle
includes the Tire Identification vehicles.
is designed to seat multiplied by
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric Load Index: An assigned 68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle Load
designator which can also number ranging from 1 to 279 Limits on page 99.
identify the tire manufacturer, that corresponds to the load
production plant, brand, and carrying capacity of a tire. Occupant Distribution :
date of production. Designated seating positions.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Outward Facing Sidewall: The
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits side of an asymmetrical tire that
on page 99. has a particular side that faces
10-46 Vehicle Care
outward when mounted on a Rim: A metal support for a tire UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality
vehicle. The side of the tire that and upon which the tire beads Grading Standards): A tire
contains a whitewall, bears are seated. information system that provides
white lettering, or bears Sidewall: The portion of a tire consumers with ratings for a
manufacturer, brand, and/or between the tread and the bead. tire's traction, temperature, and
model name molding that is treadwear. Ratings are
higher or deeper than the same Speed Rating: An determined by tire
moldings on the other sidewall alphanumeric code assigned to manufacturers using
of the tire. a tire indicating the maximum government testing procedures.
speed at which a tire can The ratings are molded into the
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A operate.
tire used on passenger cars and sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
some light duty trucks and Traction: The friction between Tire Quality Grading on
multipurpose vehicles. the tire and the road surface. page 1056.
The amount of grip provided. Vehicle Capacity Weight: The
Recommended Inflation
Pressure: Vehicle Tread: The portion of a tire that number of designated seating
manufacturer's recommended comes into contact with positions multiplied by
tire inflation pressure as shown the road. 68 kg (150 lb) plus the rated
on the tire placard. See Tire cargo load. See Vehicle Load
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow Limits on page 99.
Pressure on page 1047 and bands, sometimes called wear
Vehicle Load Limits on page 99. bars, that show across the tread Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic of a tire when only 1.6 mm Tire: Load on an individual tire
tire in which the ply cords that (1/16 in) of tread remains. See due to curb weight, accessory
extend to the beads are laid at When It Is Time for New Tires weight, occupant weight, and
90 degrees to the centerline of on page 1053. cargo weight.
the tread.
Vehicle Care 10-47
Vehicle Placard: A label . Premature or How the vehicle is loaded

permanently attached to a irregular wear. affects vehicle handling and ride
vehicle showing the vehicle . Poor handling. comfort. Never load the vehicle
capacity weight and the original with more weight than it was
equipment tire size and
. Reduced fuel economy. designed to carry.
recommended inflation pressure. Overinflated tires, or tires that
When to Check
See Tire and Loading have too much air, can
Information Label under Vehicle result in: Check the tires once a month or
Load Limits on page 99. more. Do not forget the compact
. Unusual wear.
spare, if the vehicle has one.
Tire Pressure . Poor handling. The cold compact spare tire
. Rough ride. pressure should be at 420 kPa
Tires need the correct amount of
(60 psi). See Compact Spare
air pressure to operate . Needless damage from Tire on page 1073.
effectively. road hazards.
Notice: Neither tire How to Check
The Tire and Loading
underinflation nor Information label on the vehicle Use a good quality pocket-type
overinflation is good. indicates the original equipment gauge to check tire pressure.
Underinflated tires, or tires tires and the correct cold tire Proper tire inflation cannot be
that do not have enough air, inflation pressures. The determined by looking at the tire.
can result in: recommended pressure is the Check the tire inflation pressure
. Tire overloading and minimum air pressure needed to when the tires are cold, meaning
overheating which could support the vehicle's maximum the vehicle has not been driven
lead to a blowout. load carrying capacity. See for at least three hours or no
Vehicle Load Limits on page 99. more than 1.6 km (1 mi).
10-48 Vehicle Care
Remove the valve cap from the Tire Pressure Monitor pressure telltale when one or more
tire valve stem. Press the tire of your tires is significantly
System under-inflated.
gauge firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. The Tire Pressure Monitor System Accordingly, when the low tire
If the cold tire inflation pressure (TPMS) uses radio and sensor pressure telltale illuminates, you
technology to check tire pressure should stop and check your tires as
matches the recommended levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
pressure on the Tire and soon as possible, and inflate them
the air pressure in your tires and to the proper pressure. Driving on a
Loading Information label, no transmit tire pressure readings to a
further adjustment is necessary. significantly under-inflated tire
receiver located in the vehicle. causes the tire to overheat and can
If the inflation pressure is low, lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
Each tire, including the spare (if
add air until the recommended provided), should be checked also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
pressure is reached. If the monthly when cold and inflated to tread life, and may affect the
inflation pressure is high, press the inflation pressure recommended vehicle's handling and stopping
on the metal stem in the center by the vehicle manufacturer on the ability.
of the tire valve to release air. vehicle placard or tire inflation Please note that the TPMS is not a
pressure label. (If your vehicle has substitute for proper tire
Recheck the tire pressure with tires of a different size than the size
the tire gauge. maintenance, and it is the driver's
indicated on the vehicle placard or responsibility to maintain correct tire
Return the valve caps on the tire inflation pressure label, you pressure, even if under-inflation has
valve stems to prevent leaks should determine the proper tire not reached the level to trigger
and keep out dirt and moisture. inflation pressure for those tires.) illumination of the TPMS low tire
As an added safety feature, your pressure telltale.
vehicle has been equipped with a Your vehicle has also been
tire pressure monitoring system equipped with a TPMS malfunction
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly.
Vehicle Care 10-49
The TPMS malfunction indicator is Federal Communications

combined with the low tire pressure Commission (FCC) Rules and
telltale. When the system detects a with Industry Canada
malfunction, the telltale will flash for Standards
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. See Radio Frequency Statement on
This sequence will continue upon page 1315 for information
When a low tire pressure condition
subsequent vehicle start-ups as regarding Part 15 of the Federal
is detected, the TPMS illuminates
long as the malfunction exists. Communications Commission (FCC)
the low tire pressure warning light
Rules and with Industry Canada
When the malfunction indicator is located on the instrument cluster.
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
illuminated, the system may not be If the warning light comes on, stop
able to detect or signal low tire as soon as possible and inflate the
pressure as intended. TPMS
Tire Pressure Monitor tires to the recommended pressure
malfunctions may occur for a variety Operation shown on the Tire and Loading
of reasons, including the installation Information label. See Vehicle Load
This vehicle may have a Tire
of replacement or alternate tires or Limits on page 99.
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
wheels on the vehicle that prevent The TPMS is designed to warn the The low tire pressure warning light
the TPMS from functioning properly. driver when a low tire pressure comes on at each ignition cycle until
Always check the TPMS malfunction condition exists. TPMS sensors are the tires are inflated to the correct
telltale after replacing one or more mounted onto each tire and wheel inflation pressure.
tires or wheels on your vehicle to assembly, excluding the spare tire
ensure that the replacement or The low tire pressure warning light
and wheel assembly. The TPMS may come on in cool weather when
alternate tires and wheels allow the sensors monitor the air pressure in
TPMS to continue to function the vehicle is first started, and then
the tires and transmit the tire turn off as the vehicle is driven. This
properly. pressure readings to a receiver could be an early indicator that the
See Tire Pressure Monitor located in the vehicle. air pressure is getting low and must
Operation on page 1049. be inflated to the proper pressure.
10-50 Vehicle Care
A Tire and Loading Information label Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits matching process is performed
shows the size of the original use a GM-approved liquid tire successfully. See "TPMS Sensor
equipment tires and the correct sealant. Using non-approved tire Matching Process" later in this
inflation pressure for the tires when sealants could damage the TPMS section.
they are cold. See Vehicle Load sensors. See Tire Sealant and . The TPMS sensor matching
Limits on page 99, for an example Compressor Kit on page 1061 for process was not done or not
of the Tire and Loading Information information regarding the inflator kit completed successfully after
label and its location. Also see Tire materials and instructions. rotating the tires. The
Pressure on page 1047. malfunction light should go off
TPMS Malfunction Light
The TPMS can warn about a low after successfully completing the
tire pressure condition but it does The TPMS will not function properly sensor matching process. See
not replace normal tire if one or more of the TPMS sensors "TPMS Sensor Matching
maintenance. See Tire Inspection are missing or inoperable. When the Process" later in this section.
on page 1052, Tire Rotation on system detects a malfunction, the
low tire warning light flashes for
. One or more TPMS sensors are
page 1052 and Tires on missing or damaged. The
page 1039. about one minute and then stays on
for the remainder of the ignition malfunction light should go off
Notice: Tire sealant materials are cycle. The malfunction light comes when the TPMS sensors are
not all the same. A non-approved on at each ignition cycle until the installed and the sensor
tire sealant could damage the problem is corrected. Some of the matching process is performed
TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor conditions that can cause this to successfully. See your dealer for
damage caused by using an come on are: service.
incorrect tire sealant is not . . Replacement tires or wheels do
covered by the vehicle warranty. One of the road tires has been
replaced with the spare tire. The not match the original equipment
Always use only the tires or wheels. Tires and wheels
GM-approved tire sealant spare tire does not have a
TPMS sensor. The malfunction other than those recommended
available through your dealer or
included in the vehicle. light should go off after the road
tire is replaced and the sensor
Vehicle Care 10-51
could prevent the TPMS from the tire/wheel positions, using a 5. Press and hold the SET/CLR
functioning properly. See Buying TPMS relearn tool, in the following button to begin the sensor
New Tires on page 1054. order: driver side front tire, matching process.
. Operating electronic devices or passenger side front tire, passenger 6. The horn sounds twice to signal
being near facilities using radio side rear tire, and driver side rear. the receiver is in relearn mode
wave frequencies similar to the See your dealer for service or to and the TIRE LEARN message
TPMS could cause the TPMS purchase a relearn tool. displays on the DIC screen.
sensors to malfunction. There are two minutes to match the 7. Start with the driver side
If the TPMS is not functioning first tire/wheel position, and front tire.
properly, it cannot detect or signal a five minutes overall to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes 8. Place the relearn tool against
low tire condition. See your dealer the tire sidewall, near the valve
for service if the TPMS malfunction longer, the matching process stops
and must be restarted. stem. Then press the button to
light comes on and stays on. activate the TPMS sensor.
The TPMS sensor matching A horn chirp confirms that the
TPMS Sensor Matching process is:
Process sensor identification code has
1. Set the parking brake. been matched to this tire and
Each TPMS sensor has a unique wheel position.
identification code. The identification 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
code needs to be matched to a new the engine off. 9. Proceed to the passenger side
tire/wheel position after rotating the 3. Press the MENU button to front tire, and repeat the
tires or replacing one or more of the display the menu items in the procedure in Step 8.
TPMS sensors. The TPMS sensor Driver Information Center (DIC). 10. Proceed to the passenger side
matching process should also be rear tire, and repeat the
4. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to
performed after replacing a spare procedure in Step 8.
the Tire Learn menu item
tire with a road tire containing the
screen. 11. Proceed to the driver side rear
TPMS sensor. The malfunction light
tire, and repeat the procedure
should go off at the next ignition
in Step 8. The horn sounds two
cycle. The sensors are matched to
10-52 Vehicle Care
times to indicate the sensor . There is cord or fabric Anytime unusual wear is
identification code has been showing through the tire's noticed, rotate the tires as soon
matched to the driver side rear rubber. as possible, check for proper tire
tire, and the TPMS sensor inflation pressure, and check for
matching process is no longer
. The tread or sidewall is
cracked, cut, or snagged damaged tires or wheels. If the
active. The TIRE LEARN
message on the DIC display deep enough to show cord or unusual wear continues after the
screen goes off. fabric. rotation, check the wheel
alignment. See When It Is Time
12. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. . The tire has a bump, bulge, for New Tires on page 1053
13. Set all four tires to the or split. and Wheel Replacement on
recommended air pressure . The tire has a puncture, cut, page 1058.
level as indicated on the Tire or other damage that cannot
and Loading Information label.
be repaired well because of
the size or location of the
Tire Inspection damage.
We recommend that the tires,
including the spare tire, if the Tire Rotation
vehicle has one, be inspected Tires should be rotated every
for signs of wear or damage at 12 000 km (7,500 mi). See
least once a month. Maintenance Schedule on
Replace the tire if: page 112.
. The indicators at three or Tires are rotated to achieve a
more places around the tire uniform wear for all tires. The
can be seen. first rotation is the most Use this rotation pattern when
important. rotating the tires.
Vehicle Care 10-53
Do not include the compact When It Is Time for New

spare tire in the tire rotation. { WARNING Tires
Adjust the front and rear tires to Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the Factors such as maintenance,
the recommended inflation parts to which it is fastened, can temperatures, driving speeds,
pressure on the Tire and make wheel nuts become loose vehicle loading, and road conditions
Loading Information label after after time. The wheel could come affect the wear rate of the tires.
the tires have been rotated. See off and cause an accident. When
Tire Pressure on page 1047 changing a wheel, remove any
and Vehicle Load Limits on rust or dirt from places where the
page 99. wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, a cloth or a paper
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor towel can be used; however, use
System. See Tire Pressure a scraper or wire brush later to
Monitor Operation on remove all rust or dirt.
page 1049.
Check that all wheel nuts are Lightly coat the center of the
properly tightened. See Wheel wheel hub with wheel bearing
Nut Torque under Capacities grease after a wheel change or
and Specifications on tire rotation to prevent corrosion
Treadwear indicators are one way to
page 122. or rust build-up. Do not get
tell when it is time for new tires.
grease on the flat wheel Treadwear indicators appear when
mounting surface or on the the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
wheel nuts or bolts. or less of tread remaining. See Tire
Inspection on page 1052 and Tire
Rotation on page 1052.
10-54 Vehicle Care
The rubber in tires ages over time. slow aging. This area should be free GM's exclusive TPC Spec
This also applies to the spare tire, of grease, gasoline, or other system considers over a dozen
if the vehicle has one, even if it is substances that can deteriorate critical specifications that impact
never used. Multiple factors rubber. the overall performance of the
including temperatures, loading Parking for an extended period can vehicle, including brake system
conditions, and inflation pressure cause flat spots on the tires that
maintenance affect how fast aging performance, ride and handling,
may result in vibrations while traction control, and tire
takes place. GM recommends that driving. When storing a vehicle for
tires, including the spare if pressure monitoring
at least a month, remove the tires or performance. GM's TPC Spec
equipped, be replaced after raise the vehicle to reduce the
six years, regardless of tread wear. weight from the tires.
number is molded onto the tire's
The tire manufacturer date is the sidewall near the tire size. If the
last four digits of the DOT Tire tires have an all-season tread
Identification Number (TIN) which is Buying New Tires
design, the TPC Spec number
molded into one side of the tire GM has developed and matched will be followed by MS for mud
sidewall. The first two digits specific tires for the vehicle. The and snow. See Tire Sidewall
represent the week (0152) and the original equipment tires installed
last two digits, the year. For Labeling on page 1041.
were designed to meet General
example, the third week of the year GM recommends replacing worn
2010 would have a four-digit DOT
Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec) tires in complete sets of four.
date of 0310. Uniform tread depth on all tires
system rating. When
Vehicle Storage replacement tires are needed, will help to maintain the
GM strongly recommends performance of the vehicle.
Tires age when stored normally
buying tires with the same TPC Braking and handling
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park
a vehicle that will be stored for at Spec rating. performance may be adversely
least a month in a cool, dry, clean affected if all the tires are not
area away from direct sunlight to replaced at the same time.
Vehicle Care 10-55
If proper rotation and

maintenance have been done, WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
all four tires should wear out at could cause injury or death. after many miles of driving.
about the same time. See Tire Only your dealer or authorized A tire and/or wheel could fail
Rotation on page 1052 for tire service center should suddenly and cause a crash.
information on proper tire mount or dismount the tires. Use only radial-ply tires with
rotation. However, if it is the wheels on the vehicle.
necessary to replace only one
axle set of worn tires, place the
new tires on the rear axle. { WARNING If the vehicle tires must be
replaced with a tire that does not
Winter tires with the same speed Mixing tires of different sizes, have a TPC Spec number, make
rating as the original equipment brands, or types may cause sure they are the same size,
tires may not be available for H, loss of control of the vehicle, load range, speed rating, and
V, W, Y and ZR speed rated resulting in a crash or other construction (radial) as the
tires. Never exceed the winter vehicle damage. Use the original tires.
tire's maximum speed capability correct size, brand, and type
when using winter tires with a of tires on all wheels. Vehicles that have a tire
lower speed rating. pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate
low-pressure warning if non-TPC
{ WARNING { WARNING Spec rated tires are installed.
Tires could explode during See Tire Pressure Monitor
Using bias-ply tires on the
improper service. Attempting System on page 1048.
vehicle may cause the wheel
to mount or dismount a tire rim flanges to develop cracks
(Continued)
(Continued)
10-56 Vehicle Care
The Tire and Loading Uniform Tire Quality

Information label indicates the { WARNING Grading
original equipment tires on the If different sized wheels are used,
vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits Quality grades can be found
there may not be an acceptable
on page 99. level of performance and safety if
where applicable on the tire
tires not recommended for those sidewall between tread shoulder
Different Size Tires and wheels are selected. This and maximum section width. For
Wheels increases the chance of a crash example:
and serious injury. Only use GM Treadwear 200 Traction AA
If wheels or tires are installed that
specific wheel and tire systems Temperature A
are a different size than the original
developed for the vehicle, and
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle The following information relates
performance, including its braking, have them properly installed by a
GM certified technician. to the system developed by the
ride and handling characteristics,
stability, and resistance to rollover United States National Highway
may be affected. If the vehicle has See Buying New Tires on
Traffic Safety Administration
electronic systems such as antilock page 1054 and Accessories and (NHTSA), which grades tires by
brakes, rollover airbags, traction Modifications on page 103. treadwear, traction, and
control, electronic stability control, temperature performance. This
or All-Wheel Drive, the performance applies only to vehicles sold in
of these systems can also be the United States. The grades
affected. are molded on the sidewalls of
most passenger car tires. The
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
(UTQG) system does not apply
to deep tread, winter tires,
compact spare tires, tires with
Vehicle Care 10-57
nominal rim diameters of graded 150 would wear one and straight-ahead braking traction
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), one-half (1) times as well on tests, and does not include
or to some limited-production the government course as a tire acceleration, cornering,
tires. graded 100. The relative hydroplaning, or peak traction
While the tires available on performance of tires depends characteristics.
General Motors passenger cars upon the actual conditions of
Temperature A, B, C
and light trucks may vary with their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the The temperature grades are A
respect to these grades, they
norm due to variations in driving (the highest), B, and C,
must also conform to federal
habits, service practices and representing the tire's resistance
safety requirements and
differences in road to the generation of heat and its
additional General Motors Tire
characteristics and climate. ability to dissipate heat when
Performance Criteria (TPC)
tested under controlled
standards. Traction AA, A, B, C conditions on a specified indoor
All Passenger Car Tires Must The traction grades, from laboratory test wheel. Sustained
Conform to Federal Safety highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, high temperature can cause the
Requirements In Addition To and C. Those grades represent material of the tire to degenerate
These Grades. the tire's ability to stop on wet and reduce tire life, and
Treadwear pavement as measured under excessive temperature can
controlled conditions on lead to sudden tire failure. The
The treadwear grade is a specified government test grade C corresponds to a level
comparative rating based on the surfaces of asphalt and of performance which all
wear rate of the tire when tested concrete. A tire marked C may passenger car tires must meet
under controlled conditions on a have poor traction performance. under the Federal Motor Safety
specified government test Warning: The traction grade Standard No. 109. Grades B and
course. For example, a tire assigned to this tire is based on A represent higher levels of
10-58 Vehicle Care
performance on the laboratory road, the tires and wheels might

test wheel than the minimum need to be rebalanced. See your { WARNING
required by law. Warning: The dealer for proper diagnosis.
Using the wrong replacement
temperature grade for this tire is wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
established for a tire that is Wheel Replacement nuts can be dangerous. It could
properly inflated and not Replace any wheel that is bent, affect the braking and handling of
overloaded. Excessive speed, cracked, or badly rusted or the vehicle. Tires can lose air,
underinflation, or excessive corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming and cause loss of control, causing
loading, either separately or in loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and a crash. Always use the correct
combination, can cause heat wheel nuts should be replaced. wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
buildup and possible tire failure. If the wheel leaks air, replace it. nuts for replacement.
Some aluminum wheels can be
repaired. See your dealer if any of
Wheel Alignment and Tire these conditions exist. Notice: The wrong wheel can
Balance Your dealer will know the kind of
also cause problems with bearing
life, brake cooling, speedometer
The tires and wheels were aligned wheel that is needed. or odometer calibration,
and balanced at the factory to Each new wheel should have the headlamp aim, bumper height,
provide the longest tire life and best same load-carrying capacity, vehicle ground clearance, and tire
overall performance. Adjustments to diameter, width, offset, and be or tire chain clearance to the
wheel alignment and tire balancing mounted the same way as the one it body and chassis.
will not be necessary on a regular replaces.
basis. However, check the
alignment if there is unusual tire Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel
wear or if the vehicle is pulling to nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor
one side or the other. If the vehicle System (TPMS) sensors with new
vibrates when driving on a smooth GM original equipment parts.
Vehicle Care 10-59
Used Replacement Wheels

WARNING (Continued)
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blow out
{ WARNING parts. The area damaged by the while driving, especially if the tires
tire chains could cause loss of are maintained properly. See Tires
Replacing a wheel with a used
control and a crash. on page 1039. If air goes out of a
one is dangerous. How it has
Use another type of traction tire, it is much more likely to leak
been used or how far it has been out slowly. But if there is ever a
driven may be unknown. It could device only if its manufacturer
blowout, here are a few tips about
fail suddenly and cause a crash. recommends it for the vehicle's what to expect and what to do:
When replacing wheels, use a tire size combination and road
new GM original equipment conditions. Follow that If a front tire fails, the flat tire
wheel. manufacturer's instructions. To creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
avoid vehicle damage, drive slow toward that side. Take your foot off
and readjust or remove the the accelerator pedal and grip the
Tire Chains traction device if it contacts the steering wheel firmly. Steer to
maintain lane position, and then
vehicle. Do not spin the wheels.
gently brake to a stop, well off the
{ WARNING If traction devices are used, install
road, if possible.
them on the front tires.
Do not use tire chains. There is A rear blowout, particularly on a
not enough clearance. Tire chains curve, acts much like a skid and
used on a vehicle without the may require the same correction as
proper amount of clearance can used in a skid. Stop pressing the
cause damage to the brakes, accelerator pedal and steer to
suspension, or other vehicle straighten the vehicle. It may be
(Continued) very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake
to a stop, well off the road,
if possible.
10-60 Vehicle Care
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

Driving on a flat tire will cause changing a flat tire. If it is used for 1. Set the parking brake firmly.
permanent damage to the tire. anything else, you or others could 2. Put an automatic
Re-inflating a tire after it has been be badly injured or killed if the transmission in P (Park) or a
driven on while severely vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack manual transmission in
underinflated or flat may cause a is provided with the vehicle, only 1 (First) or R (Reverse).
blowout and a serious crash. use it for changing a flat tire.
3. Turn off the engine and do
Never attempt to re-inflate a tire
not restart while the vehicle
that has been driven on while If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire is raised.
severely underinflated or flat. and wheel damage by driving slowly
Have your dealer or an authorized 4. Do not allow passengers to
to a level place, well off the road,
tire service center repair or remain in the vehicle.
if possible. Turn on the hazard
replace the flat tire as soon as warning flashers. See Hazard 5. Place wheel blocks on both
possible. Warning Flashers on page 63. sides of the tire at the
opposite corner of the tire
{ WARNING being changed.
{ WARNING Changing a tire can be This vehicle may come with a jack
Lifting a vehicle and getting under dangerous. The vehicle can slip and spare tire or a tire sealant and
it to do maintenance or repairs is off the jack and roll over or fall compressor kit. To use the jacking
dangerous without the causing injury or death. Find a equipment to change a spare tire
appropriate safety equipment and level place to change the tire. To safely, follow the instructions below.
training. If a jack is provided with help prevent the vehicle from Then see Tire Changing on
the vehicle, it is designed only for moving: page 1068. To use the tire sealant
Vehicle Care 10-61
and compressor kit, see Tire Tire Sealant and WARNING (Continued)
Sealant and Compressor Kit on
page 1061.
Compressor Kit
and compressor kit instructions
When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),
use the following example as a
{ WARNING and inflate the tire to its
recommended pressure. Do not
guide to assist you in the placement Idling a vehicle in an enclosed exceed the recommended
of wheel blocks (1). area with poor ventilation is pressure.
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. { WARNING
It can cause unconsciousness Storing the tire sealant and
and even death. Never run the compressor kit or other
engine in an enclosed area that equipment in the passenger
has no fresh air ventilation. For compartment of the vehicle could
more information, see Engine cause injury. In a sudden stop or
1. Wheel Block Exhaust on page 920. collision, loose equipment could
2. Flat Tire strike someone. Store the tire
The following information explains sealant and compressor kit in its
how to repair or change a tire. { WARNING original location.
Overinflating a tire could cause If this vehicle has a tire sealant and
the tire to rupture and you or compressor kit, there may not be a
others could be injured. Be sure spare tire or tire changing
to read and follow the tire sealant
(Continued)
10-62 Vehicle Care
equipment, and on some vehicles The kit includes:

there may not be a place to store
a tire.
The tire sealant and compressor
can be used to temporarily seal
punctures up to 6 mm (0.25 in) in
the tread area of the tire. It can also
be used to inflate an
underinflated tire.
If the tire has been separated from
the wheel, has damaged sidewalls,
or has a large puncture, the tire is
too severely damaged for the tire 9. Power Plug
sealant and compressor kit to be 10. Air Only Hose
1. Sealant Canister Inlet Valve
effective. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 135. 2. Sealant/Air Hose Tire Sealant
Read and follow all of the tire 3. Base of Sealant Canister Read and follow the safe handling
sealant and compressor kit instructions on the label adhered to
4. Tire Sealant Canister
instructions. the tire sealant canister (4).
5. On/Off Button
Check the tire sealant expiration
6. Slot on Top of Compressor date on the tire sealant canister.
7. Pressure Deflation Button The tire sealant canister (4) should
be replaced before its expiration
8. Pressure Gauge date. Replacement tire sealant
canisters are available at your local
dealer.
Vehicle Care 10-63
There is only enough sealant to seal 1. Remove the tire sealant

one tire. After usage, the tire sealant canister (4) and compressor
canister must be replaced. from its storage location. See
Storing the Tire Sealant and
Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 1068.
Compressor Kit to Temporarily
Seal and Inflate a 2. Remove the air only hose (10)
and the power plug (9) from the
Punctured Tire bottom of the compressor.
When using the tire sealant and
3. Place the compressor on the
compressor kit during cold
ground near the flat tire.
temperatures, warm the kit in a
heated environment for five minutes.
This will help to inflate the tire 5. Slide the base of the tire sealant
faster. canister (3) into the slot on the
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire top of the compressor (6) to hold
and wheel damage by driving slowly it upright.
to a level place. Turn on the hazard Make sure the tire valve stem is
warning flashers. See Hazard positioned close to the ground
Warning Flashers on page 63. so the hose will reach it.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on 6. Remove the valve stem cap from
page 1059 for other important the flat tire by turning it
safety warnings. counterclockwise.
Do not remove any objects that
have penetrated the tire. 4. Attach the air only hose (10) to
the sealant canister inlet
valve (1) by turning it clockwise
until tight.
10-64 Vehicle Care
Do not pinch the power plug on the Tire and Loading

cord in the door or window. Information label. See Tire
9. Start the vehicle. The vehicle Pressure on page 1047.
must be running while using the The pressure gauge (8) may
air compressor. read higher than the actual tire
10. Press the on/off button (5) to pressure while the compressor
turn the tire sealant and is on. Turn the compressor off
compressor kit on. to get an accurate pressure
reading. The compressor may
The compressor will inject be turned on/off until the
sealant and air into the tire. correct pressure is reached.
The pressure gauge (8) will Notice: If the recommended
7. Attach the sealant/air hose (2) to initially show a high pressure pressure cannot be reached after
the tire valve stem by turning it while the compressor pushes approximately 25 minutes, the
clockwise until tight. the sealant into the tire. Once vehicle should not be driven
8. Plug the power plug (9) into the the sealant is completely farther. The tire is too severely
accessory power outlet in the dispersed into the tire, the damaged and the tire sealant and
vehicle. Unplug all items from pressure will quickly drop and compressor kit cannot inflate the
other accessory power outlets. start to rise again as the tire tire. Remove the power plug from
See Power Outlets on page 56. inflates with air only. the accessory power outlet and
11. Inflate the tire to the unscrew the inflating hose from
If the vehicle has an accessory the tire valve. See Roadside
power outlet, do not use the recommended inflation
pressure using the pressure Assistance Program on
cigarette lighter. page 135.
gauge (8). The recommended
If the vehicle only has a cigarette inflation pressure can be found
lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
Vehicle Care 10-65
12. Press the on/off button (5) to 17. Turn the air only hose (10) 21. Return the equipment to its
turn the tire sealant and counterclockwise to remove it original storage location in the
compressor kit off. from the tire sealant canister vehicle.
The tire is not sealed and will inlet valve (1). 22. Immediately drive the vehicle
continue to leak air until the 18. Turn the sealant/air hose (2) 8 km (5 mi) to distribute the
vehicle is driven and the clockwise onto the sealant sealant in the tire.
sealant is distributed in the tire. canister inlet valve (1) to 23. Stop at a safe location and
Therefore, Steps 1321 must prevent sealant leakage. check the tire pressure. Refer
be done immediately after 19. Return the air only hose (10) to Steps 110 under Using the
Step 12. and power plug (9) back to Tire Sealant and Compressor
Be careful while handling the their original storage location. Kit without Sealant to Inflate a
tire sealant and compressor kit Tire (Not Punctured).
as it could be warm after If the tire pressure has fallen
usage. more than 68 kPa (10 psi)
13. Unplug the power plug (9) from below the recommended
the accessory power outlet in inflation pressure, stop driving
the vehicle. the vehicle. The tire is too
14. Turn the sealant/air hose (2) severely damaged and the tire
20. If the flat tire was able to inflate sealant cannot seal the tire.
to the recommended inflation See Roadside Assistance
from the tire valve stem.
pressure, remove the Program on page 135.
15. Replace the tire valve maximum speed label from the
stem cap. If the tire pressure has not
sealant canister and place it in
dropped more than 68 kPa
16. Remove the tire sealant a highly visible location.
(10 psi) from the recommended
canister (4) from the slot on top Do not exceed the speed on inflation pressure, inflate the
of the compressor (6). this label until the damaged tire tire to the recommended
is repaired or replaced. inflation pressure.
10-66 Vehicle Care
24. Wipe off any sealant from the Using the Tire Sealant and 8. Pressure Gauge
wheel, tire, or vehicle. Compressor Kit without
25. Dispose of the used tire Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not
sealant canister (4) at a local Punctured)
dealer or in accordance with The kit includes:
local state codes and practices.
26. Replace it with a new canister
available from your dealer.
27. After temporarily sealing a tire
using the tire sealant and
compressor kit, take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer
within 161 km (100 mi) of
driving to have the tire repaired 9. Power Plug
or replaced.
10. Air Only Hose
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
1. Sealant Canister Inlet Valve to a level place. Turn on the hazard
2. Sealant/Air Hose warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 63.
3. Base of Sealant Canister
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
4. Tire Sealant Canister
page 1059 for other important
5. On/Off Button safety warnings.
6. Slot on Top of Compressor
7. Pressure Deflation Button
Vehicle Care 10-67
1. Remove the compressor from its If the vehicle only has a cigarette reading. The compressor may
storage location. See Storing the lighter, use the cigarette lighter. be turned on/off until the correct
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Do not pinch the power plug pressure is reached.
on page 1068. cord in the door or window. Notice: If the recommended
2. Remove the air only hose (10) 7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle pressure cannot be reached after
and the power plug (9) from the must be running while using the approximately 25 minutes, the
bottom of the compressor. air compressor. vehicle should not be driven
3. Place the compressor on the farther. The tire is too severely
8. Press the on/off button (5) to damaged and the tire sealant and
ground near the flat tire. turn the tire sealant and compressor kit cannot inflate the
Make sure the tire valve stem is compressor kit on. tire. Remove the power plug from
positioned close to the ground The compressor will inflate the the accessory power outlet and
so the hose will reach it. tire with air only. unscrew the inflating hose from
4. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire valve. See Roadside
9. Inflate the tire to the Assistance Program on
the flat tire by turning it recommended inflation pressure
counterclockwise. page 135.
using the pressure gauge (8).
5. Attach the air only hose (10) to The recommended inflation 10. Press the on/off button (5) to
the tire valve stem by turning it pressure can be found on the turn the tire sealant and
clockwise until tight. Tire and Loading Information compressor kit off.
6. Plug the power plug (9) into the label. See Tire Pressure on Be careful while handling the
accessory power outlet in the page 1047. compressor as it could be
vehicle. Unplug all items from The pressure gauge (8) may warm after usage.
other accessory power outlets. read higher than the actual tire 11. Unplug the power plug (9) from
See Power Outlets on page 56. pressure while the compressor is the accessory power outlet in
If the vehicle has an accessory on. Turn the compressor off to the vehicle.
power outlet, do not use the get an accurate pressure
cigarette lighter.
10-68 Vehicle Care
12. Turn the air only hose (10) Tire Changing

from the tire valve stem. Removing the Spare Tire and
13. Replace the tire valve Tools
stem cap. The compact spare tire and tools
14. Return the air only hose (10) are located in the storage
and power plug (9) back to compartment in the rear of the
their original storage location. vehicle. The jack and tools are
stored below the spare tire.
15. Return the equipment to its
original storage location in the
vehicle.
The tire sealant and compressor kit 2. Remove the tire sealant
has accessory adapters located in a canister (1) and the
compartment on the bottom of its compressor (2).
housing that can be used to inflate To store the tire sealant canister and
air mattresses, balls, etc. compressor:
Storing the Tire Sealant 1. Attach the sealant/air hose to

the sealant canister inlet valve.
and Compressor Kit
2. Return the sealant canister and
The tire sealant and compressor kit the compressor to their original
is located in the rear storage area. storage location. 1. Extension
1. Lift the trim cover. 2. Jack
3. Wheel Wrench
4. Strap
Vehicle Care 10-69
To access the spare tire and tools: 5. Remove the jack and tools from
1. Open the trunk or liftgate. See their container and place them
Trunk (Sedan) on page 28 or near the tire being changed.
Liftgate (Hatchback) on Removing the Flat Tire and
page 29. Installing the Spare Tire
2. Lift the trim cover. 1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 1059.
3. Turn the wheel nuts

counterclockwise to loosen
them. Do not remove them yet.
3. Turn the retainer

counterclockwise and remove it
from the compact spare. 2. Remove the wheel cover, if the
4. Remove the compact spare tire. vehicle has one, to reach the
See Compact Spare Tire on wheel bolts.
10-70 Vehicle Care
5. Insert the jack handle into the

jack and the wheel wrench onto WARNING (Continued)
the end of the jack handle.
avoid personal injury and vehicle
6. Turn the wheel wrench damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
clockwise until the lift head is head into the proper location
firmly contacting the proper before raising the vehicle.
lifting point nearest the flat tire.
{ WARNING 7. Turn the wheel wrench

clockwise to raise the vehicle.
Getting under a vehicle when it is Raise the vehicle far enough off
lifted on a jack is dangerous. the ground so there is enough
4. Place the jack at the position If the vehicle slips off the jack, room for the compact spare tire
marked with a half circle. you could be badly injured or to fit underneath the wheel well.
killed. Never get under a vehicle 8. Turn the wheel nuts
when it is supported only by counterclockwise to
a jack. remove them.
9. Remove the flat tire.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Raising the vehicle with the jack Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
improperly positioned can parts to which it is fastened, can
damage the vehicle and even make wheel nuts become loose
make the vehicle fall. To help after time. The wheel could come
Vehicle Care 10-71
11. Place the compact spare tire

WARNING (Continued) on the wheel-mounting surface. WARNING (Continued)
off and cause an accident. When be tightened with a torque wrench
changing a wheel, remove any { WARNING to the proper torque specification
rust or dirt from places where the Never use oil or grease on bolts after replacing. Follow the torque
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In or nuts because the nuts might specification supplied by the
an emergency, a cloth or a paper come loose. The vehicle's wheel aftermarket manufacturer when
towel can be used; however, use could fall off, causing a crash. using accessory locking wheel
a scraper or wire brush later to nuts. See Capacities and
remove all rust or dirt. Specifications on page 122 for
12. Reinstall the wheel nuts. original equipment wheel nut
Tighten each nut by hand until torque specifications.
the wheel is held against
the hub.
Notice: Improperly tightened
13. Lower the vehicle by turning wheel nuts can lead to brake
the wheel wrench pulsation and rotor damage. To
counterclockwise. Lower the avoid expensive brake repairs,
jack completely. evenly tighten the wheel nuts in
the proper sequence and to the
{ WARNING proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on
Wheel nuts that are improperly or page 122 for the wheel nut
incorrectly tightened can cause torque specification.
the wheels to become loose or
10. Remove any rust or dirt from come off. The wheel nuts should
the wheel bolts, mounting (Continued)
surfaces, and spare wheel.
10-72 Vehicle Care
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire

and Tools
{ WARNING
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in 4. Attach one end of the strap to a
a crisscross sequence, as cargo tie-down in the rear of the
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools
shown. vehicle.
1. Return the jack and tools to their
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit
original storage location.
on the vehicle's compact spare.
If you try to put a wheel cover on 2. Replace the trim cover.
the compact spare, the cover or 3. Place the flat tire, lying flat, in
the spare could be damaged. the rear storage compartment.
If the vehicle is a sedan the flat
tire should be against the back
of the rear seats.
If the vehicle is a hatchback the
flat tire should be against the
back of the trunk.
Vehicle Care 10-73
Storing the Compact Spare Tire Check the inflation pressure

and Tools regularly. It should be 420 kPa
Reverse the instructions for (60 psi).
removing the spare tire and tools to Stop as soon as possible and check
store the compact spare tire. that the spare tire is correctly
The compact spare tire is for inflated after being installed on the
temporary use only. Replace the vehicle. The compact spare tire is
compact spare tire with a full-size designed for temporary use only.
tire as soon as you can. See The vehicle will perform differently
Sedan
Compact Spare Tire on page 1073. with the spare tire installed and it is
recommended that the vehicle
speed be limited to 80 km/h
Compact Spare Tire (50 mph). To conserve the tread of
the spare tire, have the standard tire
{ WARNING repaired or replaced as soon as
convenient and return the spare tire
Driving with more than one to the storage area.
compact spare tire at a time could
result in loss of braking and Notice: When the compact spare
Hatchback is installed, do not take the
handling. This could lead to a
vehicle through an automatic car
5. Route the strap through the crash and you or others could be
wash with guide rails. The
wheel, as shown. injured. Use only one compact compact spare can get caught on
spare tire at a time. the rails which can damage the
6. Attach the other end of the strap
to the other cargo tie-down in tire, wheel, and other parts of the
the rear of the vehicle. If this vehicle has a compact spare vehicle.
tire, it was fully inflated when new; Do not use the compact spare on
7. Tighten the strap. however, it can lose air over time. other vehicles.
10-74 Vehicle Care
Do not mix the compact spare tire or Jump Starting Notice: Ignoring these steps
wheel with other wheels or tires. could result in costly damage to
They will not fit. Keep the spare tire For more information about the the vehicle that would not be
and its wheel together. vehicle battery, see Battery on covered by the warranty.
page 1023.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the Trying to start the vehicle by
compact spare. Using them can If the battery has run down, try to pushing or pulling it will not
damage the vehicle and the use another vehicle and some work, and it could damage the
chains. Do not use tire chains on jumper cables to start your vehicle. vehicle.
the compact spare. Be sure to use the following steps to
do it safely.
{ WARNING
Batteries can hurt you. They can
be dangerous because:
. They contain acid that can
burn you.
. They contain gas that can
explode or ignite.
. They contain enough
electricity to burn you. 1. Discharged Battery Positive Post
If you do not follow these steps 2. Discharged Battery
exactly, some or all of these Negative Post
things can hurt you. 3. Good Battery Negative Post
4. Good Battery Positive Post
Vehicle Care 10-75
The jump start negative post and or Neutral with a manual

positive post are on the discharged transmission. See Shifting Into { WARNING
battery on the driver side of the Park (Automatic Transmission)
vehicle. on page 918 with an automatic An electric fan can start up even
transmission, or Parking on when the engine is not running
The jump start positive post and and can injure you. Keep hands,
negative post are on the battery of page 920 with a manual
transmission. clothing and tools away from any
the vehicle providing the jump start. underhood electric fan.
The positive jump start connection Notice: If any accessories are left
for the discharged battery is under a on or plugged in during the jump
trim cover. Open the cover to starting procedure, they could be
expose the terminal. damaged. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle
{ WARNING
1. Check the other vehicle. It must warranty. Whenever possible, Using a match near a battery can
have a 12-volt battery with a turn off or unplug all accessories cause battery gas to explode.
negative ground system. on either vehicle when jump People have been hurt doing this,
Notice: Only use a vehicle that starting the vehicle. and some have been blinded.
has a 12-volt system with a 4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. Use a flashlight if you need more
negative ground for jump Turn off all lights and light.
starting. If the other vehicle does accessories in both vehicles, Be sure the battery has enough
not have a 12-volt system with a except the hazard warning water. You do not need to add
negative ground, both vehicles flashers if needed. water to the battery installed in
can be damaged.
your new vehicle. But if a battery
2. Position the two vehicles so that has filler caps, be sure the right
they are not touching. amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
3. Set the parking brake firmly and (Continued)
put the shift lever in P (Park)
with an automatic transmission,
10-76 Vehicle Care
6. Connect the other end of the red Notice: If the jumper cables are
WARNING (Continued) positive (+) cable to the connected or removed in the
positive (+) terminal of the good wrong order, electrical shorting
add water to take care of that battery. may occur and damage the
first. If you do not, explosive gas vehicle. The repairs would not be
could be present. 7. Connect one end of the black
negative () cable to the covered by the vehicle warranty.
Battery fluid contains acid that negative () terminal of the good Always connect and remove the
can burn you. Do not get it on battery. jumper cables in the correct
you. If you accidentally get it in order, making sure that the
8. Connect the other end of the cables do not touch each other or
your eyes or on your skin, flush
black negative () cable to the other metal.
the place with water and get
negative () post for the
medical help immediately. discharged battery. Jumper Cable Removal
9. Start the engine in the vehicle Reverse the sequence exactly when
with the good battery and run removing the jumper cables.
{ WARNING the engine at idle speed for at
least four minutes.
Fans or other moving engine
parts can injure you badly. Keep 10. Try to start the vehicle that had
your hands away from moving the dead battery. If it will not
start after a few tries, it
parts once the engine is running.
probably needs service.
5. Connect one end of the red

positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal on the
discharged battery.
Vehicle Care 10-77
Towing To tow the vehicle behind another Here are some important things to
vehicle for recreational purposes, consider before recreational vehicle
such as behind a motor home, see towing:
Towing the Vehicle Recreational Vehicle Towing in this . What is the towing capacity of
Notice: Incorrectly towing a section. the towing vehicle? Be sure to
disabled vehicle may cause read the tow vehicle
damage. The damage would not Recreational Vehicle manufacturer's
be covered by the vehicle Towing recommendations.
warranty. Do not lash or hook to
the chassis components Recreational vehicle towing means . What is the distance that will be
including the front and rear towing the vehicle behind another traveled? Some vehicles have
subframes, suspension control vehicle, such as a motor home. The restrictions on how far and how
arms and links during towing and two most common types of long they can tow.
recovery of a disabled vehicle or recreational vehicle towing are . Is the proper towing equipment
to secure the vehicle to a flatbed known as dinghy towing and dolly going to be used? See your
car carrier. Use the proper nylon towing. Dinghy towing is towing the dealer or trailering professional
strap harnesses around the tires vehicle with all four wheels on the for additional advice and
to secure the flatbed car carrier. ground. Dolly towing is towing the equipment recommendations.
vehicle with two wheels on the
Have the vehicle towed on a flatbed ground and two wheels up on a
. Is the vehicle ready to be
car carrier. A wheel lift tow truck device known as a dolly. towed? Just as preparing the
could damage the vehicle. vehicle for a long trip, make sure
Consult your dealer or a the vehicle is prepared to be
professional towing service if the towed.
disabled vehicle must be towed.
10-78 Vehicle Care
Dinghy Towing RS Model with towed, a dolly should be used. See To dinghy tow the vehicle from the
Automatic Transmission Dolly Towing that follows for more front with all four wheels on the
information. ground:
Dinghy Towing All except RS 1. Position the vehicle to tow and
Model with Automatic then secure it to the towing
Transmission vehicle.
When dinghy towing a vehicle with 2. Shift the automatic transmission

an automatic transmission, the to P (Park) or a manual
vehicle should be run at the transmission into 1 (First) gear
beginning of each day and at each and turn the ignition to
RV fuel stop for about five minutes. LOCK/OFF.
This will ensure proper lubrication of 3. Set the parking brake.
transmission components. 4. To prevent the battery from
draining while the vehicle is
Notice: If the vehicle is towed being towed, remove the
with all four wheels on the following fuse from the
ground, the drivetrain instrument panel fuse block:
components could be damaged. (DLIS). See Instrument Panel
The repairs would not be covered Fuse Block on page 1037 for
by the vehicle warranty. Do not more information.
tow the vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground. 5. Turn the ignition to ACC/
ACCESSORY.
The vehicle was not designed to be
towed with all four wheels on the 6. Shift the automatic transmission
ground. If the vehicle must be to N (Neutral) or a manual
transmission to Neutral.
7. Release the parking brake.
Vehicle Care 10-79
Remember to reinstall the DLIS fuse Dolly Towing from the Front 4. Set the parking brake and
once the destination has been remove the key.
reached. 5. Clamp the steering wheel in a
Notice: If 105 km/h (65 mph) is straight-ahead position with a
exceeded while towing the clamping device designed for
vehicle, it could be damaged. towing.
Never exceed 105 km/h (65 mph) 6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
while towing the vehicle.
7. Release the parking brake.
Dolly Towing from the Rear
The vehicle can be towed from the

front using a dolly. To tow the
vehicle using a dolly, follow these
steps:
1. Attach the dolly to the tow
vehicle following the dolly
manufacturer's instructions.
Notice: Towing the vehicle from
the rear could damage it. Also, 2. Drive the front wheels onto the
repairs would not be covered by dolly.
the vehicle warranty. Never have 3. Put an automatic transmission in
the vehicle towed from the rear. P (Park) or a manual
transmission into 1 (First) gear.
10-80 Vehicle Care
Notice: Towing the vehicle from Appearance Care product usage, necessary safety
the rear with the front wheels on precautions, and appropriate
the ground could cause disposal of any vehicle care
transmission damage. Do not tow Exterior Care product.
the vehicle from the rear with the Locks Notice: Avoid using
front wheels on the ground. high-pressure washes closer than
Locks are lubricated at the factory.
Use a de-icing agent only when 30 cm (12 in) to the surface of the
absolutely necessary, and have the vehicle. Use of power washers
locks greased after using. See exceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi)
Recommended Fluids and can result in damage or removal
Lubricants. of paint and decals.
Rinse the vehicle well, before
Washing the Vehicle washing and after, to remove all
To preserve the vehicle's finish, cleaning agents completely. If they
wash it often and out of direct are allowed to dry on the surface,
sunlight. they could stain.
Notice: Do not use Dry the finish with a soft, clean
petroleum-based, acidic, chamois or an all-cotton towel to
or abrasive cleaning agents as avoid surface scratches and water
they can damage the vehicle's spotting.
paint, metal, or plastic parts.
If damage occurs, it would not be Finish Care
covered by the vehicle's warranty. Application of aftermarket clearcoat
Approved cleaning products can sealant/wax materials is not
be obtained from your dealer. recommended. If painted surfaces
Follow all manufacturer are damaged, see your dealer to
directions regarding correct have the damage assessed and
Vehicle Care 10-81
repaired. Foreign materials such as that are made for a basecoat/ Windshield and Wiper Blades
calcium chloride and other salts, ice clearcoat paint finish on the
Clean the outside of the windshield
melting agents, road oil and tar, tree vehicle.
with glass cleaner.
sap, bird droppings, chemicals from To keep the paint finish looking new,
industrial chimneys, etc., can Clean rubber blades using a lint-free
keep the vehicle garaged or
damage the vehicle's finish if they cloth or paper towel soaked with
covered whenever possible.
remain on painted surfaces. Wash windshield washer fluid or a mild
the vehicle as soon as possible. Protecting Exterior Bright Metal detergent. Wash the windshield
If necessary, use non-abrasive Parts thoroughly when cleaning the
cleaners that are marked safe for Regularly clean bright metal parts blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and
painted surfaces to remove foreign with water or chrome polish on a buildup of vehicle wash/wax
matter. chrome or stainless steel trim, treatments may cause wiper
if necessary. streaking.
Occasional hand waxing or mild
polishing should be done to remove For aluminum, never use auto or Replace the wiper blades if they are
residue from the paint finish. See chrome polish, steam, or caustic worn or damaged. Damage can be
your dealer for approved cleaning soap to clean. A coating of wax, caused by extreme dusty
products. rubbed to a high polish, is conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,
recommended for all bright metal snow, and ice.
Do not apply waxes or polishes to
uncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber, parts. Weatherstrips
decals, simulated wood, or flat paint
as damage can occur. Cleaning Exterior Lamps/ Apply silicone grease on
Lenses and Emblems weatherstrips to make them last
Notice: Machine compounding or longer, seal better, and not stick or
aggressive polishing on a Use only lukewarm or cold water, a squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish soft cloth, and a car washing soap once a year. Black marks from
may damage it. Use only to clean exterior lamps, lenses and
rubber material on painted surfaces
non-abrasive waxes and polishes emblems. Follow instructions under can be removed by rubbing with a
"Washing the Vehicle" in this
section.
10-82 Vehicle Care
clean cloth. See Recommended calcium, or sodium chloride. leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually
Fluids and Lubricants on These chlorides are used on check constant velocity joints,
page 1112. roads for conditions such as ice rubber boots, and axle seals for
and dust. Always wash the leaks.
Tires chrome with soap and water after
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to exposure. Body Component Lubrication
clean the tires. Notice: To avoid surface damage, Lubricate all key lock cylinders,
Notice: Using petroleum-based do not use strong soaps, hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and the
tire dressing products on the chemicals, abrasive polishes, steel fuel door hinge unless the
vehicle may damage the paint cleaners, brushes, or cleaners components are plastic. Applying
finish and/or tires. When applying that contain acid on aluminum or silicone grease on weatherstrips
a tire dressing, always wipe off chrome-plated wheels. Use only with a clean cloth will make them
any overspray from all painted approved cleaners. Also, never last longer, seal better, and not stick
surfaces on the vehicle. drive a vehicle with aluminum or or squeak.
chrome-plated wheels through an Underbody Maintenance
Wheels and Trim Aluminum automatic car wash that uses
or Chrome silicone carbide tire cleaning Use plain water to flush dirt and
brushes. Damage could occur debris from the vehicle's underbody.
Use a soft, clean cloth with mild
and the repairs would not be Your dealer or an underbody car
soap and water to clean the wheels.
covered by the vehicle warranty. washing system can do this. If not
After rinsing thoroughly with clean
removed, rust and corrosion can
water, dry with a soft, clean towel. Steering, Suspension, and develop.
A wax may then be applied.
Chassis Components
Notice: Chrome wheels and other Sheet Metal Damage
Visually inspect the front and rear
chrome trim may be damaged if If the vehicle is damaged and
suspension and steering system for
the vehicle is not washed after requires sheet metal repair or
damaged, loose, or missing parts or
driving on roads that have been replacement, make sure the body
signs of wear. Inspect the power
sprayed with magnesium, repair shop applies anti-corrosion
steering for proper hook-up, binding,
Vehicle Care 10-83
material to parts repaired or Interior Care remain on the surface being

replaced to restore corrosion cleaned for extended periods
protection. To prevent dirt particle abrasions, of time.
regularly clean the vehicle's interior.
Original manufacturer replacement Immediately remove any soils. Note Cleaners may contain solvents that
parts will provide the corrosion that newspapers or dark garments can become concentrated in the
protection while maintaining the that can transfer color to home interior. Before using cleaners, read
vehicle warranty. furnishings can also permanently and adhere to all safety instructions
transfer color to the vehicle's on the label. While cleaning the
Finish Damage interior, maintain adequate
interior.
Quickly repair minor chips and ventilation by opening the doors and
scratches with touch-up materials Use a soft bristle brush to remove windows.
available from your dealer to avoid dust from knobs and crevices on the
instrument cluster. Using a mild To prevent damage, do not clean
corrosion. Larger areas of finish the interior using the following
damage can be corrected in your soap solution, immediately remove
hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect cleaners or techniques:
dealer's body and paint shop.
repellent from all interior surfaces or . Never use a razor or any other
Chemical Paint Spotting permanent damage may result. sharp object to remove a soil
Airborne pollutants can fall upon Your dealer may have products for from any interior surface.
and attack painted vehicle surfaces cleaning the interior. Use cleaners . Never use a brush with stiff
causing blotchy, ring-shaped specifically designed for the bristles.
discolorations, and small, irregular surfaces being cleaned to prevent . Never rub any surface
dark spots etched into the paint permanent damage. Apply all
aggressively or with excessive
surface. cleaners directly to the cleaning
cloth. Do not spray cleaners directly pressure.
on any switches or controls. . Do not use laundry detergents or
Cleaners should be removed dishwashing soaps with
quickly. Never allow cleaners to degreasers. For liquid cleaners,
use approximately 20 drops per
10-84 Vehicle Care
3.78 L (1 gal) of water. Notice: Cleaning the windshield Fabric/Carpet/Suede

A concentrated soap solution will with water during the first three to
Start by vacuuming the surface
leave a residue that creates six months of ownership will
using a soft brush attachment. If a
streaks and attracts dirt. Do not reduce tendency to fog.
rotating brush attachment is being
use solutions that contain strong
Speaker Covers used during vacuuming, only use it
or caustic soap.
on the floor carpet. Before cleaning,
. Do not heavily saturate the Vacuum around a speaker cover gently remove as much of the soil
upholstery when cleaning. gently, so that the speaker will not as possible using one of the
be damaged. Clean spots with just following techniques:
. Do not use solvents or cleaners water and mild soap.
containing solvents. . Gently blot liquids with a paper
Coated Moldings towel. Continue blotting until no
Interior Glass more soil can be removed.
Coated moldings should be cleaned.
To clean, use a terry cloth fabric . For solid soils, remove as much
dampened with water. Wipe droplets
. When lightly soiled, wipe with a
sponge or soft lint-free cloth as possible prior to vacuuming.
left behind with a clean dry cloth.
Commercial glass cleaners may be dampened with water. To clean:
used, if necessary, after cleaning . When heavily soiled, use warm 1. Saturate a clean lint-free
the interior glass with plain water. soapy water. colorfast cloth with water or club
Notice: To prevent scratching, soda. Microfiber cloth is
never use abrasive cleaners on recommended to prevent lint
automotive glass. Abrasive transfer to the fabric or carpet.
cleaners or aggressive cleaning 2. Remove excess moisture by
may damage the rear window gently wringing until water does
defogger. not drip from the cleaning cloth.
Vehicle Care 10-85
3. Start on the outside edge of the Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces Instrument Panel, Leather,
soil and gently rub toward the and Vehicle Information and Vinyl, and Other Plastic
center. Fold the cleaning cloth to Radio Displays Surfaces
a clean area frequently to
prevent forcing the soil in to the For vehicles with high gloss Use a soft microfiber cloth
fabric. surfaces or vehicle displays, use a dampened with water to remove
microfiber cloth to wipe surfaces. dust and loose dirt. For a more
4. Continue gently rubbing the Before wiping the surface with the thorough cleaning, use a soft
soiled area until there is no microfiber cloth, use a soft bristle microfiber cloth dampened with a
longer any color transfer from brush to remove dirt that could mild soap solution.
the soil to the cleaning cloth. scratch the surface. Then use the Notice: Soaking or saturating
5. If the soil is not completely microfiber cloth by gently rubbing to leather, especially perforated
removed, use a mild soap clean. Never use window cleaners leather, as well as other interior
solution followed only by club or solvents. Periodically hand wash surfaces, may cause permanent
soda or plain water. the microfiber cloth separately, damage. Wipe excess moisture
using mild soap. Do not use bleach from these surfaces after
If the soil is not completely or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly
removed, it may be necessary to cleaning and allow them to dry
and air dry before next use. naturally. Never use heat, steam,
use a commercial upholstery
cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small Notice: Do not attach a device spot lifters, or spot removers. Do
hidden area for colorfastness before with a suction cup to the display. not use cleaners that contain
using a commercial upholstery This may cause damage and silicone or wax-based products.
cleaner or spot lifter. If ring would not be covered by the Cleaners containing these
formation occurs, clean the entire warranty. solvents can permanently change
fabric or carpet. the appearance and feel of leather
or soft trim and are not
Following the cleaning process, a recommended.
paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture.
10-86 Vehicle Care
Do not use cleaners that increase Care of Safety Belts Use the following guidelines for
gloss, especially on the instrument proper floor mat usage:
Keep belts clean and dry.
panel. Reflected glare can decrease . The original equipment floor
visibility through the windshield
under certain conditions. { WARNING mats were designed for your
vehicle. If the floor mats need
Notice: Use of air fresheners may Do not bleach or dye safety belts. replacing, it is recommended
cause permanent damage to It may severely weaken them. In that GM certified floor mats be
plastics and painted surfaces. a crash, they might not be able to purchased. Non-GM floor mats
If an air freshener comes in provide adequate protection. may not fit properly and may
contact with any plastic or Clean safety belts only with mild interfere with the pedals. Always
painted surface in the vehicle, soap and lukewarm water. check that the floor mats do not
blot immediately and clean with a interfere with the pedals.
soft cloth dampened with a mild . Use the floor mat with the
soap solution. Damage caused by Floor Mats correct side up. Do not turn
air fresheners would not be it over.
covered by the vehicle warranty.
{ WARNING . Do not place anything on top of
Cargo Cover and the driver side floor mat.
Convenience Net If a floor mat is the wrong size or
is not properly installed, it can . Use only a single floor mat on
Wash with warm water and mild interfere with the pedals. the driver side.
detergent. Do not use chlorine Interference with the pedals can . Do not place one floor mat on
bleach. Rinse with cold water, and cause unintended acceleration top of another.
then dry completely. and/or increased stopping
distance which can cause a crash
and injury. Make sure the floor
mat does not interfere with the
pedals.
Vehicle Care 10-87
Removing and Replacing the

Floor Mats
Pull up on the rear of the floor mat
to unlock each retainer and remove.
Reinstall by lining up the floor mat

retainer openings over the carpet
retainers and snap into position.
Make sure the floor mat is properly
secured in place.
Verify the floor mat does not
interfere with the pedals.
10-88 Vehicle Care
2 NOTES
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information technicians, the dealer is the place

for routine maintenance such as oil
Maintenance Your vehicle is an important
investment. This section describes
changes and tire rotations and
additional maintenance items like
the required maintenance for the tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper
General Information vehicle. Follow this schedule to help blades.
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 protect against major repair
Notice: Damage caused by
expenses resulting from neglect or
improper maintenance can lead to
Maintenance Schedule inadequate maintenance. It may
costly repairs and may not be
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2 also help to maintain the value of
covered by the vehicle warranty.
the vehicle if it is sold. It is the
Special Application Services Maintenance intervals, checks,
responsibility of the owner to have
Special Application inspections, recommended fluids,
all required maintenance performed.
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 and lubricants are important to
Your dealer has trained technicians keep the vehicle in good working
Additional Maintenance who can perform required condition.
and Care maintenance using genuine
The Tire Rotation and Required
Additional Maintenance replacement parts. They have
Services are the responsibility of the
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 uptodate tools and equipment for
vehicle owner. It is recommended to
fast and accurate diagnostics. Many
Recommended Fluids have your dealer perform these
dealers have extended evening and
Recommended Fluids and services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.
Saturday hours, courtesy
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 Proper vehicle maintenance helps to
transportation, and online
Maintenance Replacement keep the vehicle in good working
scheduling to assist with service
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14 condition, improves fuel economy,
needs.
and reduces vehicle emissions.
Maintenance Records Your dealer recognizes the
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-15 Because of the way people use
importance of providing
vehicles, maintenance needs vary.
competitively priced maintenance
There may need to be more
and repair services. With trained
11-2 Service and Maintenance
frequent checks and services.

. Frequently towing a trailer.
The Additional Required
Maintenance
. Used for high speed or
Services Normal are for competitive driving. Schedule
vehicles that: . Used for taxi, police, or delivery Owner Checks and Services
. Carry passengers and cargo service.
within recommended limits on At Each Fuel Stop
the Tire and Loading Information Refer to the information in the
Maintenance Schedule Additional
. Check the engine oil level. See
label. See Vehicle Load Limits Engine Oil on page 109.
on page 99. Required Services Severe chart.
Once a Month
. Are driven on reasonable road
surfaces within legal driving
{ WARNING . Check the tire inflation
limits. Performing maintenance work can pressures. See Tire Pressure on
page 1047.
. Use the recommended fuel. See be dangerous and can cause
Recommended Fuel on serious injury. Perform . Inspect the tires for wear. See
page 933. maintenance work only if the Tire Inspection on page 1052.
Refer to the information in the required information, proper tools, . Check the windshield washer
Maintenance Schedule Additional and equipment are available. fluid level. See Washer Fluid on
Required Services Normal chart. If they are not, see your dealer to page 1020.
have a trained technician do the
The Additional Required work. See Doing Your Own Engine Oil Change
Services Severe are for vehicles
Service Work on page 103. When the Code 82 DIC message
that are:
displays, have the engine oil and
. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic filter changed within the next
in hot weather. 1 000 km/600 mi. If driven under the
. Mainly driven in hilly or best conditions, the engine oil life
mountainous terrain. system might not indicate the need
for vehicle service for more than a
year. The engine oil and filter must

. Check windshield washer fluid . Check restraint system
be changed at least once a year level. See Washer Fluid on components. See Safety System
and the oil life system must be page 1020. Check on page 316.
reset. Your trained dealer technician . Visually inspect windshield wiper . Visually inspect fuel system for
can perform this work. If the engine blades for wear, cracking, damage or leaks.
oil life system is reset accidentally, or contamination. See Exterior
service the vehicle within 5 000 km/
. Visually inspect exhaust system
Care on page 1080. Replace and nearby heat shields for
3,000 mi since the last service. worn or damaged wiper blades.
Reset the oil life system when the loose or damaged parts.
See Wiper Blade Replacement
oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life on page 1026. . Lubricate body components. See
System on page 1011. Exterior Care on page 1080.
. Check tire inflation pressures.
Tire Rotation and Required See Tire Pressure on . Check starter switch. See Starter
Services Every 12 000 km/ page 1047. Switch Check on page 1024.
7,500 mi . Inspect tire wear. See Tire . Check automatic transmission
Rotate the tires, if recommended for Inspection on page 1052. shift lock control function. See
the vehicle, and perform the Automatic Transmission Shift
. Visually check for fluid leaks. Lock Control Function Check on
following services. See Tire
Rotation on page 1052.
. Inspect engine air cleaner filter. page 1025.
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on . Check ignition transmission lock.
. Check engine oil level and oil page 1013.
life percentage. If needed, See Ignition Transmission Lock
change engine oil and filter, and
. Inspect brake system. Check on page 1025.
reset oil life system. See Engine . Visually inspect steering, . Check parking brake and
Oil on page 109 and Engine Oil suspension, and chassis automatic transmission park
Life System on page 1011. components for damaged, loose, mechanism. See Park Brake and
. Check engine coolant level. See or missing parts or signs of P (Park) Mechanism Check on
Engine Coolant on page 1016. wear. See Exterior Care on page 1025.
page 1080.

. Check accelerator pedal for
damage, high effort, or binding.
Replace if needed.
. Visually inspect gas strut for
signs of wear, cracks, or other
damage. Check the hold open
ability of the strut. See your
dealer if service is required.
. Check tire sealant expiration
date, if equipped. See Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on
page 1061.
. Inspect sunroof track and seal,
if equipped. See Sunroof on
page 217.

Footnotes Maintenance (6) Inspect for fraying, excessive

Schedule Additional Required cracking, or damage; replace,
Services Normal if needed.
(1) Or every two years, whichever
comes first. More frequent
replacement may be needed if the
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy
traffic, areas with poor air quality,
or areas with high dust levels.
Replacement may also be needed if
there is a reduction in airflow,
excessive window fogging, or odors.
(2) Check all fuel and vapor lines
and hoses for proper hook-up,
routing, and condition. Check that
the purge valve, if the vehicle has
one, works properly. Replace as
needed.
(3) Or every four years, whichever
comes first.
(4) Or every five years, whichever
comes first. See Cooling System on
page 1015.
(5) Or every 10 years, whichever
comes first.

Footnotes Maintenance (6) Inspect for fraying, excessive Special Application

Schedule Additional Required cracking, or damage; replace,
Services Severe if needed. Services
(1) Or every two years, whichever . Severe Commercial Use
comes first. More frequent Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis
replacement may be needed if the components every 5 000 km/
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy 3,000 mi.
traffic, areas with poor air quality, . Have underbody flushing service
or areas with high dust levels.
performed once a year.
Replacement may also be needed if
there is a reduction in airflow,
excessive window fogging, or odors.
(2) Check all fuel and vapor lines
and hoses for proper hook-up,
routing, and condition. Check that
the purge valve, if the vehicle has
one, works properly. Replace as
needed.
(3) Or every four years, whichever
comes first.
(4) Or every five years, whichever
comes first. See Cooling System on
page 1015.
(5) Or every 10 years, whichever
comes first.
Additional Battery Brakes

The battery supplies power to start Brakes stop the vehicle and are
Maintenance and Care the engine and operate any crucial to safe driving.
Your vehicle is an important additional electrical accessories. . Signs of brake wear may include
investment and caring for it properly . To avoid break-down or failure to chirping, grinding, or squealing
may help to avoid future costly start the vehicle, maintain a noises, or difficulty stopping.
repairs. To maintain vehicle battery with full cranking power. . Trained dealer technicians have
performance, additional
maintenance services may be . Trained dealer technicians have access to tools and equipment
required. It is recommended the diagnostic equipment to test to inspect the brakes and
that your dealer perform these the battery and ensure that the recommend quality parts
services their trained dealer connections and cables are engineered for the vehicle.
technicians know your vehicle best. corrosion-free.
Fluids
Your dealer can also perform a Belts
thorough assessment with a Proper fluid levels and approved
multi-point inspection to recommend . Belts may need replacing if they fluids protect the vehicles systems
when your vehicle may need squeak or show signs of and components. See
attention. The following list is cracking or splitting. Recommended Fluids and
intended to explain the services and . Trained dealer technicians have Lubricants on page 1112 for GM
conditions to look for that may access to tools and equipment approved fluids.
indicate services are required. to inspect the belts and . Engine oil and windshield
recommend adjustment or washer fluid levels should be
replacement when necessary. checked at every fuel fill.
. Instrument cluster lights may
come on to indicate that fluids
may be low and need to be
filled.
Hoses Shocks and Struts rubber; cracks or cuts in the

Hoses transport fluids and should Shocks and struts help aid in control tread or sidewall; or a bulge or
be regularly inspected to ensure for a smoother ride. split in the tire.
that there are no cracks or leaks. . Signs of wear may include
. Trained dealer technicians can
With a multi-point inspection, your steering wheel vibration, bounce/ inspect and recommend the right
dealer can inspect the hoses and sway while braking, longer tires. Your dealer can also
advise if replacement is needed. stopping distance, or uneven provide tire/wheel balancing
tire wear. services to ensure smooth
Lamps vehicle operation at all speeds.
Properly working headlamps, . As part of the multi-point Your dealer sells and services
taillamps, and brake lamps are inspection, trained dealer name brand tires.
important to see and be seen on technicians can visually inspect
the road. the shocks and struts for signs Vehicle Care
of leaking, blown seals, To help keep the vehicle looking like
. Signs that the headlamps need or damage, and can advise
attention include dimming, failure new, vehicle care products are
when service is needed. available from your dealer. For
to light, cracking, or damage.
The brake lamps need to be Tires information on how to clean and
checked periodically to ensure protect the vehicles interior and
Tires need to be properly inflated, exterior, see Interior Care on
that they light when braking. rotated, and balanced. Maintaining page 1083 and Exterior Care on
. With a multi-point inspection, the tires can save money, fuel, and page 1080.
your dealer can check the lamps can reduce the risk of tire failure.
and note any concerns. . Signs that the tires need to be
replaced include three or more
visible treadwear indicators; cord
or fabric showing through the
Wheel Alignment Wiper Blades

Wheel alignment is critical for Wiper blades need to be cleaned
ensuring that the tires deliver and kept in good condition to
optimal wear and performance. provide a clear view.
. Signs that the alignment may . Signs of wear include streaking,
need to be adjusted include skipping across the windshield,
pulling, improper vehicle and worn or split rubber.
handling, or unusual tire wear. . Trained dealer technicians can
. Your dealer has the required check the wiper blades and
equipment to ensure proper replace them when needed.
wheel alignment.
Windshield
For safety, appearance, and the
best viewing, keep the windshield
clean and clear.
. Signs of damage include
scratches, cracks, and chips.
. Trained dealer technicians can
inspect the windshield and
recommend proper replacement
if needed.
Recommended Fluids
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, of
the proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is
recommended. See Engine Oil on page 109.
Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 1016.
Hydraulic Brake/Clutch System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88863461, in
Canada 88863462).
Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protection
requirements.
Automatic Transmission DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Manual Transmission Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 19259104, in Canada 19259105).
Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Manual Transmission Shift Linkage Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubrication Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, in Canada 89021674)
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Release Pawl
Hood and Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 96950990
Engine Oil Filter 93185674 PF2257G
Passenger Compartment Air Filter 13271190 CF181
Spark Plugs 55580961 41117
Wiper Blades
Driver Side 65.0 cm (25.6 in) 95228809
Passenger Side 38.0 cm (15.0 in) 95228810
Rear 26.5 cm (10.4 in) 95016702
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
Odometer
Reading
Odometer
Reading
Odometer
Reading
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is
Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See Engine Specifications
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 122 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-3 Identification Label
This label, in the spare tire well in
the trunk, has the following
information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
This legal identifier is in the front
. Model designation.
corner of the instrument panel, on . Paint information.
the left side of the vehicle. It can be
seen through the windshield from
. Production options and special
outside. The VIN also appears on equipment.
the Vehicle Certification and Service Do not remove this label from the
Parts labels and certificates of title vehicle.
and registration.
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 1112 for more information.
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant label located under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System
1.4L L4 6.5 L 6.9 qt
1.8L L4 6.0 L 6.3 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
1.4L L4 4.0 L 4.2 qt
1.8L L4 4.5 L 4.8 qt
Fuel Tank 46.0 L 12.2 gal
Wheel Nut Torque 140 Y 100 lb ft
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Technical Data 12-3
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
1.4L L4 B Automatic and Manual 0.7 mm (0.028 in)
1.8L L4 LUW H Automatic and Manual 0.7 mm (0.028 in)
1.8L L4 LWE G Automatic and Manual 0.7 mm (0.028 in)
Engine Drive Belt Routing
1.8L L4 Engine (with Air 1.8L L4 Engine (without Air

Conditioning) Conditioning)
1.4L L4 Engine
12-4 Technical Data
2 NOTES
Customer Information 13-1
Customer Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Information
Information the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Customer Satisfaction
Reporting Safety Defects to Procedure
Customer Information the Canadian Your satisfaction and goodwill are
Customer Satisfaction Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 important to your dealer and to
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
Customer Assistance General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
with the sales transaction or the
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Vehicle Data Recording and operation of the vehicle will be
Customer Assistance for Text resolved by your dealer's sales or
Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and service departments. Sometimes,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4 however, despite the best intentions
GM Mobility Reimbursement Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14 of all concerned, misunderstandings
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 can occur. If your concern has not
Roadside Assistance OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Radio Frequency been resolved to your satisfaction,
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 the following steps should be taken:
Scheduling Service Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Radio Frequency STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
Courtesy Transportation Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 with a member of dealership
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 management. Normally, concerns
Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-9 can be quickly resolved at that level.
Service Publications If the matter has already been
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-11 reviewed with the sales, service,
or parts manager, contact the owner
of your dealership or the general
manager.
13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting Chevrolet, 40 days. If you do not agree with the
member of dealership management, remember that your concern will decision given in your case, you
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's may reject it and proceed with any
resolved by your dealership without facility. That is why we suggest other venue for relief available
further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first. to you.
Chevrolet Customer Assistance STEP THREE U.S. Owners: You may contact the BBB Auto Line
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In Both General Motors and your Program using the toll-free
Canada, call General Motors of dealer are committed to making telephone number or write them at
Canada Customer Care Centre at sure you are completely satisfied the following address:
1-800-263-3777 (English), with the new vehicle. However,
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). BBB Auto Line Program
if you continue to remain unsatisfied Council of Better Business
We encourage you to call the after following the procedure Bureaus, Inc.
toll-free number in order to give your outlined in Steps One and Two, you 4200 Wilson Boulevard
inquiry prompt attention. Have the can file with the Better Business Suite 800
following information available to Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program Arlington, VA 22203-1838
give the Customer Assistance to enforce your rights.
representative: Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
The BBB Auto Line Program is an www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
. Vehicle Identification out-of-court program administered
Number (VIN). This is available by the Council of Better Business This program is available in all
from the vehicle registration or Bureaus to settle automotive 50 states and the District of
title, or the plate at the top left of disputes regarding vehicle repairs or Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
the instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle vehicle age, mileage, and other
through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may factors. General Motors reserves
be required to resort to this informal the right to change eligibility
. Dealership name and location. limitations and/or discontinue its
dispute resolution program prior to
. Vehicle delivery date and filing a court action, use of the participation in this program.
present mileage. program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within
STEP THREE Canadian For further information concerning Customer Assistance

Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor
not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
Offices
addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call Chevrolet encourages customers to
procedure outlined in Steps One the General Motors Customer Care call the toll-free number for
and Two, General Motors of Canada Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English), assistance. However, if a customer
Limited wants you to be aware of its 1-800-263-7854 (French), wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
participation in a no-charge or write to: the letter should be addressed to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program. The Mediation/Arbitration Program
General Motors of Canada Limited United States and Puerto Rico
c/o Customer Care Centre
has committed to binding arbitration General Motors of Canada Limited Chevrolet Motor Division
of owner disputes involving Mail Code: CA1-163-005 Chevrolet Customer Assistance
factory-related vehicle service 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Center
claims. The program provides for Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 P.O. Box 33170
the review of the facts involved by Detroit, MI 48232-5170
an impartial third party arbiter, and The inquiry should be accompanied www.Chevrolet.com
may include an informal hearing by the Vehicle Identification
before the arbiter. The program is Number (VIN). 1-800-222-1020
designed so that the entire dispute 1-800-833-2438 (For Text
settlement process, from the time Telephone Devices (TTYs))
you file your complaint to the final Roadside Assistance:
decision, should be completed in 1-800-243-8872
about 70 days. We believe our From U.S. Virgin Islands:
impartial program offers advantages 1-800-496-9994
over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and
free of charge.
Canada Assistance Center. Any TTY user in I (Service History): View

the U.S. can communicate with printable dealer-recorded service
General Motors of Canada Limited
Chevrolet by dialing: records and self-recorded service
Customer Care Centre, Mail
1-800-833-2438. TTY users in records.
Code: CA1-163-005
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
1908 Colonel Sam Drive D (Preferred Dealer
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Information): Select a preferred
www.gm.ca Online Owner Center dealer and view dealer location,
1-800-263-3777 (English) Online Owner Experience maps, phone numbers, and hours.
1-800-263-7854 (French) (U.S.) my.chevrolet.com J (Warranty Tracking
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Information): Track the vehicles
The Chevrolet online owner
Telephone devices (TTYs)) warranty information.
experience is a one-stop resource
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-268-6800
that allows interaction with J (Recall Information): View
Chevrolet and keeps important active recalls or search by Vehicle
Overseas vehicle-specific information in one Identification Number (VIN). See
place. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Please contact the local General
on page 121.
Motors Business Unit. Membership Benefits
E (Vehicle Information): H (Other Account Information):
Customer Assistance for View GM Card, SiriusXM Satellite
Download owner manuals and view
radio, and OnStar account
Text Telephone (TTY) vehicle-specific how-to videos.
information.
Users G (Maintenance Information): F (Live Chat Support): Chat live
View maintenance schedules,
To assist customers who are deaf, with online help representatives.
required alerts, OnStar onboard
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired Visit my.chevrolet.com to register
vehicle diagnostic information, and
and who use Text Telephones
schedule service appointments. your vehicle.
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY
equipment available at its Customer
Chevrolet Owner Centre GM Mobility General Motors of Canada also has

(Canada) chevroletowner.ca a Mobility Program. Call
Reimbursement Program 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for
Take a trip to the Chevrolet Owner details. TTY users call
Centre: 1-800-263-3830.
. Chat live with online help
representatives. Roadside Assistance
. Use the Vehicle Tools section. Program
. Access third party enthusiast For U.S.-purchased vehicles, call
sites and social media networks. This program is available to 1-800-243-8872; (Text Telephone
. Locate owner resources such as qualified applicants for cost (TTY): 1-888-889-2438).
lease-end, financing, and reimbursement of eligible For Canadian-purchased vehicles,
warranty information. aftermarket adaptive equipment call 1-800-268-6800.
. required for the vehicle, such as
Retrieve your favorite articles, Service is available 24 hours a day,
hand controls or a wheelchair/
quizzes, tips, and multimedia 365 days a year.
scooter lift for the vehicle.
galleries organized into the
Features and Auto Care For more information on the limited Calling for Assistance
Sections. offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or When calling Roadside Assistance,
call the GM Mobility Assistance have the following information
. Download the owner manual for
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text ready:
your vehicle, quickly and easily.
Telephone (TTY) users, call
. Find the 1-800-833-9935.
. Your name, home address, and
Chevrolet-recommended home telephone number.
maintenance services for your . Telephone number of your
vehicle. location.
. Location of the vehicle.

. Model, year, color, and license claims are made too often, or the must be in good condition and
plate number of the vehicle. same type of claim is made many properly inflated. It is the owner's
. Odometer reading, Vehicle times. responsibility for the repair or
Identification Number (VIN), and replacement of the tire if it is not
Services Provided covered by the warranty.
delivery date of the vehicle.
. Emergency Fuel Delivery: . Battery Jump Start: Service to
. Description of the problem.
Delivery of enough fuel for the jump start a dead battery.
Coverage vehicle to get to the nearest
service station. Services Not Included in
Services are provided up to 5 years/
. Lock-Out Service: Service to Roadside Assistance
160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever
comes first. unlock the vehicle if you are . Impound towing caused by
locked out. A remote unlock may violation of any laws.
In the U.S., anyone driving the be available if you have OnStar.
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a . Legal fines.
For security reasons, the driver
person driving the vehicle without must present identification . Mounting, dismounting,
permission from the owner is not before this service is given. or changing of snow tires,
covered. chains, or other traction devices.
. Emergency Tow from a Public
Roadside Assistance is not a part of Road or Highway: Tow to the . Towing or services for vehicles
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. nearest Chevrolet dealer for driven on a non-public road or
Chevrolet and General Motors of warranty service, or if the vehicle highway.
Canada Limited reserve the right to was in a crash and cannot be
make any changes or discontinue driven. Assistance is also given Services Specific to
the Roadside Assistance program at when the vehicle is stuck in the Canadian-Purchased Vehicles
any time without notification. sand, mud, or snow. . Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement
Chevrolet and General Motors of . Flat Tire Change: Service to is approximately $5 Canadian.
Canada Limited reserve the right to change a flat tire with the spare Diesel fuel delivery may be
limit services or payment to an tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
owner or driver if they decide the
restricted. Propane and other to Roadside Assistance. If your dealer requests you to bring
fuels are not provided through Mechanical failures may be the vehicle for service, you are
this service. covered, however any cost for urged to do so as early in the work
. Lock-Out Service: Vehicle parts and labor for repairs not day as possible to allow for
registration is required. covered by the warranty are the same-day repair.
owner responsibility.
. Trip Interruption Benefits and Courtesy Transportation
Assistance: Must be over Scheduling Service
250 kilometers from where your Program
trip was started to qualify. Appointments To enhance your ownership
General Motors of Canada When the vehicle requires warranty experience, we and our participating
Limited requires service, contact your dealer and dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
pre-authorization, original request an appointment. By Transportation, a customer support
detailed receipts, and a copy of scheduling a service appointment program for vehicles with the
the repair orders. Once and advising the service consultant Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty
authorization has been received, of your transportation needs, your Coverage period in Canada),
the Roadside Assistance advisor dealer can help minimize your extended powertrain, and/or
will help to make arrangements inconvenience. hybrid-specific warranties in both
and explain how to receive the U.S. and Canada.
If the vehicle cannot be scheduled
payment.
into the service department Several Courtesy Transportation
. Alternative Service: If immediately, keep driving it until it options are available to assist in
assistance cannot be provided can be scheduled for service, reducing inconvenience when
right away, the Roadside unless, of course, the problem is warranty repairs are required.
Assistance advisor may give safety related. If it is, please call Courtesy Transportation is not a
permission to get local your dealership, let them know this, part of the New Vehicle Limited
emergency road service. You will and ask for instructions. Warranty. A separate booklet
receive payment, up to $100,
entitled Limited Warranty and
after sending the original receipt
Owner Assistance Information
furnished with each new vehicle Public Transportation or Fuel Rental reimbursement will be limited
provides detailed warranty coverage Reimbursement and must be supported by original
information. If the vehicle requires overnight receipts. This requires that you sign
warranty repairs, and public and complete a rental agreement
Transportation Options and meet state/provincial, local, and
transportation is used instead of
Warranty service can generally be your dealer's shuttle service, the rental vehicle provider requirements.
completed while you wait. However, expense must be supported by Requirements vary and may include
if you are unable to wait, GM helps original receipts and can only be up minimum age requirements,
to minimize inconvenience by to the maximum amount allowed by insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
providing several transportation GM for shuttle service. In addition, You are responsible for fuel usage
options. Depending on the for U.S. customers, should you charges and may also be
circumstances, your dealer can offer arrange transportation through a responsible for taxes, levies, usage
one of the following: friend or relative, limited fees, excessive mileage, or rental
reimbursement for reasonable fuel usage beyond the completion of the
Shuttle Service repair.
expenses may be available. Claim
Shuttle service is the preferred amounts should reflect actual costs It may not be possible to provide a
means of offering Courtesy and be supported by original like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
Transportation. Dealers may provide receipts. See your dealer for
shuttle service to get you to your information regarding the allowance Additional Program
destination with minimal interruption amounts for reimbursement of fuel Information
of your daily schedule. This includes or other transportation costs. All program options, such as shuttle
one-way or round-trip shuttle service
Courtesy Rental Vehicle service, may not be available at
within reasonable time and distance
every dealer. Please contact your
parameters of your dealer's area. Your dealer may arrange to provide dealer for specific information about
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or availability. All Courtesy
reimburse you for a rental vehicle Transportation arrangements will be
that you obtain if the vehicle is kept administered by appropriate dealer
for an overnight warranty repair. personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to ensure that the vehicle's designed corrosion problems, and may not
unilaterally modify, change, appearance, durability, and safety perform properly in subsequent
or discontinue Courtesy are preserved. The use of Genuine collisions. Aftermarket parts are not
Transportation at any time and to GM parts can help maintain the GM covered by the GM New Vehicle
resolve all questions of claim New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
eligibility pursuant to the terms and Recycled original equipment parts failure related to such parts is not
conditions described herein at its may also be used for repair. These covered by that warranty.
sole discretion. parts are typically removed from Repair Facility
vehicles that were total losses in
Collision Damage Repair prior crashes. In most cases, the GM also recommends that you
parts being recycled are from choose a collision repair facility that
If the vehicle is involved in a meets your needs before you ever
collision and it is damaged, have the undamaged sections of the vehicle.
A recycled original equipment GM need collision repairs. Your dealer
damage repaired by a qualified
part may be an acceptable choice to may have a collision repair center
technician using the proper
maintain the vehicle's originally with GM-trained technicians and
equipment and quality replacement stateoftheart equipment, or be
parts. Poorly performed collision designed appearance and safety
performance; however, the history of able to recommend a collision repair
repairs diminish the vehicle resale
these parts is not known. Such parts center that has GM-trained
value, and safety performance can
are not covered by the GM New technicians and comparable
be compromised in subsequent equipment.
collisions. Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
related failures are not covered by Insuring the Vehicle
Collision Parts that warranty.
Protect your investment in the GM
Genuine GM Collision parts are new Aftermarket collision parts are also vehicle with comprehensive and
parts made with the same materials available. These are made by collision insurance coverage. There
and construction methods as the companies other than GM and may are significant differences in the
parts with which the vehicle was not have been tested for the vehicle. quality of coverage afforded by
originally built. Genuine GM As a result, these parts may fit various insurance policy terms.
Collision parts are the best choice to poorly, exhibit premature durability/
Many insurance policies provide If a Crash Occurs

. Vehicle Identification
reduced protection to the GM Number (VIN).
If there has been an injury, call
vehicle by limiting compensation for . Insurance company and policy
emergency services for help. Do not
damage repairs by using number.
leave the scene of a crash until all
aftermarket collision parts. Some
matters have been taken care of. . General description of the
insurance companies will not
Move the vehicle only if its position damage to the other vehicle.
specify aftermarket collision parts.
puts you in danger, or you are
When purchasing insurance, we Choose a reputable repair facility
instructed to move it by a police
recommend that you ensure that the that uses quality replacement parts.
officer.
vehicle will be repaired with GM See Collision Parts earlier in this
original equipment collision parts. Give only the necessary information section.
If such insurance coverage is not to police and other parties involved
If the airbag has inflated, see What
available from your current in the crash.
Will You See after an Airbag
insurance carrier, consider switching For emergency towing see Inflates? on page 322.
to another insurance carrier. Roadside Assistance Program on
If the vehicle is leased, the leasing page 135. Managing the Vehicle Damage
company may require you to have Repair Process
Gather the following information:
insurance that ensures repairs with In the event that the vehicle requires
Genuine GM Original Equipment . Driver name, address, and damage repairs, GM recommends
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or telephone number. that you take an active role in its
Genuine Manufacturer replacement . Driver license number. repair. If you have a pre-determined
parts. Read the lease carefully, as repair facility of choice, take the
you may be charged at the end of
. Owner name, address, and
telephone number. vehicle there, or have it towed there.
the lease for poor quality repairs. Specify to the facility that any
. Vehicle license plate number. required replacement collision parts
. Vehicle make, model, and be original equipment parts, either
model year. new Genuine GM parts or recycled
original GM parts. Remember, Service Publications In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,

recycled parts will not be covered by Owner Manual, and Warranty
the GM vehicle warranty.
Ordering Information Manual.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, Service Manuals RETAIL SELL PRICE:
but you must live with the repair. Service Manuals have the diagnosis $35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
Depending on your policy limits, and repair information on the shipping fees.
your insurance company may engines, transmission, axle, Without Portfolio: Owner
initially value the repair using suspension, brakes, electrical, Manual only.
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with steering, body, etc.
the repair professional, and insist on RETAIL SELL PRICE:
Genuine GM parts. Remember, Service Bulletins $25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
if the vehicle is leased, you may be shipping fees.
Service Bulletins give additional
obligated to have the vehicle technical service information
repaired with Genuine GM parts,
Current and Past Models
needed to knowledgeably service
even if your insurance coverage General Motors cars and trucks. Technical Service Bulletins and
does not pay the full cost. Each bulletin contains instructions Manuals are available for current
to assist in the diagnosis and and past model GM vehicles.
If another party's insurance
company is paying for the repairs, service of the vehicle. ORDER TOLL FREE:
you are not obligated to accept a 1-800-551-4123 Monday Friday
repair valuation based on that Owner Information 8:00 AM 6:00 PM Eastern Time
insurance company's collision policy Owner publications are written For Credit Card Orders Only
repair limits, as you have no specifically for owners and intended (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), see
contractual limits with that company. to provide basic operational Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
In such cases, you can have control information about the vehicle. The
of the repair and parts choices as Owner Manual includes the
long as the cost stays within Maintenance Schedule for all
reasonable limits. models.
Or write to: Reporting Safety However, NHTSA cannot

Helm, Incorporated become involved in individual
Attention: Customer Service
Defects problems between you, your
47911 Halyard Drive dealer, or General Motors.
Plymouth, MI 48170 Reporting Safety Defects
To contact NHTSA, you may call
Prices are subject to change without to the United States the Vehicle Safety Hotline
notice and without incurring Government toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
obligation. Allow ample time for (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
delivery. If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could cause http://www.safercar.gov; or
All listed prices are quoted in U.S. a crash or could cause injury or write to:
funds. Make checks payable in U.S. death, you should immediately
funds.
Administrator, NHTSA
inform the National Highway 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Traffic Safety Administration Washington, D.C. 20590
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
You can also obtain other
General Motors.
information about motor
If NHTSA receives similar vehicle safety from
complaints, it may open an http://www.safercar.gov.
investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign.
Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects Vehicle Data

to the Canadian to General Motors Recording and
Government In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Privacy
If you live in Canada, and you Transport Canada) in a situation like
believe that the vehicle has a safety this, notify General Motors. The vehicle has a number of
defect, notify Transport Canada computers that record information
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
immediately, and notify General about the vehicles performance and
Chevrolet Motor Division how it is driven. For example, the
Motors of Canada Limited. Call
Chevrolet Customer Assistance vehicle uses computer modules to
Transport Canada at
Center monitor and control engine and
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
P.O. Box 33170 transmission performance, to
Transport Canada Detroit, MI 48232-5170 monitor the conditions for airbag
Road Safety Branch deployment and deploy them in a
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
80 rue Noel crash, and, if equipped, to provide
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
Gatineau, QC J8Z 0A1 antilock braking to help the driver
(French), or write:
control the vehicle. These modules
General Motors of Canada Limited may store data to help the dealer
Customer Care Centre, Mail technician service the vehicle.
Code: CA1-163-005 Some modules may also store data
1908 Colonel Sam Drive about how the vehicle is operated,
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 such as rate of fuel consumption or
average speed. These modules may
retain personal preferences, such as
radio presets, seat positions, and
temperature settings.
Event Data Recorders These data can help provide a if the vehicle is leased, with the
better understanding of the consent of the lessee; in response
This vehicle is equipped with an circumstances in which crashes and to an official request by police or
event data recorder (EDR). The injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are similar government office; as part of
main purpose of an EDR is to recorded by your vehicle only if a GM's defense of litigation through
record, in certain crash or near non-trivial crash situation occurs; no the discovery process; or, as
crash-like situations, such as an air data are recorded by the EDR under required by law. Data that GM
bag deployment or hitting a road normal driving conditions and no collects or receives may also be
obstacle, data that will assist in personal data (e.g., name, gender, used for GM research needs or may
understanding how a vehicles age, and crash location) are be made available to others for
systems performed. The EDR is recorded. However, other parties, research purposes, where a need is
designed to record data related to such as law enforcement, could shown and the data is not tied to a
vehicle dynamics and safety combine the EDR data with the type specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
systems for a short period of time, of personally identifying data
typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to
routinely acquired during a crash OnStar
investigation.
record such data as: If the vehicle is equipped with
To read data recorded by an EDR, OnStar and has an active
. How various systems in your special equipment is required, and subscription, additional data may be
vehicle were operating; access to the vehicle or the EDR is collected through the OnStar
. Whether or not the driver and needed. In addition to the vehicle system. This includes information
passenger safety belts were manufacturer, other parties, such as about the vehicles operation; about
buckled/fastened; law enforcement, that have the collisions involving the vehicle; the
.
special equipment, can read the use of the vehicle and its features;
How far (if at all) the driver was information if they have access to
depressing the accelerator and/ and, in certain situations, the
the vehicle or the EDR. location and approximate GPS
or brake pedal; and,
GM will not access this data or speed of the vehicle. Refer to the
. How fast the vehicle was share it with others except: with the
traveling. consent of the vehicle owner or,
OnStar Terms and Conditions and Radio Frequency

Privacy Statement on the OnStar
website.
Statement
This vehicle has systems that
Radio Frequency operate on a radio frequency that
Identification (RFID) comply with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
RFID technology is used in some rules and with Industry Canada
vehicles for functions such as tire Standards RSSGEN/210/220/310.
pressure monitoring and ignition
Operation is subject to the following
system security, as well as in
two conditions:
connection with conveniences such
as Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) 1. The device may not cause
transmitters for remote door locking/ harmful interference.
unlocking and starting, and 2. The device must accept any
in-vehicle transmitters for garage interference received, including
door openers. RFID technology in interference that may cause
GM vehicles does not use or record undesired operation of the
personal information or link with any device.
other GM system containing
personal information. Changes or modifications to any of
these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
2 NOTES
OnStar 14-1
OnStar OnStar Overview Press = to:

. Make a call, end a call,
or answer an incoming call.
OnStar Overview .
OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Give OnStar Hands-Free Calling
voice commands.
OnStar Services . Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Navigation voice commands.
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Requires the available Directions
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 If equipped, this vehicle has a and Connections service plan.
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 comprehensive, in-vehicle system
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 that can connect to a live Advisor Press Q to connect to a live
for Emergency, Security, Navigation, Advisor to:
OnStar Additional Information Connection, and Diagnostic
OnStar Additional Services.
. Verify account information or
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 update contact information.
The OnStar system status light is .
next to the OnStar buttons. If the Get driving directions. Requires
status light is: the available Directions and
Connections service plan.
. Solid Green: System is ready. . Receive On-Demand
. Flashing Green: On a call. Diagnostics for a check of the
. Red: Indicates a problem. vehicles key operating systems.
. Receive Roadside Assistance.
Press Q or call 1-888-4ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) to speak to an
Advisor.
14-2 OnStar
Press the OnStar Emergency button OnStar Services automatic door locks, and can help
> to get a priority connection to an police locate the vehicle if it is
Emergency Advisor available stolen.
24/7 to: Emergency
. Get help for an emergency. With Automatic Crash Response, Navigation
the built-in system can automatically
. Be a Good Samaritan or OnStar navigation requires the
connect to help in most crashes,
respond to an AMBER Alert. Directions and Connections
even if help cannot be requested.
service plan.
. Get crisis assistance and
Press > to connect to an
evacuation routes. Press Q to receive directions or
Emergency Advisor. GPS
have them sent to the vehicle
technology is used to identify the
navigation screen, if equipped.
vehicle location and can provide
Destinations can also be forwarded
critical information to emergency
to the vehicle from MapQuest.com.
personnel. The Advisor is also
The OnStar mapping database is
trained to offer critical assistance in
continuously updated. For coverage
emergency situations before first
maps, see www.onstar.com (U.S.)
responders arrive.
www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Security Turn-by-Turn Navigation
OnStar provides services like Stolen 1. Press Q to connect to a live
Vehicle Assistance, Remote Ignition Advisor.
Block, and Roadside Assistance,
if the vehicle is equipped. OnStar 2. Request directions.
can unlock the vehicle doors 3. Directions are downloaded to the
remotely, if it is equipped with vehicle.
4. Follow the voice-guided
commands.
OnStar 14-3
Using Voice Commands 2. Say Repeat. System responds Destination Download: Press Q,
During a Planned Route with the last direction given, then then request the Advisor to
responds with OnStar ready, download directions to the
Cancel Route then a tone. navigation system in the vehicle.
1. Press =. System responds: 3. Say Goodbye. Exits voice After the call ends, press the Go
OnStar ready, then a tone. Say commands. button on the navigation screen to
Cancel route. System begin driving directions.
Get My Destination
responds: Do you want to Destinations can also be
cancel directions? 1. Press =. System responds: downloaded on the go. For
2. Say Yes. System responds: OnStar ready, then a tone. information about eNav, Destination
OK, request completed, thank 2. Say Get my destination. Download, and coverage maps see
you, goodbye. System responds with address www.onstar.com (U.S.),
and the distance to the www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Route Preview
destination, then responds with
1. Press =. System responds: OnStar ready, then a tone. Connections
OnStar ready, then a tone. 3. Say Goodbye. Exits voice OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows
2. Say Route preview. System commands. calls to be made and received from
responds with the next three the vehicle. The vehicle can also be
maneuvers. Other Navigation Services controlled from a cell phone through
Available from OnStar the OnStar RemoteLink mobile app.
3. Say Goodbye. Exits voice For coverage maps, see
commands. OnStar eNav: Allows subscribers
to send destinations from www.onstar.com (U.S.),
Repeat MapQuest.com to their Turn-by-Turn www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Navigation or screen-based Hands-Free Calling
1. Press =. System responds:
navigation system. When ready, the
OnStar ready, then a tone. directions will be downloaded to the 1. Press =. System responds:
vehicle. OnStar ready.
14-4 OnStar
2. Say Call. System responds: End a Call Place a Call Using a Stored
Please say the name or number Number
to call. Press =. System responds: Call
ended. 1. Press =. System responds:
3. Say the entire number without
OnStar ready.
pausing, including a 1 and the Store a Name Tag for Speed
area code. System responds: Dialing 2. Say Call <name tag>. System
OK calling. responds: OK, calling
1. Press =. System responds: <name tag>.
Calling 911 Emergency OnStar ready.
Verify Minutes and Expiration
1. Press =. The system responds 2. Say Store. System responds:
OnStar Ready, followed by Please say the number you Press = and say Minutes then
a tone. would like to store. Verify to check how many minutes
3. Say the entire number without remain and their expiration date.
2. Say Call. The system responds
Please say the name or number pausing. System responds: OnStar Mobile App
to call. Please say the name tag.
Download the OnStar RemoteLink
3. Say 911 without pausing. The 4. Pick a name tag. System mobile app to select Apple, Android
system responds 911. responds: About to store <name and BlackBerry devices to check
tag>. Does that sound OK? vehicle fuel level, oil life, or tire
4. Say Call. The system responds
OK, dialing 911. 5. Say Yes or say No to try pressure; to start the vehicle (if
again. System responds: OK, equipped) or unlock it; or to connect
Retrieve My Number storing <name tag>. to an OnStar Advisor. For OnStar
RemoteLink information and
1. Press =. System responds: compatibility, see www.onstar.com
OnStar ready. (U.S.), www.onstar.ca (Canada).
2. Say My number. System
responds: Your OnStar
Hands-Free Calling number is.
OnStar 14-5
Diagnostics OnStar Additional How OnStar Service Works

OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics will Information Automatic Crash Response,
perform a vehicle check every Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,
month. It will check the engine, Transferring Service Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
transmission, antilock brakes, and Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,
major vehicle systems. It also Press Q to request account transfer Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-Turn
checks the tire pressures, if the eligibility information. The Advisor Navigation, and Hands-Free Calling
vehicle is equipped with the Tire can assist in canceling or removing are available on most vehicles. Not
Pressure Monitoring System. If a account information. If OnStar all OnStar services are available
diagnostics check is needed receives information that vehicle everywhere or on all vehicles. For
ownership has changed, OnStar more information, a full description
between e-mails, press Q, and an
may send a voice message to the of OnStar services, system
Advisor can run a check. vehicle, requesting updated account limitations, and OnStar terms and
information. conditions:
Reactivation for Subsequent . In the U.S. see www.onstar.com
Owners (U.S.) or call 1.888.4.ONSTAR.
(1.888.466.7827).
Press Q and follow the prompts to . In Canada see www.onstar.ca
speak to an Advisor as soon as (Canada) or call
possible after acquiring the vehicle. 1.888.4.ONSTAR.
The Advisor will update vehicle (1.888.466.7827).
records and will explain the OnStar
. TTY 1-877-248-2080
service offers and options available.
. Press Q to speak with an
Advisor.
14-6 OnStar
OnStar services require a vehicle service such as hills, tall buildings, TTY Users
electrical system, wireless service, tunnels, weather, electrical system
OnStar has the ability to
and GPS satellite technologies to be design and architecture of the
communicate to the deaf,
available and operating for features vehicle, damage to the vehicle in a
hard-of-hearing, or speech-impaired
to function properly. These systems crash, or wireless phone network
customers while in the vehicle. The
may not operate if the battery is congestion or jamming.
available dealer-installed TTY
discharged or disconnected. See Radio Frequency Statement on system can provide in-vehicle
OnStar service cannot work unless page 1315 for information access to all of the OnStar services,
your vehicle is in a place where regarding Part 15 of the Federal except Virtual Advisor and OnStar
OnStar has an agreement with a Communications Commission (FCC) Turn-by-Turn Navigation.
wireless service provider for service rules and Industry Canada
in that area, and the wireless Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. OnStar.com (U.S.) or OnStar.ca
service provider has coverage, (Canada)
network capacity, reception, and Services for People with
Disabilities The website provides access to
technology compatible with OnStar account information, allows
service. Service involving location Advisors provide services to help management of the OnStar
information about the vehicle cannot subscribers with physical disabilities subscription, and viewing of videos
work unless GPS signals are and medical conditions. of each service. Get subscription
available, unobstructed, and plan pricing and sign up for OnStar
compatible with the OnStar Press Q for help with: Vehicle Diagnostics. Click on the
hardware. OnStar service may not . Locating a gas station with an My Account tab on the home
work if the OnStar equipment is not attendant to pump gas. page. The website navigation and
properly installed or it has not been services provided may vary by
properly maintained. If equipment or
. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,
country.
software is added, connected, that meets accessibility needs.
or modified, OnStar service may not . Providing directions to the
work. Other problems beyond the closest hospital or pharmacy in
control of OnStar may prevent urgent situations.
OnStar 14-7
OnStar Personal Identification Potential Issues

. In emergency situations, OnStar
Number (PIN) can use the last stored GPS
OnStar cannot perform Remote location to send to emergency
A PIN is needed to access some of Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle responders.
the OnStar services, like Remote Assistance after the vehicle has
Door Unlock and Stolen Vehicle been off continuously for five days.
. A temporary loss of GPS can
Assistance. You will be prompted to After five days, OnStar can contact cause loss of the ability to send
change the PIN the first time when Roadside Assistance and a a Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.
speaking with an Advisor. To locksmith to help gain access to the The Advisor may give a verbal
change the OnStar PIN, call OnStar vehicle. route or may ask for a call back
and provide the Advisor with the after the vehicle is driven into an
current number.
Global Positioning open area.
System (GPS)
Warranty Cellular and GPS Antennas
. Obstruction of the GPS can
OnStar equipment may be occur in a large city with tall Avoid placing items over or near the
warranted as part of the New buildings; in parking garages; antenna to prevent blocking cellular
Vehicle Limited Warranty. The around airports; in tunnels, and GPS signal reception. Cellular
manufacturer of the vehicle underpasses, or parking reception is required for OnStar to
furnishes detailed warranty garages; or in an area with very send remote signals to the vehicle.
information. dense trees. If GPS signals are Unable to Connect to OnStar
not available, the OnStar system Message
Languages should still operate to call
The vehicle can be programmed to OnStar. However, OnStar could If there is limited cellular coverage
respond in English, French or have difficulty identifying the or the cellular network has reached
exact location. maximum capacity, this message
Spanish. Press Q and ask an
Advisor. Advisors can speak may come on. Press Q to try the
English, French or Spanish. call again or try again after driving a
few miles into another cellular area.
14-8 OnStar
Vehicle and Power Issues via wireless cellular communications THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED
cannot be assured. Third parties AS IS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
OnStar services require a vehicle
may unlawfully intercept or access ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
electrical system, wireless service,
transmissions and private IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
and GPS satellite technologies to be
communications without consent. LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
available and operating for features
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
to function properly. These systems OnStar - libcurl and unzip FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
may not operate if the battery is acknowledgments AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF
discharged or disconnected.
Certain OnStar components include THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO
Add-on Electrical Equipment libcurl and unzip software. Below EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
are the notices and licenses COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
The OnStar system is integrated LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
into the electrical architecture of the associated with this software:
DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
vehicle. Do not add any electrical libcurl: WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
equipment. See Add-On Electrical CONTRACT, TORT OR
Equipment on page 938. Added COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION
NOTICE OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
electrical equipment may interfere OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
with the operation of the OnStar Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, Daniel WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE
system and cause it to not operate. Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>. USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
Privacy All rights reserved. THE SOFTWARE.
The complete OnStar Privacy Permission to use, copy, modify, Except as contained in this notice,
Statement may be found at and distribute this software for any the name of a copyright holder shall
www.onstar.com (U.S.), purpose with or without fee is not be used in advertising or
or www.onstar.ca (Canada). hereby granted, provided that the otherwise to promote the sale, use
Privacy-sensitive users of wireless above copyright notice and this or other dealings in this Software
communications are cautioned that permission notice appear in all without prior written authorization of
the privacy of any information sent copies. the copyright holder.
OnStar 14-9
unzip: Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta, materials provided with the

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of the Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren, distribution. The sole exception
Info-ZIP copyright and license. The Rich Wales, Mike White to this condition is redistribution
definitive version of this document This software is provided as is, of a standard UnZipSFX binary
should be available at without warranty of any kind, (including SFXWiz) as part of a
ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/ express or implied. In no event shall self-extracting archive; that is
license.html indefinitely. Info-ZIP or its contributors be held permitted without inclusion of
liable for any direct, indirect, this license, as long as the
Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. All normal SFX banner has not
rights reserved. incidental, special or consequential
damages arising out of the use of or been removed from the binary or
For the purposes of this copyright inability to use this software. disabled.
and license, Info-ZIP is defined as 3. Altered versionsincluding, but
the following set of individuals: Permission is granted to anyone to
use this software for any purpose, not limited to, ports to new
Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis, including commercial applications, operating systems, existing ports
Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois, and to alter it and redistribute it with new graphical interfaces,
Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, freely, subject to the following and dynamic, shared, or static
Ed Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris restrictions: library versionsmust be plainly
Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig, marked as such and must not be
Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson, 1. Redistributions of source code misrepresented as being the
Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum, must retain the above copyright original source. Such altered
Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden, notice, definition, disclaimer, and versions also must not be
Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller, this list of conditions. misrepresented as being
Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens, 2. Redistributions in binary form Info-ZIP releasesincluding, but
George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, (compiled executables) must not limited to, labeling of the
Kai Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury, reproduce the above copyright altered versions with the names
Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda, notice, definition, disclaimer, and Info-ZIP (or any variation
this list of conditions in thereof, including, but not limited
documentation and/or other to, different capitalizations),
14-10 OnStar
Pocket UnZip, WiZ or

MacZip without the explicit
permission of Info-ZIP. Such
altered versions are further
prohibited from
misrepresentative use of the
Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mail
addresses or of the
Info-ZIP URL(s).
4. Info-ZIP retains the right to use
the names Info-ZIP, Zip,
UnZip, UnZipSFX, WiZ,
Pocket UnZip, Pocket Zip,
and MacZip for its own source
and binary releases.
INDEX i-1
A Airbag System (cont'd) Armrest

When Should an Airbag Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Accessories and
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21 Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-19 Assistance Program,
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Airbags Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Add-On Electrical
Adding Equipment to the Audio
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-25
Additional Information
Passenger Status Indicator . . . 5-11 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-13
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Audio System
Air Filter, Passenger
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17 Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Alarm Automatic
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Airbag System
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Antenna Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
How Does an Airbag
Multi-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18 Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18 Automatic Transmission
Passenger Sensing
Antilock Brake Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Shift Lock Control
What Makes an Airbag
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Appearance Care Auxiliary
What Will You See after an
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80 Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
i-2 INDEX
B Bulb Replacement (cont'd) Cargo

Headlamps, Front Turn Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Signal, and Parking Cautions, Danger, and
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-31 CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Central Locking System . . . . . . . . 2-7
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-26
Stoplamps, and Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-12
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . 7-26, 7-28, 7-37
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 Check
Bluetooth Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Brake
System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-15 C Ignition
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-25
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
California Child Restraints
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-34 Infants and Young
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Perchlorate Materials Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Lower Anchors and
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-37
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Capacities and Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43, 3-45
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29, 6-4
Carbon Monoxide Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Cleaning
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
INDEX i-3
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1 Cover Diagnostics

Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31 Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Door
Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3 Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-9 Text Telephone (TTY) Ajar Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-73 Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4 Central Locking System . . . . . . . 2-7
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Customer Information Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Service Publications Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Ordering Information . . . . . . .13-11 Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-3
Compressor Kit, Tire Customer Satisfaction Driver Information
Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Connections Driving
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3 D Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-9 Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Danger, Warnings, and For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-19
Coolant Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-6
Engine Temperature Daytime Running If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Courtesy Transportation Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Devices Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24
i-4 INDEX
E Engine (cont'd) Front Fog Lamp

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Electrical Equipment,
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Front Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Reduced Power Light . . . . . . . . .5-20 Front Seats
Electrical System
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-21 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Engine Compartment
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, 9-16 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Fuses and Circuit
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Instrument Panel Fuse
Filling a Portable Fuel
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 F Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Filter, Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
Emergency
Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-34
Engine
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-19
Check and Service Engine
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68 Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86 Requirements, California . . . . .9-34
Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6
Fluid Fuses
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-13 Engine Compartment
Coolant Temperature
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Fuses and Circuit
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Fog Lamps Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . 10-29, 6-4 Instrument Panel Fuse
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17
Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
INDEX i-5
G Headlamps Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 How to Wear Safety Belts
Gasoline
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Gauges
Daytime Running
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 I
Daytime Running Lamps Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
(DRL) Indicator Light . . . . . . . .5-21 Ignition Transmission Lock
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Warning Lights and
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-21 Infants and Young Children,
General Information
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Heater Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17 Instrument Panel
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1 Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
GM Mobility Reimbursement
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-6
H Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-27 J
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Hands-Free Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
i-6 INDEX
K Liftgate Lights (cont'd)

Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Reduced Engine Power . . . . . .5-20
Keyless Entry
Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-10
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3
Lighting Service Vehicle Soon . . . . . . . . .5-15
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 StabiliTrak OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Lights Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
L Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Traction Control System
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-41 Antilock Brake System (TCS)/StabiliTrak . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Lamps (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-15 Up-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2 Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Warning, Power Steering . . . . .5-16
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Link
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Daytime Running Smartphone . . . . . . 7-45, 7-47, 7-48
Headlamps, Front Turn Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Load Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Signal, and Parking Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Locks
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Engine Coolant Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Temperature Warning . . . . . . .5-18 Central Locking System . . . . . . . 2-7
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-12 Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
LATCH System High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-19
Replacing Parts after a Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Lower Anchors and Tethers
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43 Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 for Children (LATCH
LATCH, Lower Anchors and System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
INDEX i-7
M N Operation, Infotainment
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Maintenance Navigation
Ordering
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Service Publications . . . . . . . . .13-11
Maintenance Schedule New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Outlets
Recommended Fluids
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12 O Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-12 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Overview,
Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Infotainment
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Off-Road System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3, 7-5, 7-7
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Oil
Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
P
Messages Park
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . .10-11
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Mirrors Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-30
Blind Spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
OnStar
Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Brake and P (Park)
System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-25
OnStar Additional
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-20
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 Passenger Airbag Status
OnStar Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
OnStar Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Monitor System, Tire Passenger Compartment Air
OnStar Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
OnStar Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Movies . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50, 7-55, 7-56 Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-24
OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 OnStar Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
i-8 INDEX
Perchlorate Materials Program Reduced Engine Power

Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3 Courtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-7 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Personalization Proposition 65 Warning, Reimbursement Program,
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Phone Remote Keyless Entry
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . 7-26, 7-28, 7-37 R (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, 2-3
Hands-Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-42 Radio Frequency Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Pictures and Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-15 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Movies . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50, 7-55, 7-56 Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Replacement Parts
Port Radios Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20 AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14
Power Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17 Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-29
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16 Replacing LATCH System
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Replacing Safety Belt
Reduced Engine Light . . . . . . . .5-20 Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-4 System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-16
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-18 Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Reporting Safety Defects
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13
Power Steering Warning Recommended General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Pregnancy, Using Safety Recommended Fluids and Restraints
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
Privacy Records Retained Accessory
Radio Frequency Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15 Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15 Recreational Vehicle Roads
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77 Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
INDEX i-9
Roadside Assistance Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Service (cont'd)

Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 Publications Ordering
Roof Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-7 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61 Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-7
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Seats Vehicle Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-3 Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Running the Vehicle While Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Shift Lock Control Function
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Check, Automatic
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
S Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Shifting
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Securing Child Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16 Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43, 3-45 Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15 Security Signals, Turn and
How to Wear Safety Belts OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Smartphone
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45, 7-47, 7-48
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Service Spare Tire
Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-16 Accessories and Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-15 Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Specifications and
Safety Defects Reporting Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-3 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13 Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-15 StabiliTrak
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Maintenance, General OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1 Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
i-10 INDEX
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 T Tires (cont'd)

Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Terminology and
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . 1-4, 9-16 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Taillamps
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Uniform Tire Quality
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Power, Warning Lights . . . . . . . .5-16 Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4
Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Wheel Alignment and Tire
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-11
Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-58
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 When It Is Time for New
Tires
Storage Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Load Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Storage Areas Towing
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-77
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Storing the Tire Sealant Traction
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-68 Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-28
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-49
Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Control System (TCS)/
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 StabiliTrak Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-48
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Transmission
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
System Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Sealant and
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Sealant and Compressor
Transportation Program,
Kit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
INDEX i-11
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Vehicle (cont'd) Wheels

Turn and Lane-Change Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Alignment and Tire
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Service Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Turn Signal Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Vehicle Care Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Storing the Tire Sealant When It Is Time for New
U and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-68 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Uniform Tire Quality Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47 Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-36
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56 Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii W Windshield
Warning Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Winter
V Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Vehicle Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-26
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iii Wipers
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Identification Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
i-12 INDEX
2 NOTES

2013 Chevrolet Sonic Owners

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2013 Chevrolet Sonic Owners

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chevrolet Sonic Owner Manual - 2013 - 2nd PrintReady - 10/11/12 Black plate (1,1)

2013 Chevrolet Sonic Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Downloadable Applications . . . 7-45

2013 Chevrolet Sonic Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

specific vehicle to confirm each of Using this Manual

Symbols % : Audio Steering Wheel Controls

>: Safety Belt Reminders

In Brief Vehicle Features

7. Windshield Wiper/Washer on 17. Central Locking System on

8. Display Screen. 18. Climate Control Systems on

Starting the Vehicle

Liftgate Trunk Release To open the trunk from outside of

To open the liftgate from the

Power Windows Seat Adjustment Seat Height Adjuster

Second Row Seats

For vehicles with power outside

For vehicles with front reading

Climate Controls 6. Rear Window Defogger

Transmission lever to upshift, or push the Reverse Lockout

Vehicles equipped with a manual The manual transmission is

SEEK : of available favorite pages can D (Home Page): Press to enter

Steering Wheel Controls speakers while using the Cruise Control

Performance and StabiliTrak System

Combine several trips into a

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, and Exterior Mirrors

2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Remote Keyless Entry

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-3

2-4 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-5

2-6 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-7

2-8 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Press { to activate the safety locks Doors WARNING (Continued)

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-9

Emergency Trunk Release There is a glow-in-the-dark

2-10 Keys, Doors, and Windows

WARNING (Continued) Vehicle Security

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-11

Arming the System Disarming the System How to Detect a Tamper

2-12 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-13

Manual Mirrors Power Mirrors Folding Mirrors

2-14 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Actual Mirror View

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-15

Interior Mirrors Windows The vehicle aerodynamics are

2-16 Keys, Doors, and Windows

If equipped, push the switch down Safety Function

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-17

2-18 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Vent: Press and hold the front of

Dirt and debris may collect on the

Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats and Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Adding Equipment to the

3-2 Seats and Restraints

Seats and Restraints 3-3

Rear Seats To lower the head restraint, press Front Seats

The height of the head restraint can

3-4 Seats and Restraints

To adjust a manual seat: Reclining Seatbacks To recline a manual seatback:

If available, move the lever up or